Periodontics (PDFDrive)

Periodontics
Self Study
Appendix A – W
Accreditation
Site Visit: November 12-14, 2013
University of Illinois at Chicago  College of Dentistry  Celebrating our Centennial of Excellence
Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

November, 2013
Table of Contents
Title Page i
Table of Contents iii
Table of Appendices iv
General Information Sheet v
Previous Site Visit Recommendations viii
Compliance with Commission Policies ix
Standard 1 – Institutional Commitment/Program Effectiveness/Affiliations 1
Standard 2 – Program Director and Teaching Staff 7
Standard 3 – Facilities and Resources 9
Standard 4 – Curriculum and Program Duration 15
Standard 5 – Advanced Education Students/Residents 33
Standard 6 – Research 39
Summary of Self-Study Report 41
A Brilliant Future
- iii -

November, 2013
Table of Appendices
Appendix A-1: UIC College of Dentistry Vision and Mission Statements

Appendix A-2: Program Goals and Objectives
Appendix B: Exhibit 1a – Outcomes Measures and Methods of Assessment
Appendix C: Organization Chart for UIC College of Dentistry
Appendix D: Board Examination Student Success Rates
Appendix G: Exhibit 2 – Program Director’s Time Commitment
Appendix H: Exhibits 3.1 and 3.2 – Faculty
Appendix I: Exhibits 3.3 – BioSketches of the Program Director and Full Time Faculty
Appendix J: Monthly Attending Staff Schedules
Appendix K: Faculty Evaluation
Appendix L: Exhibit 4 – Information Regarding Facilities
Appendix M: Exhibit 5 – Information Regarding Support Staff
Appendix N: Exhibit 6 – Student/Resident Total Program Time
Appendix O: Exhibit 7 – Student/Resident Schedules
Appendix P: Exhibit 8 – Biomedical Sciences Instruction
Appendix Q: Course Outlines and Objectives
Appendix R: Schedule of off-service assignments
Appendix T: Exhibit 11 – Clinical Training
Appendix U: Description of the Endodontics Program
Appendix V: Student/Resident Evaluation Form
Appendix W: Due Process Policy
Appendix X: Material describing student rights and responsibilities
A Proud Past
- iv -

November, 2013
General Information
a. What is the length of the program? 34 months.
b. How many full-time students/residents are currently enrolled in the program per year?
Year I - 4 Year II – 4 Year III –
c. How many part-time students/residents are currently enrolled in the program per year?
0
d. What is the program’s CODA-authorized base number enrollment?

4 per year (12 total)
e. The program offers a X certificate degree or both
f. What other programs does the organization sponsor? Indicate whether each program is
accredited. Indicate which programs are accredited by the Commission on Dental
Accreditation.
Endodontics Accredited – CODA

Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Accredited – CODA
Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics Accredited – CODA
Pediatric Dentistry Accredited – CODA
Prosthodontics Accredited – CODA
Predoctoral DDS/DMD program Accredited – CODA
g. If the program is affiliated with other institutions, provide the full names and addresses
of the institutions, the purposes of the affiliation and the amount of time each
student/resident is assigned to the affiliated institutions.
NA
A Brilliant Future
- v -

November, 2013
h. What is the percentage of the students’/residents’ total program time devoted to

each segment of the program?
biomedical sciences 20 %
clinical Sciences 65 %
teaching 5 %
research 10 %
other (specify) 0 %
Total 100
Indicate the approximate number of periodontitis patients each student/resident will treat prior to
completion of the program:
Type I 35
Type II 50
Type II 65
Type IV 50
Note: The majority of periodontitis patients students treat are either AAP case Type III or IV. The
Type I cases are patients are healthy or have gingivitis and require procedures such as crown
lengthening, periodontal plastic surgery, dental implants, exposure of impacted teeth for orthodontic
movement, etc.
The approximate number of dental implants each student/resident will place prior to
completion of the program:
Implant Fixtures: 100
Implant Site Development: 15
A Proud Past
- vi -

November, 2013
For the clinical phases of the program, indicate the number of faculty members
specifically assigned to the advanced education program in each of the following
categories and their educational qualifications:
Total # Board # Educationally # Other**

Number Certified Qualified*
Full-time
2 2
Half-time
4 3 1
Less than half-

8 4 4
time
* Individual is eligible but has not applied to the relevant Board for certification.
**Individual is neither a Diplomate nor Candidate for board certification by the relevant
certifying Board.
Verify the cumulative full-time equivalent (F.T.E.) for all faculty Cumulative FTE
specifically assigned to this advanced education program.
For example: a program with the following staffing pattern – one full-
time (1.00) + one half-time (0.50) + one two days per week (0.40) + one
half-day per week (0.10) – would have an F.T.E. of 2.00.
6.15
A Brilliant Future
- vii -

November, 2013
Previous Site Visit Recommendations
Using the program’s previous site visit report, please demonstrate that the recommendations
included in the report have been remedied.
The suggested format for demonstrating compliance is to state the recommendation and then
provide a narrative response and/or reference documentation within the remainder of this self-
study document.
* Please note if the last site visit was conducted prior to the implementation of the revised
Accreditation Standards for Advanced Specialty Education Programs (January 1, 2000), some
recommendations may no longer apply. Should further guidance be required, please contact
Commission on Dental Accreditation staff.
There were no recommendations in the 2006 site visit report.
A Proud Past
- viii -

November, 2013
Compliance With Commission Policies
Identify all changes which have occurred within the program since the program’s previous site
visit, in accordance with the Commission’s policy on Reporting Program Changes in Accredited
Programs.
Department Heads:
Dr. Phillip T. Marucha 12/16/2003-4/1/2010
Dr. Thomas Hart 4/1/2010-12/6/2011
Dr. Phillip T. Marucha 12/7/2011-7/15/2013
Dr. Salvador Nares 7/16/13
Program Directors
Dr. Josph Califano -7/26/04-7/15/2011
Dr. Saba Khan 7/16/2011-5/15/2013
Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy 5/16/13
Provide documentation and/or indicate what evidence will be available during the site visit to
demonstrate compliance with the Commission’s policy on “Third Party Comments.”
The program is in compliance with the Commission’s “Third Party Comments” policy. Copies of posted
signs will be available on site.
demonstrate compliance with the Commission’s policy on “Complaints.”
The program is in compliance with the Commission’s “Complaints” policy. Copies of email messages
will be available on site. No complaints have been received.
demonstrate compliance with the Commission’s policy on “Distance Education.”
Not applicable.
A Brilliant Future
- ix -

November, 2013
STANDARD 1 – Institutional Commitment/Program Effectiveness
1. Has the program developed clearly stated goals and objectives appropriate to
advanced specialty education, addressing education, patient care, research and YES
service? (1)
The Advanced Education in Specialty of Periodontics at UIC, COD has established defined goals and
objectives that prepare the individuals for the practice of periodontics. The defined goals are listed in
the ‘Program Manual of Advanced Education in Specialty of Periodontics’.
Documentary Evidence:
Appendix A
Appendix B
2. Are planning for, evaluation of and improvement of educational quality for the
program broad-based, systematic, continuous and designed to promote achievement YES
of program goals related to education, patient care, research and service? (1)
The program has a broad based, systematic, continuous process of evaluation of educational quality
in conjunction to the program. The process involves various semiannual evaluations and assessments:
a) Faculty evaluations: The full time and the part time faculty members are evaluated by the
students annually. An overall summary report is provided to each faculty member verbally/ in
writing to the faculty member by the Program Director to continue improving the educational
process for the students.
b) Course evaluations: All the offered courses are evaluated by the students and peer faculty
members. Based on evaluations the weakness and strength of each course is identified and
changes are made accordingly.
c) Student evaluations: The students are evaluated using self-evaluation, by faculty members, and
by their peers. The Program Director meets with the students on a semiannual basis to relay
the faculty assessment and also provide them with feedback and action plan generation for
areas that are in need of improvement.
d) Patient care evaluations: Students are evaluated on a daily basis for their daily patient care
by their attending faculty member
e) Research evaluations: The student research progress is documented by the research faculty
and a regular meeting with the research faculty provides evaluations. The resident meets with
their mentor and members of the research committee. These meetings occur 3-5 times/ each
year of the program and helps faculty evaluate the progress of Residents research.
Appendix 1A-1E
A Brilliant Future STANDARD 1

- 1 -

November, 2013
3. Does the program document its effectiveness using a formal and ongoing outcomes
assessment process to include measures of advanced education student/resident YES
achievement? (1)
The program documents its effectiveness in three different areas:
a) Didactic
i. The grades from the didactic courses are used as an assessment tool to attain the
program goals. All students are required to maintain an average grade of ‘B’ (3.0 on
a 4.0 scale) to continue the program in good standing.
ii. In addition to the courses, the students are also evaluated on their didactic
knowledge of basic & clinical sciences in their weekly seminars.
iii. Mock Board exams are administered semi-annually each year. The fall examination
parallels the format of the American Board of Periodontology, in which various
protocols (vignettes) form the basis for the testing process. Each protocol is used to
measure the following seven skills: Diagnosis, Etiology, Prognosis, Treatment Planning,
Therapy, Evaluation of Results, and the ability to develop and monitor a maintenance
Program. The spring exam involves a case presentation (in the former ABP board
format) followed by an oral exam covering all seven skills as they relate to the
presented case.
iv. All students, regardless of year, challenge the ‘Periodontal In-service’ exam each year
conducted by the AAP. This exam grades the students based on the national average.
Each resident must score in the 65th percentile or more in the third year of the
program; 50th percentile or more in the second year and 35percentile or more in the
1st year based on national average.
v. All students are strongly encouraged to take the written and oral examinations
offered by the American Board of Periodontology
b) Clinical:
i. Clinical evaluations are performed on a daily basis during patient care services. The
students do a self-evaluation and are additionally evaluated by the supervising faculty.
The student’s clinical performance is evaluated on a semiannual basis with the
Program Director. This formal evaluation by the Program Director is in addition to
the ongoing informal feedback on student performance from the faculty.
ii. The case distribution of patient experiences assigned to each student is monitored by
the Program Director to assure each student acquires adequate quantity and diversity
of cases to be competent as a specialist in Periodontics. An Axium report is assessed
for the kind and number of cases performed by each student in the program.
iii. Quarterly student’s patient-chart audits are conducted to assess the completeness of
each student’s treatment plans and clinical documentation.
c) Research:
i. All students are required to complete a research project, present their findings at a
regional/national/international meeting and prepare a manuscript suitable for
publication that summarizes their work. If the student has chosen to pursue a
masters (M.S in Oral Sciences) or doctoral degree (PhD), the degree requirements,
which include completion of a thesis/dissertation and its acceptable defense before a
committee comprised of the student’s research advisor and other members of the
Graduate School, must be completed before the certificate in periodontics is awarded.
The Director of Graduate Periodontics Research follows the progress of research for
each of the students.
STANDARD 1 A Proud Past

- 2 -

November, 2013
Appendix D
Appendix U
On Site
Resident Clinic Evaluations
AAP In-service Exam results
Results of Postgraduate Exit Interviews
4. Are the financial resources sufficient to support the program’s stated goals and
YES
objectives? (1)
The financial resources available to the postgraduate program are sufficient. The postgraduate clinic
is self-supporting. Funds available from fees for services provided in the clinic fully support the cost of
supplies, faculty salary and support staff. The program is supported by two full-time and fifteen part
time-faculty. The department is in the process of recruiting an additional two full-time faculty to
support the program. A clinic coordinator, two front desk clerks and four dental assistants staff the
clinic. A departmental assistant provides administrative support supplemented by additional help from
the assistant to the Head of the Department. Plans are underway for the renovation and construction
of Postgraduate Periodontics clinic. The new clinic will include 12 operatories equipped for surgical
procedures and four quiet rooms for advanced surgical care.
On Site
Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic/ Resident Room construction plans
5. Does the sponsoring institution ensure that support from entities outside of the
institution does not compromise the teaching, clinical and research components of YES
the program? (1)
The College of Dentistry is governed by the University of Illinois system which is a State of Illinois
institution. As a result all contracts, purchases, affiliation agreements and gifts are regulated
according to State of Illinois (30 ILCS 500/) Illinois Procurement Code The University of Illinois Office
of Business and Financial Services assist the College
On Site
Faculty Conflict of Interest Guidelines

- 3 -

November, 2013
6. Is the advanced specialty education program sponsored by an institution, which is

properly chartered, and licensed to operate and offers instruction leading to degrees, YES
diplomas or certificates with recognized education validity? (1)
The University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry sponsors the Postgraduate Program in
Periodontics. The Commission on Dental Accreditation accredits the College of Dentistry and the
Advanced Education Program in Periodontics. The State of Illinois charters the University of Illinois
and its components and colleges.
7. If a hospital is the sponsor, is the hospital accredited by an accreditation

NA
organization recognized by the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid (CMS)? (1)
8. If an educational institution is the sponsor, is the educational institution Accredited

YES
by an agency recognized by the United States Department of Education? (1)
The program is sponsored by the College of Dentistry which is a part of the University of Illinois at
Chicago. The University received its original accreditation in 1970 and its status was last confirmed by
the Higher Learning Commission on October 23, 2007. The status is confirmed upon the University
until its next review, which is scheduled in 2017.
The University of Illinois at Chicago is accredited by:
The Higher Learning Commission

North Central Association of Colleges and Schools
30 North LaSalle Street, Suite 2400
Chicago, IL 60602
Documentary Evidence
On site
UIC Accreditation Certificate
9. If applicable, do the bylaws, rules and regulations of the hospital that sponsors or
provides a substantial portion of the advanced specialty education program ensure
that dentists are eligible for medical staff membership and privileges including the NA
right to vote, hold office, serve on medical staff committees and admit, manage and
discharge patients? (1)

- 4 -

November, 2013
10. Does the authority and final responsibility for curriculum development and
approval, student/resident selection, faculty selection and administrative matters YES
rest within the sponsoring institution? (1)
All authority and final responsibility for academic and administrative matters rests within the
sponsoring institution. Matters related to curriculum and course development are initiated by the
Department and require review by the Graduate Dental Committee of the College. Resident selection
is conducted and approved by the Program Director in conjunction with the admissions committee
within the department. All residents accepted by the Department are reviewed and approved for
admission by the Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs. Faculty selection and administration
matters are decided in the Department and approved by the Dean.
11. Is the position of the program in the administrative structure consistent with that of
YES
other parallel programs within the institution? (1)
Each post graduate program in the College of Dentistry is housed within a Department, administered
by a Program Director in collaboration with the Department Head. Each Program Director sits on the
College of Dentistry’s Graduate Dental Education Committee which sets global policies and procedures
for the post-graduate programs. Each program is reviewed annually by the Executive Associate Dean
for Academic Affairs in areas related to curriculum, admissions, and exit interviews. The Executive
Associate Dean for Academic Affairs provides written and verbal feedback to the programs of the
College.
Appendix C
12. Does the program director have the authority, responsibility and privileges
YES
necessary to manage the program? (1)
The Program Director has the authority, responsibility, and privileges necessary to effectively administer
the post-graduate program in periodontics, consistent with the requirements of the Commission on
Dental Accreditation. The Department Head and Program Director have the authority and
responsibility for managing all donated funds to the program. The Program Director is supported by
the Department Head and the administrative staff. The curriculum is also managed by the Program
Director with reporting to the Graduate Dental Education Committee. Student promotions and discipline
follow the established procedures of the College of Dentistry and the University of Illinois at Chicago.

- 5 -

November, 2013
Affiliations
(If the program is not affiliated with other institutions, please skip to Standard 2.)
13. Does the primary sponsor of the educational program accept full responsibility for
NA
the quality of education provided in all affiliated institutions? (1)
14. Is documentary evidence of agreements, approved by the sponsoring and relevant

NA
affiliated institutions, available? (1)
15. Are the following items covered in such inter-institutional agreements:

a) Designation of a single program director?
b) The teaching staff? NA
c) The educational objectives of the program?
d) The period of assignment of students/residents? And
e) Each institution's financial commitment? (1)

- 6 -

November, 2013
STANDARD 2 - PROGRAM DIRECTOR AND TEACHING STAFF
16. Is the program administered by a director who is board certified in the respective
specialty of the program, or if appointed after January 1, 1997, has previously served YES
as a program director? (2)
Dr. Gajendrareddy is a board certified periodontist.
On Site
A copy of 2010 Board Certification for Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy is available on site.
17. Is the program director appointed to the sponsoring institution and have sufficient
authority and time to achieve the educational goals of the program and assess the YES
program’s effectiveness in meeting its goals? (2)
Appendix G
18. Does the program director have primary responsibility for the organization and
execution of the educational and administrative components of the program? YES
(2-2)
The Director has the final responsibility for all decisions regarding curriculum, staffing and faculty
selection. The Director has the necessary time and authority to achieve the educational goals of the
program and assess the program’s effectiveness in meeting the program’s goals. The Director approves
each resident’s final schedule, including class registration. The Director has final approval of the
candidates for each class with input from faculty and graduate students.
Appendix C
Appendix G
Appendix H, Exhibit 3.1 and 3.2

- 1 -

November, 2013
19. Does the director devote sufficient time to the program:
The program director devotes sufficient time to the program. His commitment to the program includes
10hrs/ week in administrative time, 16hrs/ week teaching, 6hrs/ week in research and 8hrs/ week in
other activities with the total workweek amounting to 40 hours.
a. Utilize a faculty that can offer a diverse educational experience in biomedical,

YES
behavioral and clinical sciences?
The Postgraduate Periodontics Program faculty members provide a diverse educational experience due
to their diverse educational background, experience in clinical practice, and expertise in basic/clinical
research. Full time faculty members in the College of Dentistry include individuals with graduate
training in Microbiology, Immunology, Genetics, Oral Biology, Oral Medicine, Oral Pathology, Clinical
Psychology, Anatomy, and Implant Prosthodontics. The program has 5 full time and 18 part time
faculty members. Sixteen of our faculty our Diplomates of the American Board of Periodontology.
Part time faculty members supplement the experience of the full time faculty. Several part time
faculty members serve in leadership roles in organized dentistry. The department is in the process of
hiring two additional full time faculty to further strengthen the educational offerings of the
postgraduate program.
b. Promote cooperation between periodontics, general dentistry, related dental

YES
specialties and other health sciences?
The postgraduate program has a longstanding relationship with the faculty and residents of all
departments. Our College of Dentistry, by design, encourages regular interaction between Periodontic
residents and their referring predoctoral students, postdoctoral students and faculty. For example, the
postgraduate program actively participates in the College of Dentistry Comprehensive Dental Implant
Center, which includes Prosthodontics, Periodontics, and Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery. The program
also provides needed care for Orthodontic patients.
The residents work with predoctoral comprehensive care clinics also called ‘group practices’ and are
responsible for continual communication with their referral base through consultation, study club style
presentations to their group, and collaborative treatment planning of all patients they share with the
predoctoral and other postgraduate programs. Predoctoral students that have patients treated in the
Periodontic clinic are expected to assist during all surgical procedures. Senior predoctoral students
may also perform a limited number of surgical procedures under the guidance of postgraduate
students (and their attending postgraduate faculty).
c. Select students/residents qualified to undertake specialty training in

periodontics unless the program is sponsored by a federal service utilizing a YES
centralized student/resident selection process?
Select students/residents qualified to undertake specialty training in periodontics unless the program
is sponsored by a federal service utilizing a centralized student/resident selection process?
Students are selected based on their undergraduate and dental school achievement, national board
exam result, letters of reference, relevant extracurricular activities and the results of personal
interviews with the faculty of the UIC College of Dentistry. The TOEFL exam is required for all
applicants that have English as a second language. We had 42 completed applications for residents

- 2 -

November, 2013
starting in July 2010. In the last admissions cycle we had 54 completed applications for residents
matriculated in July 2013.
d. Develop and implement the curriculum plan? YES

Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy was appointed as the Director of Postgraduate Periodontics in May of
2013. During the first months of his appointment, Dr. Gajendrareddy has reviewed the existing
curriculum and has reviewed and modified where indicated to assure quality offerings to enhance
learning and patient care.
e. Evaluate and document student/resident and faculty performance? YES

The College has a web-based student evaluation of teaching. Students are encouraged to provide
course evaluation for each course, Course Director as well as evaluation of each clinical faculty
member, and the Program Director. The Department Head also meets with faculty on a regular basis
to discuss faculty teaching loads and performance. Resident clinical performance is evaluated by
faculty based on their direct interaction and evaluation of residence performance in the clinic. Faculty
provide written evaluation of resident performance twice a year. Additionally, residents are evaluated
during their treatment plan presentations, case presentations and mock board exams. Residence
performance in the AAP in-service exam also serves as a measure of his/her performance.
f. Document educational and patient care records as well as records of

student/resident attendance and participation in didactic and clinical YES
programs?
Students are scheduled continuously throughout the day and year for classes, clinic, and research
time. Students must request specific time off from the program director in writing in advance for any
missed experience. Clinic scheduling is the responsibility of the clinic clerk and is monitored by the
program director. The program director approves all students’ schedule of classes. All patient care
records are maintained in the patient’s Electronic Health record (Axium) and to a limited extent in
hard copy charts
g. Have responsibility for the quality and continuity of patient care? (2-2) YES
The College utilizes an electronic record (Axium). This allows the Program Director access for
information on the completeness of records, the distribution of procedures, and facilitates record
audits. Record audits are done every semester to evaluate the quality of care.

- 3 -

November, 2013
20. Does the program director prepare graduates to seek certification by the American
YES
Board of Periodontology? (2-3)
There have been enhancements to the curriculum implemented during Dr. Gajendrareddy’s first year as
Program Director that serve to improve the preparedness of graduates for the written and oral
examination by the American Board of Periodontology. As outlined above, the literature review
sessions, Mock Board Examinations, and treatment/treatment planning seminars have been enriched.
Outcome assessment includes written essay and oral exams administered at the end of the fall and
spring semesters. All residents take the AAP in-service exam each year. Since 2008, 13/13
graduates have taken and passed both the parts of American Board of Periodontology. We anticipate
that our 2013 graduates would challenge the boards and successfully pass them.
Appendix D
21. Does the program director track Board Certification of program graduates? (2-3.a) YES
To prepare students to successfully complete the American Board of Periodontology and become
Diplomate of the AAP is one of the goals of the program (goal 4). Preparation for board certification
is stressed throughout the program. As a measure of successful outcome, all of our graduates
(13/13) from 2008 through 2012 have taken and passed both the parts of American Board of Periodontology.
We strongly believe that our 2013 graduates would challenge the boards and pass them.
Appendix D
22. Are the number and time commitment of faculty sufficient to provide didactic and
YES
administrative continuity? (2-4)
The teaching staff is adequate to fulfill the program’s teaching commitment. The program director has
committed 80% of his time to the teaching and administrative needs of the program. Our clinic
director and faculty provide additional didactic and administrative support
Appendix H, Exhibit 3.1 and 3.2
Appendix J

- 4 -

November, 2013
23. Are faculty assigned for all clinical sessions and immediately available for
YES
consultation with students/residents and patients? (2-5)
Multiple attending faculty are assigned for each clinic session. These faculty are available to oversee
clinical proceedings and provide instruction to residents/ students and discuss care with patients.
Residents are forbidden from seeing patients in the absence of faculty supervision. Faculty
electronically approve all chart entries related to patient care including documentation of evaluation,
diagnosis, treatment plan, procedures and treatment notes. In the event of an emergency outside of
our normal Graduate Clinic operations, the graduate student/resident works with the identified on-call
faculty member, surgical mentor or with the program director.
Appendix J
Appendix U
24. Is there direct faculty supervision of students/residents who are performing surgical
YES
procedures? (2-5)
Faculty members are assigned for all clinical sessions in the Periodontics post-graduate clinic. All
surgeries are completed under direct faculty supervision. Chart entries for the initial examination, re-
evaluation and all surgical therapy are electronically countersigned by the attending faculty member at
the conclusion of each patient visit
Appendix J
Appendix U
25. Do faculty take responsibility for patient care and actively participate in the
development of treatment plans and evaluation of all phases of treatment provided YES
by students/residents? (2-6)
The attending faculty has the full responsibility for patient care under his/her supervision. Residents
are required to formulate and present a diagnosis, prognosis, and comprehensive treatment plan to an
attending faculty member, who will actively participate in the review and development of the final
treatment plan. Attending faculty members supervise the provision of care and the evaluation of all
phases of treatment provided by students. All treatment plans must be entered in the patient
electronic record (Axium) and countersigned by the attending faculty member prior to the start of
treatment. Daily entries are reviewed and signed by the attending faculty member. Quarterly chart
reviews include a review of the treatment plan and treatment rendered to date. Chart entries for the
initial examination, re-evaluation and all surgical therapy are electronically countersigned by the
attending faculty member at the conclusion of each patient visit.
Appendix J
Appendix U

- 5 -

November, 2013
26. Are faculty formally evaluated at least annually by the program director to
YES
determine their effectiveness in the educational program? (2-7)
Faculty members are formally evaluated by the Program Director and Department Chair annually to
determine their teaching effectiveness on an annual basis. Student evaluations are employed in the
assessment of faculty effectiveness in didactic and clinical instruction. Accordingly, teaching
effectiveness is assessed via graduate student evaluations of faculty members, exit interviews, graduate
student thesis, written case submissions and direct observations. Residents receive an e-mail request
to evaluate each faculty member and then due so anonymously by submitting an anonymous
electronic form.
Appendix K
27. In addition to their regular responsibilities in the program, do full-time faculty have
adequate time to develop and foster advances in their own education and
YES
capabilities in order to ensure their constant improvement as clinical periodontists,
teachers and/or researchers? (2-8)
Each full-time faculty is provided at least one day per week for professional development and clinical
practice. As part of professional development, tenure track faculty receives additional time for research
programs support. The College of Dentistry provides a broad range of courses in education and
research for faculty development throughout the year.
Appendix I

- 6 -

November, 2013
28. Do the program director and faculty actively participate in the assessment of the
YES
outcomes of the educational program? (2-10)
All postgraduate faculties are involved in the outcomes assessment process. Faculty members overlap
coverage and participation weekly in both seminars and clinic sessions, permitting an ongoing dialogue
regarding resident performance and outcomes of the educational program. The Program Director and
Department Head meet weekly/monthly to discuss aspects related to the residency program and with
the postgraduate faculty on a regular basis to gather information related to the delivery, quality and
outcomes of the program. Members of the faculty participate in Mock Board oral examinations in the
spring and fall. At the conclusion of the examinations faculty meet as a group to discuss the
students’ performance on the exam including assessing how the results relate to the program
outcomes. Therefore, assessment of outcomes of the educational program occurs on a continual
basis. In addition, the Department has a monthly faculty meeting to address agenda items related to
the pre- and post-doctoral educational programs. The College of Dentistry has a yearly retreat with
faculty to discuss teaching, research, and institutional issues. Through regular Department Executive
Committee meetings and focused retreats, outcomes assessment data are used to make programmatic
changes. Any changes are chronicled in minutes of department meetings and retreats that are
maintained in department files.
Appendix J

- 7 -

November, 2013
STANDARD 3 – Facilities and Resources
29. Are institutional facilities and resources adequate to provide the educational
experiences and opportunities required to fulfill the needs of the educational
YES
program as specified in the Accreditation Standards for Advanced Specialty
Education Programs? (3)
The College of Dentistry serves as the site for the advanced education program. The College provides
significant resources for the operations of the program and its commitment towards the program is
substantial. Each Postgraduate Periodontic resident has a dedicated operatory with a fully functional
dental chair and a computer with access to axiUmTM electronic patient record. The Postgraduate
Periodontics clinic has up to date equipment, surgical instruments and materials that are well
maintained, and a dedicated residents conference room with multiple computers. All computers in the
clinic and conference room are connected to the College of Dentistry Intranet and also have Internet
access. Each resident also has a dedicated work/study cubicle in the newly created resident room
adjacent to the patient care clinic. The clinical and administrative staffing and financial support is
adequate. The entire facility was reconstructed during the Fall of 2013 and features all new
equipment, cabinetry and resident room fully supported with IT equipment.
Appendix L, Exhibit 4
Appendix M, Exhibit 5
30. Are equipment and supplies for use in managing medical emergencies readily
YES
accessible and functional? (3)
The postgraduate Periodontics clinic has all the necessary equipment and emergency medications to
handle medical emergencies. These are readily accessible and functional in a crash cart located in the
clinic. An AED is available in the clinic and readily available located just outside the surgical suites.
Positive pressure oxygen and first aid supplies are also available in the clinic. The equipment and
medications are subject to regular periodic evaluation and upkeep. An emergency team comprised of
faculty and staff in the Department of Oral and Maxillofacial surgery is prepared to respond on an
emergency basis if needed. This emergency response team takes no more than 3-5 minutes typically
to respond. Additional emergency support is also available through the University of Illinois at Chicago
Hospital, which is located across the street from the dental school. The protocol for activating a code
blue alert and responding to medical emergencies before and after regular clinic hours is posted in
multiple locations in the clinic and by all clinic phones. All students, dental assistants and faculty are
BCLS certified. Patients receiving surgical care are provided with the phone number of the resident
providing care for off-hour communication for post-operative follow up and/or emergencies.
Appendix U
On Site
Postgraduate Periodontics Emergency Crash Cart Update Checklist

- 9 -

November, 2013
31. Does the program document its compliance with the institution’s policy and
applicable regulations of local, state and federal agencies, including but not limited
YES
to radiation hygiene and protection, ionizing radiation, hazardous materials, and
bloodborne and infectious diseases? (3)
Clinical policies, clinic manual, infection control and radiation safety guidelines, guidelines on
bloodborne and infectious diseases, incident reporting procedure and forms, policy for patient input,
and MSDS sheets are available online via the COD intranet (can be accessed from every clinic
operatory). Students must demonstrate competency in the clinical application of radiation safety,
infection control in radiology and appropriate radiographic technique. This requirement is currently
accomplished though course work (OMDS 617 Radiology for the Dental Specialist), reinforcement in
patient care clinics and individual consultation with the Director of Radiology or his/her designate by
appointment or clinic pager. All patient exposures are authorized by supervising faculty and are to be
documented in Axium. Radiation exposure of staff is monitored using radiation badge dosimeters. The
college of dentistry mandates all students and clinical employees to fill an immunization record form
prior to the beginning of their program or date of employment. In addition Immunizations against
Hepatitis B (HBV) are provided free to all College dental healthcare employees. HIPAA and OSHA
training is mandatory for all clinical staff and students.
Appendix U
On Site
COD Intranet
32. Are the above policies provided to all students/residents, faculty and appropriate
YES
support staff and continuously monitored for compliance? (3)
Policies for the College of Dentistry for radiation hygiene and protection, ionizing radiation, hazardous
materials, and bloodborne and infectious diseases are on file and available to faculty, staff, and
students on the intranet. Postgraduate Periodontics students have training in radiation safety by Dr.
Richard Monahan as part of their course work. All clinic assistants and hygienists are expected to
wear a dosimetry badges during clinic hours. These badges are replaced on the first of every month.
HIPAA and OSHA certifications are required for all clinical faculty and staff, and these are renewed on
a yearly basis. Monitoring for compliance is an ongoing process involving clinic staff, attending faculty,
and representatives from the office of the Associate Dean for Patient Services.
Appendix U
On Site
COD Intranet

- 10 -

November, 2013
33. Are policies on bloodborne and infectious diseases made available to applicants for
YES
admission and patients? (3)
The Director of Clinics oversees the immunization clearance process, and communicates with
applicants appropriately with the goal of reaching full compliance by the first day of the program.
The Office for Clinical Affairs maintains an informational board which contains pertinent clinical
information such as Privacy Policies, summarized Infection Control policies, CDC precautions for the
transmission of airborne diseases, Contact phone numbers, Protocol to manage medical emergencies,
Policy for Patient Input, among others. Policies for the College of Dentistry for radiation hygiene and
protection, ionizing radiation, hazardous materials, and bloodborne and infectious diseases are on file
and available to all patients, staff, students and faculty.
Appendix U
On Site
COD Intranet
34. Are students/residents, faculty and appropriate support staff encouraged to be

immunized against and/or tested for infectious diseases, such as mumps, measles,
YES
rubella and hepatitis B, prior to contact with patients and/or infectious objects or
materials, in an effort to minimize the risk to patients and dental personnel? (3)
Students/faculty/staff must be vaccinated for Hepatitis B virus or show evidence of natural immunity
before the initiation of any clinical activity. Follow-up services are available to monitor the individual’s
titer level, post-vaccination. Students must be immunized or show evidence of natural immunity to
mumps, measles, rubella and chicken pox, evidence of immunization against tetanus/diphtheria within
the last ten years, and be screened for tuberculosis to remain enrolled at the University of Illinois at
Chicago campus. Providers are also required to provide proof of immunization against Polio and
Tetanus/Diphtheria, and provide proof of a recent negative TB test, via a two-step test, a quantiferon
blood test, or a current chest radiograph. College policy requires all clinical providers to undergo
yearly TB testing, which is administered by University Health Services onsite at the College of
Dentistry. Incoming clinical faculty and staff also satisfy this requirement prior to the beginning of their
clinical activities. Access to the axium patient database is only granted after immunization and
licensure requirements are met. The Director of Clinics oversees the immunization clearance process
and maintains appropriate records.
On Site
student immunization policy

- 11 -

November, 2013
35. Are all students/residents, faculty and support staff involved in the direct provision
of patient care continuously recognized/certified in basic life support procedures, YES
including cardiopulmonary resuscitation? (3)
All students, faculty, and support staff are certified in Basic Life Support. Cardiopulmonary
recertification classes are provided at no cost to faculty, staff and students involved in patient care
on an ongoing basis so that those who need to maintain certification can do so. Currency of
certification is monitored by the Director of Clinical Operations. BLS (Health Care Provider Level)
courses are available at scheduled intervals. No patient contact is allowed should the certification
lapse. Students, faculty, and support staff are reminded of their expiration date in advance and are
scheduled for recertification at the same time. s a part of our ongoing program of risk management,
all students, faculty and support staff involved in patient care are listed in an Axium based
database. This system is used to monitor compliance with the BLS requirement and other clinical
requirements. The Director of Clinics maintains these records.
36. Are private office facilities used as a means of providing clinical experiences in
NO
advanced specialty education? (3)*
37. Are adequate clinical and radiographic facilities readily available in order to meet
YES
the objectives of the program? (3-1)
There are currently 16 operatories in the postgraduate periodontics clinic that are available for clinical
activities. Each resident has an assigned operatory to perform periodontal examinations and non-
surgical therapy. Seven of the operatories are equipped and available for surgical therapy of which
four operatories are equipped with a wall mounted x-ray unit. Four Dexis digital radiographic sensors
are also available for use with the software for digital radiographic evaluation available at all chairside
computers. In addition, patients may be referred to the radiology clinic for radiographs. The
postgraduate periodontics clinic was completely renovated in Fall 2013. The renovated clinics house
sixteen clinical operatories with four additional quiet rooms for advanced surgical procedures. All
operatories are equipped with radiographic equipment. The renovated space adds an additional 50%
space to the clinic foot print and would also feature a new patient waiting area and a resident room/
learning suite situated adjacent to the Periodontics clinic.
Appendix L
38. Is there a sufficient number of operatories to efficiently accommodate the number

YES
of students/residents enrolled? (3-1)
There are currently 16 operatories in the postgraduate periodontics clinic that are available for clinical
activities. These operatories are dedicated to residents in the periodontics postgraduate program.
Each resident has an assigned operatory to perform periodontal examinations and non-surgical
therapy. The renovated clinic includes a clinical operatory for each of the twelve residents in the

- 12 -

November, 2013
program with additional four quiet rooms for advanced surgical care. There are also four surgical
suites available in the adjacent Implant and Innovations Center.
On Site
Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic Construction Plan
39. Do students/residents have clinical photographic equipment available? (3-4) YES
Residents are required to obtain the digital camera and lens for clinical photography specified by the
program director as they enter the program. Residents are also required to purchase additional
equipment including cheek retractors and mirrors for intraoral photography
Appendix U
40. Does the institution provide audiovisual capabilities for student/resident seminars?
YES
(3-5)
The Department maintains a digital projector for student seminars. All seminar rooms are equipped
with projector screens. The college IT department provides additional resources with computer,
projector and AV support. The college IT department also provides additional resources for
videoconferencing, printing (including posters) at no additional cost to college faculty and students.
41. Are resources available to accurately reproduce slides, radiographs and other patient
YES
records? (3-5)
The department maintains 2 flatbed scanners, a slide scanner, and digital projecting equipment for
students. A scanner/ Copier is available in the clinic. Additional resources for copying, scanning are
available with copying machines placed on the fourth and fifth floor common areas.
42. Do students/residents have ready access to dental and biomedical libraries

YES
containing equipment for retrieval and duplication of information? (3-6)
The University library includes a broad variety of access to print and electronic dental, biomedical and
other information relevant to dentistry curriculum and research. The library maintains electronic or
print access to nearly all required dental texts for our students, as well as providing materials to
support the advanced programs and faculty research. Resources also include a dental liaison librarian
who maintains office hours at the College of Dentistry, teaches evidence based practice as part of the
dental curriculum, maintains a targeted research website linking to appropriate library and professional
information resources, and has regular one-on-one consults with students and faculty. The College
also enjoys the consultative services of a dedicated librarian in the Health Sciences Library.

- 13 -

November, 2013
43. Is adequate support personnel assigned to the program to ensure chairside and
YES
technical assistance? (3-7)
The Postgraduate Periodontics clinic is staffed with four clinical assistants, two front desk staff and a
clinic coordinator who provide assistance to the residents and faculty. Facilities staff led by Mr. Fred
Chapa assists with the installation maintenance of clinical facilities, chairs, and all clinic equipment.
The college IT department provides assistance with the installation and maintenance of chair side
computers, patient management software, and audiovisual equipment. Physical facilities staff help
maintain cleanliness in the clinic and provide assistance with disposal of waste.
Appendix M

- 14 -

November, 2013
STANDARD 4 - CURRICULUM AND PROGRAM DURATION
44. Is the advanced specialty education program designed to provide special knowledge
and skills beyond the D.D.S. or D.M.D. training and oriented to the accepted
YES
standards of specialty practice as set forth in the Accreditation Standards for
Advanced Specialty Education Programs? (4)
The didactic rigor and extent of clinical experience exceeds pre-doctoral, entry-level dental training or
continuing education requirement. The goals and objectives of the postgraduate program are set in
relation to the standards for the specialty set by the Commission on Dental Accreditation. The
instructional and clinical experience provided in the post-graduate program is separate from the pre-
doctoral program. The level of instructional material and clinical experience are consistent with the
standards for the specialty
Appendix J
Appendix O
Appendix P
Appendix Q
Appendix T
45. Is the level of specialty area instruction in certificate and degree-granting programs
NA
comparable? (4)
46. Is documentation of all program activities ensured by the program director and
YES
available for review? (4)
All records are maintained by the Program Director and are available for review. All didactic
schedules are available with learning objectives and outcome assessments. Such review is limited to
the applicable FERPA statute.
Appendix P
Appendix Q
47. If the institution/program enrolls part-time students/residents, does the institution

NA
have guidelines regarding enrollment of part-time students/residents? (4)
48. If the institution/program enrolls part-time students/residents, do they start and

complete the program within a single institution, except when the program is NA
discontinued? (4)

- 15 -

November, 2013
49. If the institution/program enrolls students/residents on a part-time basis, does the

director of the accredited program ensure that:
The educational experiences, including the clinical experiences and responsibilities,
NA
are the same as required by full-time students/residents? and
There is an equivalent number of months spent in the program? (4) NA
50. Is the program duration three consecutive academic years with a minimum of 30
YES
months of instruction? (4-1)
The program is of 33-months duration starting August 15th of the first year to May 15th of the third
year. It is a year-round program except for 5 days vacation each year plus College of Dentistry
Holidays. All training occurs at the University of Illinois at Chicago.
Appendix O
51. Do at least two consecutive years of clinical education take place in a single
YES
educational setting? (4-1)
All of the clinical training take place in the College of Dentistry
Appendix J
Appendix O
Biomedical Sciences
52. Although students/residents entering postdoctoral programs will have taken

biomedical science courses in their predoctoral dental curriculum, is this YES
material updated and reviewed in the program at an advanced level? (4-2)
The curriculum provides advanced instruction in the biomedical sciences, particularly as related to the
specialty.
Relevant courses and seminars include the following:
Anat 544 Advanced Craniofacial anatomy

Osci 580 Advanced Oral Sciences
Osci 581 Advanced Oral Sciences
Peri 611 Classic Periodontal literature review
Peri 613 Current Periodontal literature Seminar
Hstl 506 Immunology

- 16 -

November, 2013
OMDS503 Oral Pathology Seminar

Osci 451 Research Methodology
OSCI 441 Biostatistics
Appendix P
Appendix Q
53. Does education in the biomedical sciences provide the scientific basis needed to
understand and carry out the diagnostic and therapeutic skills gained during YES
training in clinical periodontics and oral medicine? (4-2)
Biomedical sciences are covered in relation to diagnostics and therapeutic skills in the following
graduate level courses and seminars:

Osci 580 Advanced Oral Sciences I (fall) & II (spring)
Hstl 506 Immunology
OMDS503 Oral Pathology Seminar
Appendix P
Appendix Q
54. Does formal instruction in the biomedical sciences enable students/residents to:
a) Identify patients at risk for periodontal diseases and employ suitable preventive
YES
and/or interceptive treatment?
Formal instruction in the biomedical sciences that address these objectives is included in the following
postgraduate courses:

Hstl 506 Immunology
Oral Pathology Seminar
Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy Seminar
Appendix P
Appendix Q

- 17 -

November, 2013
b) Diagnose and treat patients with periodontal diseases according to scientific

principles and knowledge of current concepts of etiology, pathogenesis, and YES
patient management? and

Hstl 506 Immunology
Appendix P
Appendix Q
c) Evaluate critically the scientific literature, update their knowledge base, and
YES
evaluate pertinent scientific and technological issues as they arise? (4-3)

Osci 441 Biostatistics
Appendix P
Appendix Q
55. Is formal instruction provided in (4-4):

a) Developmental, gross, surgical, microscopic and ultrastructural anatomy and
physiology of tissues of the oral cavity and related structures with special YES
emphasis on the periodontium?
Hstl 506 Immunology
Pros 613 Interdisciplinary Implant Seminar

- 18 -

November, 2013
b) The microbial ecology of the oral flora and the microbiologic aspects of
YES
periodontal diseases, caries and other oral diseases?
Hstl 506 Immunology
c) The role of infectious processes in oral diseases? YES

Peri 613 Current literature review
Hstl 506 Immunology
d) The role of immunologic processes in oral health and oral diseases? YES
Hstl 506 Immunology
e) The histopathology, pathogenesis and natural history of periodontal diseases? YES

Hstl 506 Immunology
Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning
f) The epidemiology of periodontal diseases? YES

g) The mechanisms of inflammation and wound healing, especially as these areas

relate to the biochemistry and molecular biology of epithelium, and hard and YES
soft connective tissue?
Hstl 506 Immunology

- 19 -

November, 2013
h) The concepts of molecular biology and the molecular basis of genetics? YES
Hstl 506 Immunology
i) The etiology and pathogenesis of caries? YES

Hstl 506 Immunology
j) Principles of nutrition, especially as they relate to patient evaluation, disease

YES
processes and wound healing?
Hstl 506 Immunology
k) Principles of biostatistics, research design and research methods? YES

l) Scientific writing? YES

m) Critical evaluation of the research literature? YES

Dental Implantology Literature Review/Seminar

- 20 -

November, 2013
n) Dental implants, including relevant information in biomaterials, bone

YES
physiology and histology?
o) Behavioral science, to include communication skills with patients and health

YES
professionals, and positive modification of behavior, attitudes and habits?
Behavioral Sciences/Patient management/Ethics Seminar
Appendix P
Appendix Q
56. Is the content of biomedical sciences instruction documented? (4-6) YES
Appendix Q
57. Is that documentation readily available for review? (4-6) YES
Appendix Q
Clinical Sciences
58. Does the educational program provide training to the level of proficiency for the
student/resident to: (4-7))
The educational program provides training to the level of proficiency in each clinical area through
extensive didactic instruction and clinical experiences. The primary instruction and clinical experiences
are provided in the following postgraduate courses:

- 21 -

November, 2013
a) Collect, organize, analyze and interpret data? YES

Intro. To Periodontal Therapy and Biological Basis of Periodontics
Peri 611 Classic Periodontal Literature Review
Peri 613 Current Periodontal Literature Review
Peri 620 Clinical Periodontics
Peri 698 Directed Research
b) Interpret radiographic images as they relate to the diagnosis of periodontal

YES
diseases and dental implants
Pros 613 Interdisciplinary Seminar
Omds 617 Radiology for the Dental Specialist
c) Formulate a diagnosis and a prognosis? YES

Ortd 667 Orthodontic Perio. Relationships
Omds 623 Temporomandibular Disorders
d) Develop a comprehensive treatment plan? YES


- 22 -

November, 2013
e) Understand and discuss a rationale for the indicated therapy? YES

Principles of Conscious Sedation/ Medicine/ pharmacology
f) Evaluate critically the results of therapy? YES

g) Communicate effectively to patients the nature of their periodontal health

YES
status and treatment needs?
Behavioral Sciences/Patient Management/Ethics Seminar
h) Communicate effectively with dental and other health care professionals,

interpret their advice and integrate this information into the treatment of the YES
patient?
i) Integrate the current concepts disciplines into periodontics? YES


- 23 -

November, 2013

j) Organize, develop, implement and evaluate periodontal disease control

YES
programs for patients?
k) Organize, develop, implement and evaluate a patient recall program and

YES
provide supportive periodontal maintenance therapy?
l) Utilize allied dental personnel effectively? and YES

Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/ Therapy Seminar
m) Organize, develop and implement an infection control program for a dental

YES
practice setting? (4-7)
Appendix T

- 24 -

November, 2013
59. Does each student/resident complete an adequate number and variety of acceptable
fully documented and treated cases to a level that:
a) Periodontal health is achieved? YES
b) Initiating and contributory factors in the etiology of periodontal disease are
YES
controlled? and
c) A schedule for periodontal maintenance therapy is organized for the patients?
YES
(4-8)
Residents are required to document cases for presentation in Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment
Planning/Therapy Seminar. Residents are required to fully document, evaluate, and review cases with
attending faculty during treatment planning, re-evaluation after initial periodontal therapy, and following
active therapy; a schedule for supportive periodontal therapy is organized at this time.
Available On Site
60. Do students/residents treat a variety of patients with different periodontal diseases

YES
and conditions as defined by The American Academy of Periodontology? (4-8)
Residents provide comprehensive treatment to completion of all case types. The program director
regularly searches the database for in Axium to ensure each resident has an opportunity to treat all
case types in appropriate numbers
Available On Site
61. Do periodontitis cases reflect a majority of moderate to severe disease? (4-8) YES
Residents provide comprehensive treatment to completion of all case types, with the majority of
periodontitis patients presenting with moderate to advanced disease. The program director regularly
searches the database for in Axium to ensure each resident has an appropriate proportion of type III
and IV
Available On Site

- 25 -

November, 2013
62. Is an ongoing record of the number and variety of clinical experiences accomplished
YES
by each student/resident maintained? (4-9)
The Director of Postgraduate Periodontics searches the Axium database each semester to determine
each resident’s activity for case type, and procedure code. When appropriate, patients are assigned
to a given resident to provide clinical experiences if the program director notes limited experience with
a particular procedure or case type
Available On Site
63. Does this ongoing record include periodontal diagnosis, disease severity,
YES
periodontal treatment, as well as patient's age, sex and health status? (4-9)
The Axium computer database contains all of this information and is readily accessible
Available On Site
64. Does the educational program provide clinical training for the student/resident to
YES
the level of proficiency? (4-10)
In-depth instruction and clinical experiences are provided sufficient to achieve a level of proficiency in
the comprehensive treatment of periodontal diseases and implants. Clinical experiences are
documented by the electronic patient management system (Axium), which are reviewed each semester
to ensure a sufficient number and acceptable distribution of case types and clinical experiences. Daily
clinical assessments, semi-annual Oral and Mock Board examinations, and semester performance
evaluations are used to document proficiency. Proficiency is determined by the Program Director in
consultation with the faculty.
Appendix T
65. Does the clinical training include, but not limited to, the following treatment
methods? (4-10)
a) Scaling and root planing? YES
b) Adjunctive use of local and systemic chemotherapeutic agents? YES
c) Gingivectomy/gingivoplasty? YES
d) Periodontal flap procedures to include: replaced, apically positioned and
YES
coronally positioned techniques?
e) Periodontal resective surgery (osteoplasty, ostectomy, and root resection)? YES
f) Tooth extraction in the course of periodontal and implant therapy? YES

- 26 -

November, 2013
g) Periodontal soft and hard tissue regenerative therapies for health, comfort,
YES
function and esthetics?
h) Occlusal treatment to include occlusal adjustment/selective grinding;
YES
stabilization/splinting, including bite-guard therapy?
i) Management of endodontic-periodontal lesions; treatment should be provided
in consultation with the individuals who will assume the responsibility for the YES
completion or supervision of endodontic therapy?(4-10)
Formal instruction on treatment methods is included in the following graduate-level courses and
seminars:
-Anat 544 Advanced Craniofacial anatomy

-Osci 580 Advanced Oral Sciences I (fall)& II (spring)
-Peri 611 Classic Periodontal literature review
-Peri 613 Current Periodontal literature Seminar
-OMDS 503 Oral Pathology Seminar
-Ortd 667 Orthodontic Perio. Relationships
-Omds 615 Anesthesia and Pain Control
- Principles of Conscious Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology
-Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy Seminar
-Hospital Anesthesia Rotation
-Behavioral Sciences/Patient management/Ethics Seminar
Guest speakers serve to provide additional educational experience.
Students render treatment to all periodontal case types as well as cases requiring multidisciplinary
care (periodontic/endodontic lesions, implants and peri-implant disease, preprosthetic procedures, soft
tissue defect management, periodontic/orthodontic tooth exposure, gingival enlargement, minor oral
surgery, management of oral/myofacial pain. Residents also manage various oral conditions requiring
biopsy and/or follow-up to demonstrate resolution, often in consultation with faculty as part of their
rotation in the oral medicine clinic. Acute lesions (e.g., abscesses) are also managed on an
emergency basis. Clinical experiences are documented by the electronic patient management system
(Axium), which are reviewed each semester by the Program Director. Residents manage periodontal
cases from initial evaluation to the completion of care and assignment to supportive periodontal
therapy/maintenance.
Appendix Q
Appendix T

- 27 -

November, 2013
66. Does the educational program provide didactic instruction and clinical training in
oral medicine, including periodontal medicine (i.e. periodontal systemic
interrelationships), as defined in each of the following areas: as defined in each of
the following areas: (4-11)
4-11.1 In-depth didactic instruction in oral medicine includes the following?:
a) Those aspects of medicine and pathology related to the etiology, pathogenesis,
diagnosis and management of periodontal diseases and other conditions in the YES
oral cavity?
b) Mechanisms, interactions and effects of drugs used in the prevention,
YES
diagnosis and treatment of periodontal and other oral diseases?
c) Mechanisms, interactions and effects of therapeutic agents used in the
management of systemic diseases that may influence the progression of YES
periodontal diseases or the management of patients with periodontal diseases?
d) Clinical and laboratory assessment of patients with specific instruction in:
1. Physical diagnosis? YES
2. Laboratory diagnosis of metabolic and infectious diseases? YES
3. Oral pathology? YES
e) Principles of periodontal medicine to include the interrelationships of
YES
periodontal status and overall health?(4-11.1)
4-11.2 Clinical training in oral medicine to the level of competency includes the
following?:
a) Periodontal treatment of older adult patients? YES
b) Periodontal treatment of medically compromised patients? YES
c) Management of patients with periodontal diseases (inflammation) and
YES
interrelated systemic diseases or conditions? and
d) Management of non-plaque related diseases and disorders of the periodontium? YES
These topics are included in the following courses

-Hstl 506 Immunology
-OMDS 503 Oral Pathology Seminar
-Peri 620 Periodontics Clinic

- 28 -

November, 2013
Residents treat periodontitis patients with a wide variety of systemic diseases and health problems and
include children, adolescents and adults of all ages. This includes patients with systemic diseases
contribute to the etiology of the lesion.
Appendix Q
Appendix T
67. Does the educational program provide didactic instruction and clinical training in
dental implants as defined in each of the following areas: (4-12)
4-12.1 In-depth didactic instruction in implants includes:
a) The historical development of dental implants? YES
b) The biological basis for dental implants and principles of implant biomaterials
YES
and bioengineering?
c) The indications and contraindications for dental implants of various designs
YES
and characteristics?
d) The prosthetic requirements of dental implants?:
e) The pre-surgical examination and treatment planning for the use of dental
YES
implants?
f) Implant site development? YES
g) Surgical placement of dental implants? YES
h) The evaluation and management of peri-implant tissues and the management of
YES
biologic implant complications?
i) The maintenance of dental implants? and YES
j) The appropriate sterile or aseptic technique for the placement of dental
YES
implants? (4-12.1)
4-12.2 Does clinical training in dental implants to the level of proficiency include:
a) Implant site development to include hard and soft tissue preservation and
YES
reconstruction, including ridge and sinus floor augmentation?
b) Surgical placement of implants in native and regenerated bone? and YES
c) Management of peri-implant tissues in health and disease? YES
4-12.3 Clinical training to the level of exposure in the prosthetic aspects of dental
YES
implant therapy?


- 29 -

November, 2013

-Dental Implantology Literature Review/Seminar
-Pros 613 Interdisciplinary Implant Seminar
Our students treat a wide variety of patients needing care that includes dental implants. As part of
this care they also provide care to support the placement of dental implants that includes: site
preservation, ridge and sinus augmentation, and management of complications.
Appendix Q
Appendix T
68. Does the educational program provide training for the student/resident in the
methods of pain and anxiety control to achieve the following: (4-13)
a) In-depth knowledge in all areas of conscious sedation? and YES
b) Proficiency in more than one method of conscious sedation, which includes
YES
nitrous oxide/oxygen inhalation sedation, oral sedation or intravenous sedation?

-Principles of Conscious Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology
Each resident will provide IV conscious sedation for a minimum of 20 patients during their residency.
In addition, each resident must demonstrate proficiency in conscious sedation as determined by Dr.
Zakaria Messieha (our dental anesthesiologist providing the didactic and clinical training) during their
sedation experience.
Appendix Q
Appendix T

- 30 -

November, 2013
69. Does the educational program provide instruction in: (4-14)

a) The treatment in a hospital setting of patients with periodontal disease, to the
YES
level of familiarity?
b) The management of temporomandibular disorders including: YES
1. Radiographic interpretation, differential diagnosis, treatment planning,
symptomatic treatment, occlusal appliances, and referral when indicated to YES
a level of familiarity? and
2. Concepts related to more advanced forms of therapy and coordination of
YES
this therapy with other disciplines, to a level of familiarity? and
c) Orthodontic procedures in conjunction with periodontal therapy, to a level of
YES
familiarity?
d) Surgical exposure of teeth for orthodontic purposes, to a level of understanding?
YES
(4-14)

-Omds 623 Temporomandibular disorders
-Oral Path/TMJ/Oral Medicine Clinical Rotation
The Department of Orthodontics refers an ample number of cases for surgical exposure of teeth for
orthodontic purposes. In addition, periodontic and orthodontic residents work together to manage
periodontal patients that require orthodontic treatment as part of their overall case management
Appendix Q
Appendix T
70. Does the educational program provide instruction to the level of understanding in
YES
the management of a periodontal practice? (4-15)
Faculty members give scheduled presentations to residents on the management of a periodontal

practice. The use of appropriate treatment codes, financial considerations of care, materials
management and staff management are integral aspects of discussion during clinic sessions, treatment
planning seminars and interdisciplinary seminars. Residents also participate in a seminar series on
Behavioral Sciences/ Patient management/ Ethics offered by Dr. Anne Koerber.
Appendix Q
Appendix T

- 31 -

November, 2013
71. Is the use of private office facilities not affiliated with a university as a means of
NO
providing clinical experiences in advanced specialty education approved?(4-15.1)
72. Do students/residents have training and experience in teaching of periodontology?

This may include coursework in educational methodology, and experience in YES
clinical instruction and seminar and lecture preparation.(4-16)
Residents provide clinical instruction to pre-doctoral students during a weekly 3 hour clinic session.
Attending faculty in periodontics provide supportive evaluation and instruction. Residents also play a
teaching role as predoctoral students assist during resident surgeries. Residents uniformly evaluate
this time as a highly beneficial learning and clinical experience. Second and Third year Residents also
assist senior predoctoral students in completing their periodontal surgery elective by serving as their
assistant and facilitating completion of the procedure. Typically the surgery is less technically
demanding and suitable for the predoctoral student to complete all or most of the procedure with the
postgraduate student’s help. These teaching experiences, therefore, are considered an enrichment and
do not compromise the didactic or clinical aspects of their training
Appendix O
73. Does the teaching curriculum exceed 10% of the total program time? (4-16) NO
Residents provide clinical instruction to pre-doctoral students during a weekly 3 hour clinic session
and assisting during senior surgeries during their third year of their training program, comprising only
5% of their total program time.
Appendix O

- 32 -

November, 2013
STANDARD 5 - ADVANCED EDUCATION STUDENTS/RESIDENTS

ELIGIBILITY AND SELECTION
74. Are dentists with the following qualifications eligible to enter the advanced
specialty education program accredited by the Commission on Dental Accreditation:
Graduates from institutions in the U.S. accredited by the Commission on Dental
YES
Accreditation?
Graduates from institutions in Canada accredited by the Commission on Dental
YES
Accreditation of Canada? and
Graduates of international dental schools who possess equivalent educational
YES
background and standing as determined by the institution and program? (5)
All applicants must have passed National Board Part I. An interview is required before acceptance of
candidates. The admission data for the recent admitted students are included in the appendix.
Appendix U
75. Are specific written criteria, policies and procedures followed when admitting
YES
students/residents? (5)
The commitment of the University of Illinois to the most fundamental principles of academic freedom,
equality of opportunity, and human dignity requires that decisions involving students and employees be
based on individual merit and be free from invidious discrimination in all its forms. The University of
Illinois will not engage in discrimination or harassment against any person because of race, color,
religion, national origin, ancestry, age, marital status, disability, sexual orientation including gender
identity, unfavorable discharge from the military or status as a protected veteran and will comply with
all federal and state nondiscrimination, equal opportunity and affirmative action laws, orders and
regulations. This nondiscrimination policy applies to admissions, employment, access to and treatment
in the University programs and activities.
76. Is the admission of students/residents with advanced standing based on the same
standards of achievement required by students/residents regularly enrolled in the NA
program? (5)
77. Do transfer students/residents with advanced standing receive an appropriate

curriculum that results in the same standards of competence required by NA
students/residents regularly enrolled in the program? (5)

- 33 -

November, 2013
Evaluation
78. Does a system of ongoing evaluation and advancement ensure that, through the
director and faculty, each program:
a) Periodically, but at least semiannually, evaluates the knowledge, skills,
ethical conduct and professional growth of its students/residents, using YES
appropriate written criteria and procedures?
Formal student evaluation is completed at the end of the fall and spring semesters by faculty and
Program Director using standard forms. In addition, residents and Program Director receive a copy of
course grades at the end of each semester.
b) Provides to students/residents an assessment of their performance, at least

YES
semiannually?
The Program Director meets with students at the end of the Fall and Spring semesters to review
program progress, clinical progress and didactic performance. The Program Director meets monthly
with the residents to discuss general performance of the group and solicit feedback from the residents
on their appraisal of the program.
c) Advances students/residents to positions of higher responsibility only on

YES
the basis of an evaluation of their readiness for advancement? And
Evaluations of clinical and didactic performance are reviewed by the faculty and program director.
Findings of satisfactory performance and continued development in such assessments are required for
residents to progress in the program. Deficiencies are noted, documented and discussed with the
resident with the expectation of remediation for satisfactory progress. Complexity of clinical cases
assigned to residents is monitored by the Program Director with the assistance of the clinic director
and clinic staff and cases assigned accordingly.
d) Maintains a personal record of evaluation for each student/resident which is

accessible to the student/resident and available for review during site visits? YES
(5)
Records of evaluation of residents are maintained by the program director and are available for
review.
Appendix V

- 34 -

November, 2013
79. Is written criteria for evaluating the quality of a student’s/resident’s performance

YES
used? (5-1)
Resident evaluations by faculty are performed on at the end of the fall and spring semester. Criteria
are written and discussed with residents. Action plans to improve unsatisfactory performance are
identified when appropriate.
Appendix V
80. Is written criteria for evaluating the quality of a student’s/resident’s performance

YES
shared with appropriate staff and students/residents? (5-1)
Student performance is formally documented semi–annually. Each clinical instructor completes a

standardized evaluation form (Appendix V) for each student in the program. The Program Director
shares copies of these evaluations with the students. In addition, the Program Director meets
regularly individually with the clinical faculty to review student progress. Further evaluation to assure
clinical progress and progress toward completion research is completed using the Postgraduate
Periodontics Semi-Annual Review Form. This in combination with the ongoing clinical proficiency
assessment in clinical activities tracks student growth and ensures accountability.
Appendix V
81. Is a record of each student’s/resident’s clinical and didactic activities maintained

YES
and reviewed as part of each student’s/resident’s evaluation? (5-1.1)
Student clinical performance is documented semi-annually with each clinical instructor completing a
standardized evaluation form for each student in the program. The course directors evaluate student
performance in didactic courses. Various student activities are evaluated, and various criteria are
used for evaluation, depending upon the course. Student activities that are evaluated include
classroom participation, daily assignments, presentations, written papers, written examinations, and oral
examinations. The Program Director retains copies of grades, evaluations, Axium electronic activity
records, and related documents for review as part of each resident’s evaluation. The program
director meets with the residents on a semi annual basis to review the outcomes of the evaluations
and monitor progress. Residents can review their records at any time during the program.

- 35 -

November, 2013
82. Are evaluation results provided to students/residents in writing? (5-1.2) YES
The Program Director reviews each resident’s progress in writing at the end of the fall and spring
semesters. Residents are afforded a means for comment and are advised of their rights to due
process.
On Site
Copies of evaluations
83. Is documentation of evaluation meetings with students/residents, along with

records of students/residents' activities, and formal evaluations of YES
students/residents kept in a permanent file?(5-1.3)
Documentation of student meetings, activities, and evaluations are kept on file and maintained in the
Program Director’s office. A locked filing cabinet serves to secure such documents. Electronic
documents are stored in password-protected computers. These files are made available to faculty and
residents by request. The Graduate School retains transcripts indefinitely documenting course grades
and the awarding of the postgraduate certificate
On Site
Copies of evaluations
Due Process
84. Are there specific written due process policies and procedures for adjudication of
academic and disciplinary complaints, which parallel those established by the YES
sponsoring institution? (5)
Written due process policies and procedures are contained in the “University of Illinois at Chicago
Graduate School Handbook” and the “UIC Program Manual for Postgraduate Periodontics”. A copy of
the due process policies is provided in the Resident Manual and given to the residents at initial
program orientation. These policies parallel those of the pre-doctoral program and other schools and
programs in the University of Illinois at Chicago. The Program Manual and Graduate Handbook are
available on site.
Appendix W
Appendix X

- 36 -

November, 2013
Rights and Responsibilities
85. At the time of enrollment are the advanced specialty education students/residents
apprised in writing of the educational experience to be provided, including the
YES
nature of assignments to other departments or institutions and teaching
commitments? (5)
Upon acceptance into the program, each resident is sent a detailed description of the program,
including curriculum, schedules, costs, and requirements for completion of the program. Residents
receive an orientation session immediately upon entering the program and at the start of each school
year outlining expectations and responsibilities.
Appendix X
86. Are all advanced specialty education students/residents provided with written
information which affirms their obligations and responsibilities to the institution, YES
the program and program faculty? (5)
Upon acceptance into the program, each resident is sent a detailed description of the program,
including curriculum, schedules, costs, and requirements for completion of the program. Residents
receive an orientation session immediately upon entering the program and at the start of each school
year outlining expectations and responsibilities
Appendix X

- 37 -

November, 2013
STANDARD 6 – RESEARCH
87. Do advanced specialty education students/residents engage in scholarly activity?(6) YES
Residents are required to complete a research project approved by the Program Director, the Director
of Graduate Periodontics Research, and the resident’s research advisor. This project is required for
residents pursuing a certificate only or a combined degree/certificate. The student is required to
present his/her research findings at a regional/national/international meeting. Further, the results
must be utilized to prepare a manuscript suitable for publication. Residents spend approximately 10%
of their time on research
On Site
Listing of student activity
88. Do graduates of periodontal training programs possess a general understanding of

YES
the theory and methods of performing research? (6-1)
Residents are required to complete a research project approved by a Program Director, the Director of
Graduate Periodontics Research, and the resident’s research advisor. This project is required for
present his/her research findings at a regional/national/international meeting. Further, the results
utilized to prepare a manuscript suitable for publication. Students receive graduate-level instruction in
research methodology and statistics (Osci 451 Research Methodology, OSCI 594/441 Biostatistics,
Research OSCI 598,Peri 698 Directed Research), which is critically applied in Peri 611 Classic
Periodontal literature review and Peri 613 Current Periodontal literature Seminar,
Appendix Y
89. Are postdoctoral students/residents given the opportunity to participate in research?

YES
(6-1.1)
Residents are required to complete a research project approved by a Program Director, the Director of
Graduate Periodontics Research, and the resident’s research advisor. This project is required for
present his/her research findings at a regional/national/international meeting. Further the results
must be utilized to prepare a manuscript suitable for publication. Residents spend approximately 10%
of their time on research
Appendix N
Appendix O

- 39 -

November, 2013
SUMMARY OF SELF-STUDY REPORT
Summarize in a qualitative appraisal and analysis the program’s strengths and weakness.
Note: This summary culminates the self-study report in a qualitative appraisal and analysis
of the program’s strengths and weakness.
Institution-Related
1. Assess the adequacy of institutional support for the program.

The program continues to receive excellent institutional support. The clinics are well equipped. There
is an adequate amount of staffing and financial support for the residency programs. The program is
supported by adequate numbers of full time and part time faculty. Plans are under way to hire two
additional full time faculties. Dr. Zakaria Messieha provides training in conscious sedation, medicine,
and pharmacology. Dr. Messieha is a specialist in dental anesthesiology. The program has four full
time clinical staff assistants, and one part-time dental hygienist. A clinic coordinator, who is also a
licensed Dental Hygienist, supports the clinical operations. Each pre-doctoral student now rotates
through the program as a required aspect of their training and provides surgical assists. Two
customer service representatives are available at the postgraduate clinic reception desk for the
efficient operation of the residency program. The program receives sufficient funds to enable the
purchase of materials, supplies, and essential services.
The under construction periodontics postgraduate clinic has 16 operatories, providing each resident
with his/her own facility for the duration of their training. Each operatory has a desktop computer for
access to the Axium electronic record and the internet. Four of the 16 operatories are dedicated for
surgical care with three set up for providing conscious sedation. All operatories have X-ray units for
intra oral radiographs. Four Dexis digital radiographic sensors are also available for use with digital
radiographic evaluation software on all chair side computers. The operatories are adjacent to each
other for ease of consultation among residents and with faculty. Individual storage cabinetry is
provided for each resident. File cabinets are available in postgraduate clinical area and the
conference room adjacent to the clinic area. A supply dispensary is situated on the same floor as
the postgraduate clinic. An instrument cleaning and sterilization area is available for processing of all
instrumentation.
The postgraduate periodontics clinic is scheduled for completion in Fall 2013. All operatories are to
be equipped with radiographic equipment. The renovated space adds an additional 50% space to the
clinic foot print and features a new patient waiting area and a separate resident room/ learning suite
situated adjacent to the Periodontics clinic. There are also four additional surgical suites in the
Implant and Innovations Center that are available for surgical procedures by periodontal, oral surgery
and restorative residents.
A Brilliant Future SUMMARY

- 41 -

November, 2013
The Department Head and Program Director’s offices are situated one floor above the clinic. Each
full-time faculty has a private office. The Department of Periodontics has a seminar room in the clinic
and an additional conference room near to the Departmental office. The Department maintains a
digital projector for student seminars. The seminar room is equipped with a projector screen.
Two full-time receptionists (customer service representative) schedule all appointments and assists in
the management of charts. The College of Dentistry has copy machines available to the residents for
copying of journal articles for literature reviews.
2. Assess whether the program is achieving goals through training beyond pre-
doctoral level.
All of the courses offered in the program are graduate level courses and are structured to provide
information exceeding and building upon that learned at the pre-doctoral level. Early in the program,
all residents are exposed in didactic coursework in the basic sciences as related to the practice of
periodontics. This early concentrated focus is intended to ensure that residents are prepared for
developing an advanced knowledge in periodontics. In addition to graduate level course-work,
residents participate in extensive learning experiences and training during lectures and seminars
restricted to periodontology residents . Moreover, periodontics residents teach pre-doctoral students
in the clinic as well as supervise other pre-doctoral periodontal experiences. The In-Service Training
Examination results, fall/spring oral and written exams and performance in didactic and clinical
courses are utilized to verify that advanced knowledge is gained during the program.
3. Assess whether the program is achieving goals through stated competencies.

The Program Director uses the ADA Commission on Dental Accreditation Standards as the basis for
the goals and objectives of the program and as a guide in determining that all areas of instruction
are being presented at the proper level and intensity. The goals of the program are achieved by
ongoing evaluation and documentation of resident competency, depending upon the skill, using
multiple outcome measures consistent with the objectives of the program. These assessments include
systematic evaluations of resident clinical performance by attending faculty and evaluation during case
presentation seminars (Diagnosis, Prognosis, and Treatment Planning and Surgical Techniques). In
addition, program goals are assessed through performance of oral and written essay examinations.
The fall oral examination follows the current American Board of Periodontology format. The spring
oral examination begins with a case presentation by the resident and is conducted in a manner
similar to the former format utilized by the American Board. The written examinations cover the
content of the periodontal literature review.
In addition to faculty evaluations, residents’ evaluations of courses and clinical experiences are
considered in departmental meetings to determine how the instruction can best be improved. Faculty
members discuss questions related to performance as appropriate; the Program Director discusses
remedial plans with residents and, together with faculty, works with the resident in achieving the
appropriate procedures for remediation when indicated. When deficiencies are noted in didactic
instruction, the program director meets with the appropriate course director to initiate the proper
revisions of, or additions to, the course. Collectively, the current measures of resident progress are
considered to be adequate to determine whether the program is achieving its goals.
SUMMARY A Proud Past

- 42 -

November, 2013
4. Assess whether the program is achieving goals through stated proficiencies.

The program adheres closely to stated proficiencies in the ADA Commission on Dental Accreditation
Standards for Advanced Specialty Education Programs in Periodontics. The stated competencies are
considered adequately measured by current outcomes for assessing residents. Faculties submit written
evaluations on the level of skill demonstrated by the resident. In addition, the faculties evaluate the
residents in writing at the end of the fall and spring semester. The semester oral and written
examinations also serve to measure resident competency. Finally, residents have performed
satisfactorily on the AAP In-Service Examination.
5. Assess whether the program is achieving goals through outcomes.

There are sufficient outcome measures to demonstrate that the program is currently achieving
identified goals. Since 2008, 13/13 graduates have taken and passed the American Board of
Periodontology Examination. We are confident the others will also become Diplomates in the near
future. Currently, all graduates are working in their specialty and most are active within organized
dentistry. All residents take the AAP in-service exam each year and perform to meet or beat the
expectations set forth by the program. Residents participate in Mock Board oral examinations in the
spring and fall. At the conclusion of the examinations faculty meet as a group to discuss the
students’ performance on the exam including assessing how the results relate to the program
outcomes. Therefore, assessment of outcomes of the educational program occurs on a continual
basis. The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs and the Program Director conduct exit
interviews of all graduating students to obtain an appropriate evaluation from the perspective of the
graduates, as well as course evaluations. These further serve to assess whether the program is
achieving goals through outcomes and to make enhancements for the betterment of the program.
6. Assess calibration among program directors and faculty in the student/resident

evaluation process to ensure consistency of the evaluation process.
The faculty members who provide clinical coverage and student evaluations do not undergo formal
calibration; however, faculty members engage in continual discussions of student progress. The
Program Director meets with individual faculty to discuss policy and procedure changes, as well as
consistent achievement targets for the students. The Department holds monthly meetings to address
issues of calibration and policy. Importantly, all faculty members are involved in evaluating each
resident throughout the duration of his/her training in the program. Thus, each faculty member is
afforded the opportunity to independently assess all students. The formal fall and spring faculty
evaluations of students underscore the uniformity and consistency of evaluations of students by
faculty. Oral exams are completed with four teams of two faculty members. Discussion of students’
performance on the oral exam as a group allows for standardization and calibration of the
examination process.
7. Assess the faculty evaluation process to ensure consistency of the evaluation

process.
Residents are asked to provide confidential evaluations of faculty semi-annually. The evaluations are
completed anonymously. Formal courses are also evaluated. The Program Director and Department
Head review these evaluations and transmit the content of these evaluations to individual faculty
members. The yearly evaluation of faculty utilizes a standardized form developed by the college.
Faculties are able to respond to evaluation, both in writing and during the oral discussion with the
Department Head. Additional faculty evaluation information is derived from the exit interview process
described in #5 above.

- 43 -

November, 2013
8. Assess the institution’s policies on advanced education students/residents.

The Dental School’s policies on advanced education students strongly support quality education in the
post-graduate programs. The Program Directors monitor the individual needs of the various programs.
The Program Directors are committed to ensuring that students develop a strong scientific foundation
for clinical practice, advanced diagnostic and clinical competence, and appreciation for the role of
general dentists and other specialists in achieving optimal patient care. The Program Directors work
closely with faculty in the College of Dentistry providing both clinical training and didactic content in
the biomedical sciences to ensure that content and objectives of the courses optimally fulfill the
needs of our residents.
9. Assess the institution’s policies on eligibility and selection.

All applicants for admission are considered without regard to race, color, creed, religion, national
origin, gender, or age. Resident selection is made from a pool of applicants who meet published
eligibility requirements. Competitive applicants are required to interview with the Program Director and
other faculty as well as meet with current residents in the program. The Program Director and faculty
rank applicants with respect to several parameters, including academic achievement, motivation, and
potential for success in periodontics. The selection process, therefore, actively involves the faculty
and residents in the program. Selected residents must meet the Graduate School’s standards for
admission into the master’s program.
10. Assess the institution’s policies on due process.

Institutional academic policies include due process procedures for academic and disciplinary matters.
These policies apply equally to all advanced dental education programs and are included in the
Postgraduate Periodontics Program manual and the University of Illinois, Chicago, Graduate School
Handbook. The policies clearly outline specific actions to be taken within the program and the
institution that insure timely and fair adjudication of academic and disciplinary matters.
11. Assess the institution’s policies on student/resident rights and responsibilities.

Institutional academic policies clearly delineate student rights and responsibilities as well as ethical
principles, practices, and behaviors for students and faculty enrolled in the College of Dentistry’s
postgraduate programs. These policies are detailed in the University of Illinois at Chicago Graduate
School Handbook and the UIC Program Manual for Postgraduate Periodontics.
12. Assess the adequacy and accessibility, hours of operation and scope of holdings of
the sponsoring institution’s library resources.
Residents have direct access to the Library of Health Sciences (LHS), which is located 2 blocks from
the Dental School. The LHS is open 7 days per week, 8-12 hours per day, during each academic
semester. The library maintains an extensive collection of reference materials, journals, books,
audiovisuals, and electronic resources in dentistry and oral sciences. The Library offers an array of
services including traditional references, interlibrary loan, and photocopying. The College also enjoys
the assistance of a dedicated librarian from the Library of the Health Sciences. The postgraduate
program also maintains a library of texts and periodicals specific to periodontics.
13. Assess the institutional oversight of the quality of training at affiliated

institutions.
All training of Postgraduate Periodontics Students occurs at the University of Illinois at Chicago.

- 44 -

November, 2013
Patient Care
1. Assess the institution’s/program’s preparedness to manage medical emergencies.

The College of Dentistry is part of the University of Illinois at Chicago, with the main hospital less
than one block away. All advanced dental education students receive training in the management of
medical emergencies as part of the Principles of Conscious Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology course.
In addition, all of the residents are required to become certified in ACLS. The Dental School’s
preparedness to manage medical emergencies is excellent. Activation of the medical emergency
systems results in immediate notification and response of full-time Medical Emergency Response Team
in the dental clinics. Ambulance and technician support requires only 3-5 minutes. Our clinic
maintains emergency equipment necessary to monitor and provide life support. Additional equipment
is available in the Periodontics clinic, including appropriate monitoring/treatment equipment and
medications.
2. Assess the adequacy of radiographic services and protection for patients,

advanced education students/residents and staff.
The radiographic services in the post-graduate clinic, College of Dentistry, and surrounding community
(computer assisted tomography) are excellent. Within the post-graduate clinic, students and staff are
protected from exposure to ionizing radiation through the use of x-ray units where the activation
switch is behind a wall with a small window for viewing of the patient. Staff involved in radiographic
services wears radiation measurement badges. All equipment is tested at least annually. Patients are
protected through utilization of the minimum required diagnostic exposures and utilizing patient
protective equipment, e.g., lead aprons and collars.
3. Assess the program’s capacity for four-handed dentistry.

The availability of chair-side assistance is adequate to permit four-handed dentistry. Available full-time
staff, together with pre-doctoral students, provides chair-side assistance on a predictable and reliable
basis for all major procedures.
4. Assess the institution’s policies and procedures on hazardous materials, and

bloodborne and infectious diseases for patients, advanced education
students/residents and staff.
The institution’s policies and procedures on hazardous materials, and blood borne and infectious
diseases are adequate. The Director of Clinical Operations actively monitors compliance with these
policies and procedures, the Associate Dean for Patient Services and committees charged with this
responsibility. Details on the College of Dentistry’s policies and procedures are available on the
intranet. This includes appropriate Material Data Safety Sheets. Postgraduate Periodontics Students
are provided an orientation to the policies and procedures of the College of Dentistry during the
Introduction to Periodontics course held during their first month, and before any patient contact.
5. Assess how students/residents may be able to apply ethical, legal and regulatory
concepts in the provision, prevention and/or support of oral health care.
Students apply ethical, legal and regulatory concepts within the context of weekly clinical seminars
and literature reviews. The international and multicultural composition of the program contributes to
the fullness of such discussions, particularly as they relate to the provision, prevention, and support of

- 45 -

November, 2013
oral health care. Clinical staff members are proactive in reinforcing concepts and policies. First year
residents provide other residents with chair-side assistance in the program orientation, enabling the
new residents to observe the application of these ethical, legal and regulatory concepts in practice
prior to providing direct patient care. There is also opportunity to discuss issues relating to
professional ethics in the Behavioral Sciences/Patient Management/Ethics Seminar conducted each
spring.
Program-Related
1. Assess the student’s/resident’s time distribution among each program activity

(e.g., didactic, clinical, teaching, research) and how well it is working
Using the time distribution guidelines in the standards, the Program Director schedules the required
courses. Time is allowed for didactic courses, teaching, and research. Graduate courses taken by
residents also fulfill requirements for the Master of Science degree.
Table 1 Resident - Approximate Percentage of Effort

Resident Year Didactic Clinic Research Teaching
1 27 65 5 3
2 20 65 13 6
3 17 65 12 6
This distribution is working very well. The residents are enrolled in a limited number of formal
courses that are offered yearly at regularly scheduled times. Departmental clinical seminars, Literature
Review and Current Literature Review also are scheduled at regular times. Residents can then
schedule their own research times according to the demands of their proposed project. Residents are
scheduled in clinic at all other times to treat their assigned patients. Importantly, therefore, there is
some flexibility in the amount of time that a resident can devote to research or clinical activity,
depending on the individual interest and needs of the resident.
Clinic time accounts for approximately 65% of the overall assigned time. Within the scope of the 3-
year program, this allows for adequate time to treat a sufficient number of patients and perform the
procedures required by the standards.
2. Assess the volume and variety of the program’s patient pool.

The large number of patients that seek care at the College of Dentistry far exceeds the treatment
capacity of 12 or more residents in the postgraduate program. Patients are screened and evaluated at
multiple junctures following their entry into the College of Dentistry, permitting appropriate referral for
treatment in postgraduate programs.
Periodontics faculty members on consultation in predoctoral or other postgraduate clinics make the
majority of referrals for advanced comprehensive care and prescription surgery to the postgraduate
clinic. Patients seeking only implant therapy are screened by faculty in periodontics (if directly referred
to the graduate clinic from an outside restoring dentist) or prosthodontics (if the patient is a patient of
record in the College of Dentistry). Pediatric and orthodontic referrals are coordinately directly through
the respective postgraduate programs. Dentists in the community also refer patients for periodontal

- 46 -

November, 2013
treatment directly to the postgraduate program. A departmental faculty member screens the latter
patients. The large patient population precludes acceptance of all individuals referred for care into
the periodontics postgraduate clinic.
With the assistance of a Customer Service Representative (front desk coordinator), the Program
Director oversees patient admissions into the clinic and the assignment of all patients to residents.
The caseload for each resident is monitored closely and increases with each successive year of the
program. Currently, each third year resident has an active caseload of approximately 90 patients.
Thus, the size of our patient population permits selective admission and assignment, which enables
residents to gain appropriate clinical experiences. Resident clinical appointments are generally fully
booked for at least 4 weeks in advance.
3. Assess the program’s student/resident/faculty ratio.

Two full-time, and 15 part-time faculty members currently support the Program. Efforts are under way
to hire two additional full time faculties. Ten faculty members provide weekly clinical coverage. A
part-time dental anesthesiologist also provides clinical coverage two half-days weekly. The
postgraduate clinic is operational 8 half-days a week, with 12 faculty members (and dental
anesthesiologist) providing dedicated coverage for clinical activities. Two or more attending faculty
members are assigned to oversee patient care activities during all clinic sessions. The Program
Director and faculty are available to provide additional coverage, as necessary, which is coordinated
through the Program Director.
4. Assess the program’s student/resident pool.

Approximately 50 applications have been received from graduates of dental schools in the USA and
Canada each year over the past 3 years for the 4 slots usually available each year. International
dentists have comprised about 35% of the applications during this period. The majority of applicants
are well qualified. The number of highly qualified applicants has stayed consistent over the past 3
years.
5. Assess rotations, electives and extramural experiences of the program.

The residents experience a Hospital Anesthesia Rotation during the 3 year program. This is a 5-week
rotation in the University of Illinois at Chicago Hospital, Department of Anesthesia. This rotation is
completed during the summer of the second year. Resident experiences during the rotation including
Preoperative assessments, IV Catheter Placements, Hand Mask ventilations, Laryngeal Mask Airway
Placements and Endotracheal Intubations are evaluated.
6. Assess the program’s record keeping and retention practices.

Resident’s grades are reported to the Registrar of the University of Illinois at Chicago and retained by
that office. The Periodontics Program Director keeps a copy of departmental grades. Similarly,
resident evaluation forms and summaries are kept in the department.
Clinic records in the College of Dentistry are electronic. Each patient has a hard copy record of
signed consent forms, signed treatment plans, and radiographs. This record is filed centrally in the
College of Dentistry and may be checked out by any student/resident providing care for the patient.
When checked out to the postgraduate clinic these records are kept in a locked file cabinet.
Residents can make copies of chartings, radiographs, etc. Patient confidentiality is strictly respected
according to HIPPA (Federal) guidelines.

- 47 -

November, 2013
7. Assess the research activities of the program.

First and second years residents complete courses in Research Methodology, Biostatistics, Immunology,
Advanced Oral Sciences and additional basic science courses related to the students research that
may be assigned by his/her research advisor and thesis committee. The resident chooses a research
advisor during the first year based on resident’s interest and consultation with the Director of
Periodontics Research, the Program Director, and the Department Head. An Advisory Committee is then
selected. The resident then prepares a research proposal for evaluation of scientific merit and approval
by the Committee, which may recommend modification.
Once the Committee approves the proposal, the resident conducts the research, collects, analyzes, and
evaluates the data under faculty supervision, and presents the findings at a
regional/national/international meeting. Residents are required to prepare a manuscript suitable for
submission to a professional journal.

- 48 -
Vision Statement
The University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry will be recognized as a leader in:
• patient-centered, evidence-based, technically enhanced clinical care founded on the

preventive and public health sciences,
• integrated educational programs based upon contemporary pedagogy and technology, and
• centers of research excellence that are interdisciplinary, use innovative methodology and
focus on relevant health and healthcare issues.
Mission Statement
The mission of the University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry is to promote optimum
oral and general health to the people of the State of Illinois through excellence in education,
patient care, research, and service.
The College identifies the following Institutional Goals to meet this mission:
• To provide patient-centered care that is evidence-based, comprehensive and

compassionate for a culturally diverse population;
• To provide student-oriented educational programs that prepare learners to engage in the

evidence supported, thoughtful, ethical practice of dentistry;
• To prepare highly qualified oral healthcare professionals, educators, and scientists in the
oral health and basic sciences;
• To address health care needs through community-based initiatives, educational programs,

and consultative services;
• To value and seek diversity in students, staff, faculty, and patients;
• To provide an environment for individual growth founded on mutual respect and

professionalism;
• To foster collaborative research and develop specialized centers for innovative research
in areas of health and disease;
• To maintain a leadership role in forming health care policy at the university, state, and
national levels;
• To be a resource for continued professional development;
Appendix A-1
STANDARD 1 – INSTITUTIONAL COMMITMENT/PROGRAM
EFFECTIVENESS/AFFILIATIONS
Appendix A – The program’s goals and objectives
Program Goals:
1. To prepare highly-qualified clinicians, educators, and scientists in the field of

Periodontology; that are capable of periodontal practice, research and teaching;
2. To provide patient-centered periodontal care that is evidence-based,
comprehensive, and compassionate for a culturally diverse population;
3. To foster collaborative research and develop specialized centers for innovative
research in areas of periodontal health and disease;
4. To prepare students to successfully complete the American Board of
Periodontology and become Diplomate of the AAP.
5. To provide and serve the mission of the UIC College of Dentistry by providing
student-oriented educational program that prepares learners to engage in the
evidence-supported, thoughtful, ethical practice of dentistry; and also provides an
environment for individual growth founded on mutual respect.
Program Objectives:
1. To provide students with an understanding of the theoretical basis for, and the
basic sciences involved in, the maintenance of health and/or the treatment of
diseases of the periodontium.
2. To expand student’s knowledge of the interactions of medical and dental
disciplines.
3. To broaden the professional judgment of students to include long-term
management of the periodontal patient.
4. To teach students to integrate appropriate methods of case management and
treatment planning tailored to the physical, psychological and financial needs of
the patient.
5. To improve and enhance the teaching skills of students.
6. To teach students research skills, including the critical evaluation of basic and
clinical research (e.g., ability to conduct a literature review and critical analysis
which enable the students to critique new developments in the field once in
practice).
7. To teach students the principles of dental implantology, including site
development, preservation, regeneration and augmentation.
Appendix A
Appendix B
Exhibit 1a: Goal #1

Goal To prepare highly-qualified clinicians, educators, and
scientists in the field of Periodontology; that are capable of
periodontal practice, research and teaching
Didactic performance, clinical performance, research and
Outcomes Assessment clinical oral presentations, fall/spring oral/written exams,
Mechanism performance on the AAP in-service examination.
Weekly oral treatment planning/therapy seminar presentations

How often conducted Fall/spring oral/written examinations
Faculty evaluations (Fall/Spring)
Date to be conducted/ December, June for oral/written examinations and evaluation
finished by by post graduate faculty.
Grade of B or Higher for all oral and written examinations.
Results expected Satisfactory evaluations by clinical faculty.
Completion of a research project and presentation/publication
of results.
Satisfactory didactic and clinical performance.
Results achieved Satisfactory oral treatment planning/therapy seminar
presentations.
Satisfactory presentation of research results, preparation of a
manuscript summarizing results suitable for publication,
regional recognition of resident research productivity.
Treatment results and their documentation are acceptable
Assessment of results Residents have shown continual improvement of their clinical
skills commensurate with their level of experience.
Several courses are delivered in the program including: a

Program improvement as a program leading to proficiency in conscious sedation, implant
result of data analysis dentistry seminar for periodontal residents, practice
management, behavioral sciences/patient management/ethics
seminar, oral pathology seminar, clinical rotation, and
immunology. In addition, the research experience has been
formalized to include specific target dates to accomplish steps
involved completing a project. A thesis/research committee is
assembled for each resident.
Date of next assessment Each Semester
8.
1 Appendix B
Exhibit 1b
Goal #2
Goal To provide patient-centered periodontal care that is evidence-based,

comprehensive, and compassionate for a culturally diverse population
Faculty assessment of Resident clinical performance
Outcomes Assessment Oral presentation in Treatment seminars
Mechanism Formal chart audits and reviews
Faculty assessment of clinical performance is completed in the fall and

How often conducted spring semester.
Treatment seminars are conducted each week in the fall and spring
semesters.
Formal chart reviews are conducted each semester by the program
director.
Monthly monitoring and documenting of infection control.
Date to be conducted/ December, June
finished by
Patient treatment should exhibit the highest quality of care.

Results expected Documentation should be complete. Treatment should follow a logical
treatment plan and sequence. Patients who have completed active
therapy should be seen at an appropriate recall interval for their clinical
status.
The program is meeting the goal as outlined.
Results achieved
Continual monitoring of the quality of care in the manner outlined

Assessment of results above.
Logs of implants placed and allograft materials placed are now

Program improvement employed in the clinic as a backup means to track the placement of
as a result of data these materials.
analysis Monthly monitoring and documenting of infection control was
instituted.
Date of next assessment December 2013
9.
2 Appendix B
Exhibit 1c
Goal #3
Goal To foster collaborative research and develop specialized centers

for innovative research in areas of periodontal health and disease
Residents are required to complete a research project. Present
Outcomes Assessment their findings at a regional/national/international meeting and
Mechanism prepare a manuscript suitable for publication that summarizes their
findings. Prior to June 2011 this requirement was not strictly
adhered to. Some residents did not complete a research project.
All current residents have research projects and are making
satisfactory progress towards meeting the program research
requirement. This is assessed by each resident’s research advisor
the Program Director, the Director of Periodontal Graduate
Research and the student’s research/thesis committee.
Research/thesis committee meetings are held at least each
How often conducted semester. The Director of Periodontal Graduate Research, Dr.
Keiko Watanabe, meets with the research advisor and receives a
report from the students committee and renders a semester grade
each semester.
Date to be conducted/ Completed at the end of each semester December, June, August.
finished by
All residents will complete the steps outlined in the program

Results expected manual towards completion or their research project on or before
the published target dates.
All current students are on track for completion of their project

Results achieved and graduation on time.
Results are satisfactory.

Assessment of results
Enhancements to the program in the area of research were

Program improvement as a completed during the 2011-12 academic year. No changes are
result of data analysis anticipated at the present time.
Date of next assessment June 2014
3 Appendix B
Exhibit 1d
Goal #4
Goal To prepare students to successfully complete the American Board

of Periodontology and become Diplomate of the AAP
Survey of graduates, consulting the American Academy of
Outcomes Assessment Periodontology Directory for listing of Alumni among the Board
Mechanism Eligible and Board Certified members.
Annually
How often conducted
Date to be conducted/ June each year

finished by
We expect all our graduates to pass the written and oral exams and
Results expected become Diplomates of the American Board of Periodontology.
Since 2008, All of our (13/13) graduates have taken and passed the
Results achieved American Board of Periodontology.
We have noted a dramatic improvement in the performance of our
residents on the in-service exam. This also suggests we are
achieving this goal.
We have been successful in preparing residents for the American
Assessment of results Board of Periodontology exams. We expect that recent increases
in the rigor of the program with respect to literature review,
written/oral exams, and oral case presentations will increase the
interest and success of our graduates in the future.
The program enhancements to address this goal have been
Program improvement as a implemented during the 2010-2011 academic year.
result of data analysis
Date of next assessment June 2014
4 Appendix B
Exhibit 1e
Goal #5
Goal To provide and serve the mission of the UIC College of Dentistry
by providing student-oriented educational program that prepares
learners to engage in the evidence-supported, thoughtful, ethical
practice of dentistry; and also provides an environment for
individual growth founded on mutual respect.
Satisfactory performance in clinical and didactic instruction with
Outcomes Assessment predoctoral students as determined by the program director and the
Mechanism director of predoctoral clinical periodontics. Satisfactory
completion of a research project as outlined in the UIC
Postgraduate Periodontics Program Manual.
Assessment of predoctoral teaching is completed at the end of
How often conducted each spring semester.
Students have regular meetings of their research committee. The
committee ensures adequate progress in each student’s research
project. The Director of Postgraduate Research also confers with
each committee and student to monitor satisfactory progress in
student research.
Date to be conducted/ The Director of Predoctoral Clinical Periodontics will report to the
finished by program director at the end of each year whether each student has
served satisfactorily and the result will be included in the spring
progress summary for each student.
A formal report is submitted by the student to his/her research
committee, mentor and the Director of Postgraduate Research
eight times during the program following the schedule outlined in
the UIC Postgraduate Periodontics Program Manual.
Patient treatment should exhibit the highest quality of care.
Results expected Documentation should be complete. Treatment should follow a
logical treatment plan and sequence. Patients who have completed
active therapy should be seen at an appropriate recall interval for
their clinical status.
The program is meeting the goal as outlined.
Results achieved
Continual monitoring of the quality of service to the College of
Assessment of results Dentistry in the form of research and teaching will be monitored
as outlined above.
Adherence to the schedule of committee meetings will be
Program improvement as a reinforced in the 2013-2014 year.
result of data analysis
Date of next assessment December 2014
5 Appendix B
Organizational Chart
Bruce S. Graham
Dean
Dr. William Knight Mr. Mark Dr. Luisa DiPietro TBD Dr. Susan Rowan Dr. Caswell Evans Dr. David Crowe Dr. Darryl Pendleton
Executive Valentino Associate Dean Associate Dean Interim Associate Dean Interim Associate Dean
Associate Dean Assistant Dean Faculty Affairs Finance & Associate Dean Prevention & Associate Dean Student &
Academic Affairs Advancement & Administration Patient Services Public Health Scs. Research Diversity Services
1
Alumni Relations
Dr. Christopher Dr. Michael Miloro Dr. Thomas Dr. Richard Dr. Carla Evans Dr. Marcio Dr. Salvador Nares Dr. Stephen
Wenckus Department Diekwisch Monahan Department da Fonseca Department Campbell
Department Head Department Head Department Head Head Department Head Head Department Head
Head Oral & Oral Biology Oral Medicine & Orthodontics Pediatric Periodontics Restorative
Endodontics Maxillofacial Diagnostic Scs Dentistry Dentistry
Surg
Appendix C
July 15, 2013 Office of Faculty Affairs Appendix C

Appendix D
American Board of Periodontology
BOARD DIPLOMATES
YEAR GRADUATING RESIDENTS NAMES OF RESIDENTS

BOARD DIPLOMATE
2013 Whitney Dunn/Weiner
Nisha Maniar
Nima Ebrahimi
2012 Fadi Masoud Fadi Masoud
Sonia Belani Sonia belani
2011 Sasha Ross Sasha Ross
Sangeetha Chandrasekhran Sangeetha Chandrasekhran
Robert Busan Robert Busan
2010 Simona Katona Simona Katona
Li-Ping Lin Li-Ping Lin
Allison Shelby Yen Allison Shelby Yen
2009 Jane Kim Jane Kim
Logesh Swayamprakasam Logesh Swayamprakasam
2008 Bahareh Sabzehei Bahareh Sabzehei
Praveen Gajendrareddy Praveen Gajendrareddy
Natasha Yashar Natasha yashar
We are confident the 2013 graduates will also become Diplomates in the
near future. The improvements in the program implemented by Dr. Reddy,
including oral mock boards, written essay exams on the periodontal
literature, and enhancement of the literature review course will better
prepare candidates and therefore increase the likelihood they will be
comfortable taking the exam.
Appendix D
STANDARD 2 – PROGRAM DIRECTOR AND TEACHING STAFF
Appendix G
Exhibit 2
PROGRAM DIRECTOR
Name of Director’s First Board Yr Appointed Number of Hrs/wk at Sponsoring Number of

Program Init. & Last Certifi to Position Institution – Breakdown time into Hrs/wk
Name ed following categories: Devoted to
• administration Program
• teaching
• research
• other
Post- Praveen Yes 2013 • Administration-10 40
Graduate Gajendrareddy • Teaching-16
Periodontics • Research- 6
• Other- 8
Appendix G
Appendix H
Exhibit 3.1
Teaching Staff
Name Discipline/ Board Hours Weeks Assignments*

Specialty Status (If per week per
Specialist) year
Praveen Gajendrareddy, BDS, PhD Periodontics Diplomate 40 hrs/wk 52 SC, T, PA
Salvador Nares, DDS, MS, PhD Periodontics Diplomate 16 hrs/wk 52 SC, T, PA
Arnold Freeman, DDS Periodontics No 4 hrs/wk 38 SC
Bruce Abdullah, DDS Periodontics Diplomate 4 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
David Gaston, DDS Periodontics Diplomate 16 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Daniel Greenberg, DDS, Periodontics No 16 hrs/wk 38 SC, T
Joseph Gluck, DDS Periodontics Diplomate 8 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
John Vickery, DDS Periodontics No 8 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Nadia Kawar, DDS Periodontics Diplomate 8 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Michael Schmerman, DDS Periodontics No 16 hrs/wk 52 PA
Saba Khan, DDS, MSD Periodontics Diplomate 16 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Seema Ashrafi Periodontics Diplomate 12 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Simona Katona, DDS Periodontics Diplomate 4 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Zakaria Messieha Dental Diplomate, 8 hrs/wk 52 SC, T
Anesthesiology National
Board of
Anesthesiolo
gy
SC—Supervision of students in clinic
T—Teaching Didactic Sessions (lectures, seminars, courses, research)
PA—Program Administration
Appendix H
Exhibit 3.2
Teaching Staff
(Less Than One-Half Day Per Week)
Name Discipline/ Board Status Days Weeks Assignments

Specialty (If Specialist) per per year *
month
Alan Rosenfeld Periodontics Diplomate ½ day 38 T
Charles DiFranco Periodontics Diplomate 1 day 38 SC,
Dorothy Anasinski Periodontics Diplomate 2 days 38 SC
Frank Maggio Periodontics No 1 day 38 SC
Nuha Nakib Periodontics Diplomate 1 day 38 T
SC—Supervision of students in clinic

T—Teaching Didactic Sessions (lectures, seminars, courses)
PA—Program Administration
Appendix H
Commission on Dental Accreditation
BioSketch
Do not attach Curriculum Vitae.
Print or Type Only
Name: Praveen Gajendrareddy. B.D.S., Ph.D.

Current
Institution: College of Dentistry, University of Illinois at Chicago
EDUCATIONAL BACKGROUND (Begin with college level)

Yr of
Name of School, City and State Certificate or Degree Area of Study
Grad.
University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry 2008 Certificate Periodontology
Dr. M.G. R. Medical University, India 1998 B.D.S. Dentistry
The Ohio State University 2004 Ph.D. Oral Biology
LICENSURE
License (Do not include license number) From (Year) To (Year)
Specialty License in Periodontics (Illinois) 2011 Present
Dental License (Illinois) 2011 Present
Dental Sedation Permit, Conscious Sedation, Parenteral (Illinois) 2011 Present
License to Practice Dentistry (Washington) 2009 Present
License to Practice Dentistry (India) 2000 Present
Restricted Faculty Dental License (Illinois) 2008 2011
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Certifying Organization Specialty Date certified
American Board of Periodontology (Diplomate) Periodontology 2010
CE COURSES TAKEN (last 5 years)
Course Title Course Content and Provider Month and Year
Immediate vs. Delayed Implant Placement in Dr. Dennis Tarnow February, 2013
Extraction Sockets - What we know, what we
think we know and what we don’t know
A 25 Year Retrospective on Connective Tissue Dr. Burton Langer February, 2013

Grafting Around Teeth and Implants
1 Appendix I: Gajendrareddy
Regeneration of the Periodontal Lesion in Pierpaolo Cortellini, Myron Nevins, Paul S. September, 2012
Clinical Therapy Today Rosen
Innovations in Periodontics Session 1 Stephen K. Harrel, Tomohiro Ishikawa, Ralph P. September, 2012
Pollack, Takashi Watanabe
Five Things Every Healthcare Professional
Angelo Mariotti September, 2012
Should Know about Bisphosphonates and ONJ
Innovations in Periodontics Session 1
Suheil M. Boutros, Federico Brugnami, Lourdes November, 2011
A. Christopher, Taskeshi Nozama
Strategies to Overcome Difficult Extractions
Robert A. Levine, Ralf F. Schuler, Timothy P. November, 2011
Walsh
Interactive General Session
Paulo M. Camargo, Pierpaolo Cortellini, Jeffery November, 2011
Ganeles, David W. Paquette, Michael S. Reddy,
Mark A. Reyolds, Paul S. Rosen, Dennis P.
Tarnow, Stephen S. Wallace
Innovations in Periodontics Session 3
Alfonso Caiazzo, Serge Dibart, Yoon-Euy Hong, November, 2011
Michael Toffler
Timing of Implant Placement
Dennis P. Tarnow, Barry D. Wagenberg November, 2011
Impact of Risk Assessment on Diagnosis and
Kenneth S. Kornman, Michael K. McGuire November, 2011
Management of Periodontal Disease
Applications of Biologics to Enhance Clinical
David L. Cochran, Ziv Mazor, Myron Nevins, November, 2011
Outcomes
Thomas G. Wilson, Jr.
Management of Deficient Anterior Ridge
Oded Bahat, Sascha A. Jovanovic, Marc L. November, 2011
Nevins
Ossesointegration – what we have learned- A
Dr. Torsten Jemt, Dr. Bertil Friberg October, 2011
25-YEAR RETROSPECTIVE
Amnion Chorion Allograft: A Protein Enriched
Dr. Dan Holtzclaw September 2011
in Membrane for us in Guided Tissue
Regeneration and Site Preservation
“Implant Complications – Classification,
Dr. Hom-Lay Wang February, 2011
Prevention and Management”
“Regeneration Algorithms For Meeting Today’s
Dr. Paul Rosen February, 2011
Challenges”
“Should We Be Saving Teeth or Placing
Dr. Paul Rosen February, 2011
Implants”
“Current Topics in Periodontal and Implant
Dr. Peter Cabrera, Dr. Tricia Crosby, Dr. Martin January, 2011
Dentistry for the Dentist-Hygiene Team”
Kolinski, Dr. Timothy Walsh
“Evidence Based Esthetic Implant Dentistry”
Dr. Daniel Buser October, 2010
Optimized Implant Esthetics: New Techniques
Robert Winter, DDS October, 2010
in Soft Tissue Manipulation and Restorative
Dentistry
“The Use of Guidor for Guided Bone
Dr. Howard Rosa February, 2010
Regeneration and Immediate and Staged Implant
Placement Procedures.”
“Managing Complex Implant Cases”
Dr. Craig Misch February, 2010
“New Frontiers in Periodontal and Peri-implant
Dr. Giulio Rasperini February, 2010
Regeneration”
New Frontiers in Periodontics: Where have we
Dr. Kenneth S. Kornman February, 2010
come from, where are we now, where are we
going?
TEACHING APPOINTMENTS (Begin with current)
Subjects/Content Areas Taught/ From To
Name of Institution, City and State Rank
Administrative Responsibilities (Year) (Year)
Director of the Postgraduate Program in Assistant

Periodontics Professor Periodontics 2013 Present
Assistant
Associate Director of Clinical Research Professor Research 2013 Present
Assistant
University of Illinois, Chicago Professor Periodontics 2008 Present
Assistant
Clinic Director, Post Graduate Periodontics Professor Periodontics 2011 2013
CURRENT TEACHING RESPONSIBILITIES

Name of Institution, City, State Course Title Discipline and Level of Total Contact Hours Per Year
Students (Year)
Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
University of Illinois, Chicago Classic Periodontal Post-Graduate 110

literature review Periodontics Residents
(Peri 611) (Years 1 and 2)
University of Illinois, Chicago Periodontics Clinic Post-Graduate 585

(Peri 620) Periodontics Residents
(Years 1, 2 and 3)
University of Illinois, Chicago Current Periodontal Post-Graduate 35

Literature Review Periodontics Residents
(Peri 613) (Years 1, 2 and 3)
University of Illinois, Chicago Periodontal Post-Graduate 45

Treatment Planning Periodontics Residents
Seminar (Peri 630) (Years 1, 2 and 3)
University of Illinois, Chicago Comprehensive Pre-Doctoral Students 6

Care: Periodontics
(DADM 314/317)
HOSPITAL APPOINTMENTS (Begin with current)

From To
Name of Hospital City State
(Year) (Year)
PRACTICE EXPERIENCE
Location (City and State) Type of Practice From To
(Year) (Year)
939 W North Ave Chicago, IL 60642 Private Practice 2012 Present
80 N Northwest Hwy Park Ridge, IL 60068 Private Practice 2012 Present
801 S. Paulina St, Chicago, Il Faculty Dental Practice 2008 2012
MEMBERSHIP, OFFICES OR APPOINTMENTS HELD IN LOCAL, STATE OR NATIONAL DENTAL OR ALLIED

DENTAL ORGANIZATIONS, INCLUDING APPOINTMENTS TO STATE BOARDS OF DENTISTRY AND CODA
Name of Organization Title From To
(Year) (Year)
American Association of Periodontology
New Century Committee Member 2012 Present
Foundation
American Dental Education Association Member 2008 Present
American Academy of Periodontology Member 2004 Present
Illinois Society of Periodontists Member 2004 Present
Midwest Society of Periodontology Member 2004 Present
American Association of Dental research Member 2001 Present
PUBLISHED WORKS (For the most recent five years, list articles in which you were the principal author that appeared in refereed
journals or text books, by author(s), title, publication, and date)
Author(s) Title Publication Date
Praveen Gajendrareddy, Christopher MMP-8 overexpression and prolonged

G. Engeland, Roger Junges, Michael neutrophil recruitment relate to stress- February,
Peer Reviewed Journal
P. Horan, Gina Rojas, Phillip T. impaired healing and poor collagen 2013
Marucha architecture in mice
Wound healing in the elderly. In: Katlic

Engeland CG, Gajendrareddy PK MR (Ed.), Cardiothoracic Surgery in the Book Chapter 2011
Elderly: Evidence-based Practice
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Salvador Nares

Current
Institution: University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill

Yr of
Grad.
University of Texas at El Paso, El Paso, TX 1993 BS Microbiology
University of Texas at El Paso, El Paso, TX 1996 MS Biology

Baylor College of Dentistry, Texas A&M University System
1997 DDS Dentistry
Health Science Center, Dallas, TX
2001 PhD Biomedical Sciences
2002 Certificate Periodontology
Oral Infection and Immunity Branch, NIDCR/NIH,
2005 Post-Doctoral Fellowship Mucosal Immunology
Bethesda, MD
LICENSURE
Texas, Dental Practice License 1997 Current
Maryland, Dental Practice License 2002 Current
North Carolina, Instructor’s License 2005 Current
North Carolina, Conscious IV Sedation Permit 2006 Current
BOARD CERTIFICATION
American Board of Periodontology Periodontology 2007

Department of Periodontology, School of
Dentistry, University of North Carolina at Associate
Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Professor Periodontology 2011 Present
with Tenure
Dentistry, University of North Carolina at Assistant
Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Graduate Program Director 2010 Present
Professor

Dentistry, University of North Carolina at Assistant
Chapel Hill, Chapel Hill, NC Periodontology 2005 2011
Professor
Appendix I
Students (Year)
Department of Periodontology, PERI 820 Periodontology, Graduate Didactic Clinic/Laboratory

School of Dentistry, University of Introduction to
North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Dental Implants 32 2
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, PERI 821 Periodontology, Graduate 32

North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Dental Implants
Chapel Hill, NC
Periodontology, Graduate
Department of Periodontology, PERI 710 32 2
School of Dentistry, University of Periodontal Therapy
North Carolina at Chapel Hill,
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, PERI 711 40
School of Dentistry, University of Periodontal Therapy
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, PERI 730 Seminar 60
School of Dentistry, University of in Periodontology
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, PERI 731 Seminar in 60
School of Dentistry, University of Periodontology
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, PERI 890/891/
Periodontology, Graduate 110
School of Dentistry, University of 892/893
North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Advanced Clinical
Chapel Hill, NC Periodontics and
Clinical Practice
Department of Periodontology, One-on-One Dental
Periodontology, Graduate 36
School of Dentistry, University of Implant Surgical
North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Experience
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology,
DENG 701a/701b Periodontology, Graduate 24
School of Dentistry, University of
Interdisciplinary
Care Conference
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, DENT 224 Surgical Periodontology, 2nd Year 24 4
School of Dentistry, University of Periodontics DDS Students
Chapel Hill, NC
Department of Periodontology, DENT 203
Periodontology, 2nd Year 3
DDS Students
North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Periodontal Therapy
Chapel Hill, NC
DENT 116 Oral Periodontology, 1st Year 4 3
Biology DDS Students
Chapel Hill, NC
DENT 209 Periodontology, 2nd Year 1
Treatment Planning DDS Students
Chapel Hill, NC
DENT 303 Evidence Periodontology, 3rd Year 3
Appendix I
North Carolina at Chapel Hill, Based Periodontics DDS Students
Chapel Hill, NC
From To
(Year) (Year)
Warren G. Magnuson Clinical Center, NIH Bethesda MD 2002 2005

(Year) (Year)
North Carolina Section, America Association of
President 2012 Present
Dental Research
North Carolina Section, American Association of

Vice President 2011 2012
Dental Research
ODCS Study Section, NIH/NIDCR

Reviewer 2011 Present
Commission on Dental Accreditation (CODA)
Site Visitor-Periodontics 2011 Present
North Carolina Section, American Association of
Secretary 2010 2012
Dental Research
Platform for Exchange of Education and Research

Charter Member 2009 Present
(PEERS-North America), Dentsply, Inc.
Southern Academy of Periodontology
Member 2007 Present
North Carolina Society of Periodontology Member
2006 Present
North Carolina Dental Society Member
2005 Present
American Dental Association Member
2005 Present
International Team for Implantology Member
2005 Present
North Carolina Section, American Association of Member
2005 Present
Dental Research
American Academy of Periodontology Member
1997 Present
International Association for Dental Research Member
1994 Present
American Association for Dental Research Member
1994 Present
Reside J, Everett E, Padilla R, Arce In vivo assessment of bone healing
R, Miguez P, Brodala N, De Kok I, following Piezotome® ultrasonic
Nares S instrumentation Clin Impl Dent Rel Res In Press
Fordham JB, Naqvi AR, Nares S

MicroRNAs responsive to A.
actinomycetemcomitans and P.
gingivalis LPS modulate expression of Innate Immun In Press
genes regulating innate immunity in
human macrophages
Fordham JB, Naqvi AR, Nares S MicroRNA and Non-Coding RNA:
Identifying miRNA function in innate
Technology, Developments and
immunity. 2013
Applications, 1st edition (Dahiya,
N., ed). Nova Science Publishers,
Appendix I
New York
Kumarswamy A, Moretti A, In-vivo assessment of osseous wound

Paquette A, Padilla R, Everett A, healing using a novel bone putty
Int J Dent 2012
Nares S containing lidocaine in the surgical
management of tooth extractions.
Serra R, Al saidi AG, Angelov N,
Suppression of LPS-induced matrix
Nares S
metalloproteinase responses in
macrophages exposed to phenytoin and J Inflamm 2010
its metabolite, 5-(p-hydroxyphenyl-), 5-
phenylhydantoin.
Pesevska S, Nakova M, Ivanovski
Dentinal hypersensitivity following
K, Angelov N, Kesic L, Obradovic
scaling and root planing: comparison of
R, Mindova S, Nares S Lasers Med Sci 2010
low-level laser and topical fluoride
treatment.
Nares S, Moutsopoulos N, Angelov
Rapid myeloid cell transcriptional and
N, Rangel ZG, Munson PJ, Sinha N,
proteomic responses to
Wahl SM Am J Pathol 2009
periodontopathogenic Porphyromonas
gingivalis.
Moutsopoulos NM, Nares S,
Nikitakis N, Rangel Z, Wen J, Tonsil epithelial factors may influence
Am J Pathol 2007
Munson PJ, Sauk J, Wahl SM oropharyngeal HIV transmission.
Peng G, Greenwell-Wild T, Nares S,
Myeloid differentiation and
Jin W, Lei KJ, Rangel Z, Munson
susceptibility to HIV-1 are linked to Blood 2007
PJ, Wahl SM
APOBEC3 expression.
Jeong SJ, Apostolska S, Jankulovska
M, Angelova D, Nares S, Yoon MS, Dental caries risk can be predicted by
Lim DS, Angelov N, Jeong MJ simply measuring the pH and buffering J Dental Hyg Sci 2006
capacity of saliva.
Angelov N, Nakova M, Pesevska S,
Periodontal disease: genetic
Nares S
relationships and modern research Mac Dent J 2006
techniques.
Ivanovski K, Nakova M, Pesevska
Specific psychological profile in oral
S, Filipovska A, Nares S, Angelov N J Clin Periodontol 2005
lichen planus patients.
Vasquez-Maldonado N, Greenwell-
HIV-1 induced macrophage gene
Wild T, Marinos NJ, Swain WD,
expression includes CDKN1A, a
Nares S, Orenstein JM, Sporn MB, J Virol 2005
potential host cell target for viral
Wahl SM
replication.
Warburton G, Nares S, Brahim J,
Transcriptional events in a clinical
Wahl SM, Dionne RA
model of oral mucosal tissue injury and Wound Repair Regen 2005
repair.
Angelov N, Moutsopoulos N, Jeong
Aberrant mucosal wound repair in the
MJ, Nares S, Ashcroft G, Wahl S.M
absence of secretory leukocyte protease Thromb Haemost 2004
inhibitor.
Kramer PR, Nares S, Kramer S,
Mesenchymal stem cells acquire
Grogan D, Kaiser M
periodontal ligament characteristics in J Dent Res 2004
vitro.
Nares S, Kolenbrander P
Genetic variability in periodontal
Réalités Cliniques 2003
disease.
Nares S
The genetic relationship to periodontal
Periodontol 2000 2003
disease.
Yamada H, Nishimura F, Naruishi
Phenytoin and cyclosporine-A suppress
K, Chou HH, Takashiba S, Albright
the expression of MMP-1, TIMP-1, and
G, Nares S, Iacopino AM, J Periodontol 2000
cathepsin L but not that of cathepsin B
Murayama Y.
in cultured human fibroblasts.
Appendix I
Cutler CW, Shinedling EA, Nunn
M, Jotwani R, Kim BO, Nares S, Association between periodontitis and
J Periodontol 1999
Iacopino A.M. hyperlipidemia: Cause and effect?
Chu X, Newman J, Park B, Nares S,

Ordonez G, Iacopino AM In-vitro alteration of macrophage
Cell Tissue Res 1999
phenotype and function by serum lipids.
Doxey DL, Nares S, Park B, Trieu
Diabetes-induced impairment of
C, Cutler CW, Iacopino AM
macrophage cytokine release in a rat Life Sciences 1998
model: potential role of serum lipids.
Iacopino AM, Doxey D, Cutler CW,
Phenytoin and cyclosporine-A
Nares S, Stoever K, Fojt J, Gonzales
specifically regulate macrophage
A, Dill RE
phenotype and expression of PDGF and
J Periodontol 1996
IL-1 in-vitro and in-vivo: Possible
molecular mechanism of drug-induced
gingival hyperplasia.
Nares S, Ng MC, Dill RE, Park B, Cyclosporine-A upregulates platelet-
Cutler CW, Iacopino AM derived growth factor B chain in
J Periodontol 1996
hyperplastic human gingiva.
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Bruce Abdullah

Current
Institution: UIC

Yr of
Grad.
Loyola University, Chicago, IL 1983 B.S. Biology
Loyola Dental, Maywood 1987 DDS Dental
Tufti University, Boston, MA 1989 Periodontics
LICENSURE
Illinois Department, Professor Regulation 1987 current
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Illinois Department, Professor Regulation Perio 1989
American Academy Periodontology Perio 1994

UIC 206 Post Grad Period 1995 2013
\
Students (Year)
UIC Postgrad Perio 8
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
ADA Member 1987 2013
AAP Member 1987 2013
CDS Member 1987 2013
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Dorothy Anasinski, D.D.S

Current
Institution: University of Illinois at Chicago

Yr of
Grad.
William Rainey Harper College 1987 R.D.H Dental Hygiene
Loyola University School of Dentistry 1993 D.D.S. Dentistry
Northwestern University Dental School 1995 Certificate Periodontics Periodontics
LICENSURE
Licensed Dentist 9/30/2015
Licensed Specialist in Dentistry – Periodontics 9/30/2015
Licensed Dentist Controlled Substanced 9/30/2015
BOARD CERTIFICATION
American Board of Periodontics Periodontics May 2010

Assistant 1995- 1996

University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Clinical
Dentistry Professor Undergraduate Periodontics Clinic 2000- 2007
Assistant PostGraduate Clinic

University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Clinical
Dentistry Professor Periodontics Department 2009 Present
\
Students (Year)
University of Illinois at Chicago PostGraduate Periodontics 84

College of Dentistry
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
Illinois State Dental Society Delegate 2009 Present
Chicago Dental Society North Suburban Branch President 2013 Present
Chicago Dental Society North Suburban Branch Vice President 2010 2011
Chicago Dental Society North Suburban Branch Treasurer 2009 2010
Chicago Dental Society North Suburban Branch Treasurer 2011 2012
Chicago Dental Society North Suburban Branch President – Elect 2012 2013
American Association of Women Dentist Director of Corporate Affairs 2010 2011
North Suburban Women Dentists President 2009 2010
North Suburban Women Dentists Vice President 2008 2009
North Suburban Women Dentists Treasurer 2007 2008
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Seema S. Ashrafi

Current
Institution: University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
University of Illinois at Chicago, IL 1988 B.S. Biology
University of Illinois at Chicago, IL 1991 B.S. Dental Sciences
University of Illinois at Chicago, IL 1993 D.D.S. Dentistry
University of Illinois at Chicago, IL 1994 M.S. Histology
University of Illinois at Chicago, IL 1999 Specialty certificate Periodontics
LICENSURE
North East Regional Boards in Dentistry May, 1993 Current

North East Regional Boards in Periodontal Specialty July 14, 1999 Current
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Diplomate, American Board of Periodontology Periodontics 2003

Clinical
University of Illinois at Chicago, Associate Program Director, Pre-doctoral Curren
College of Dentistry Professor Periodontics 2012 t
Clinical teaching in
Periodontics, Periodontal
clinical manager for Group
practice Monet, Course
director and Co-course Director
Clinical
University of Illinois at Chicago, Associate for DAOB 311, 312, 321, 322, Curren
College of Dentistry Professor 323. 2008 t
Periodontal clinical manager
University of Illinois at Chicago,
Clinical for Group practice Monet
Assistant
College of Dentistry Professor 1999 2007
Appendix I
Students (Year)
University of Illinois at DAOB 311 Periodontics Component Didactic Clinic/Laboratory

Course Director D1
Chicago, College of 4 9
Dentistry
University of Illinois at DAOB 312 Periodontics Component 18 72
Course Director, D1
Chicago, College of
Dentistry
University of Illinois at DAOB 321 Course Director, D2 18 72
Chicago, College of
Dentistry
University of Illinois at DAOB 322 Course Director, D2 18 72
Chicago, College of
Dentistry
University of Illinois at DAOB 323 Periodontics Component ___ 72
Course Director, D2
Chicago, College of
Dentistry
University of Illinois at DAOB 321,322, 323 Periodontics Contact 4 ____
Advisor for Small Group
Chicago, College of Learning, D2
Dentistry
University of Illinois at PERI 341 Lecturer, D3 4 ____
Chicago, College of
Dentistry
University of Illinois at PERI 351-353 Clinical Teaching in ____ 72
Periodontics and
Chicago, College of PERI 361-362 Periodontics Manager for
Dentistry Group Practice Monet,
D3, D4
University of Illinois at DAOB 331 Clinical Teaching in ____ 72

Periodontics and
Chicago, College of Periodontics Manager for
Dentistry Group Practice Monet, D3

From To
N/A City State
(Year) (Year)
N/A N/A N/A N/A

(Year) (Year)
American Academy of Periodontology Active member 1996 Current
Appendix I
Omicron Kappa Upsilon Honorary Dental Active member 2003 Current
Society
Faculty Dental Practice Management Active member 2003- 2010
Committee University of Illinois at Chicago,
IL
American Board of Periodontology Active member 2004 Current
Member: Admissions Committee UIC COD Member 2004 Current
American Dental Education Association Woman Liaison Officer for the University 2006 Current
of Illinois at Chicago
Curriculum Restructuring Team University Team Leader 2007 2008
of Illinois at Chicago, IL
Post Graduate Periodontics Faculty Search Committee chair 2010 2011
Subcommittee of the Executive Committee Voting Member 2011 Current

on Student Promotions
Accreditation Steering Committee Member 2011 Current
Need for Antibiotic

Premedication for Patients
ASHRAFI S, Nuha Nakib. Journal of Disease a Month 2011
Having Periodontal Dental
Procedures, pages 218-223
Drug Induced Gingival
Nuha Nakib, ASHRAFI S.
Overgrowth; Journal of Disease a Month 2011
Pages 225-229
Developing an Interactive CD in Tech Expo Programs at the
Steinberg, A.D., Žefran, M. Combination With a Haptic-Based ADEA 87th Annual Session
Kolesnikov and Ashrafi, S M. . Simulator for Novice Student and Exhibition Program, 2010
Self-Training in Periodontal Washington, DC
Probing, p. 70, Abstract#386,
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Robert Busan

Current
Institution: UIC

Yr of
Grad.
Neuroscience/Economic
UCLA 2004 BS s
UCLA 2008 DDS Dentistry
UIC 2011 Certificate Periodontics
LICENSURE
Dentistry/Periodontics 2010 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
American Board of Periodontology Periodontics 5/12

Clinical
Assistant
UIC professor Predoctoral periodontics clinic 2011 Present
\
Students (Year)
UIC, Chicago, IL NA 2nd, 3rd, and 4th years Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)
NA

(Year) (Year)
American Academy of Periodontology Member 2008 present
American Dental Association Member 2008 present
Chicago Dental society Member 2011 present
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: John Crawford

Current
Institution: University of Illinois at Chicago College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
WyCliffee College 1961 - -
Guy’s Hospital Dental School 1965 BDS Dentistry
Harvard School of Dental Medicine 1973 Certificate II Periodontics
University of Connecticut 1979 Ph.D Inmunology
LICENSURE
Dental Teaching License 07/23/2002 08/07/2012
BOARD CERTIFICATION
- - -
- - -

Professor
UIC College of Dentistry Emiritus SGL Facilitation 2012 2013
UIC College of Dentistry Professor Periodontics Immunology 1997 2011
Associate
Associate
\
Students (Year)
UIC College of Dentistry DOST.332,333 D3 135 -
UIC College of Dentistry DBCS 311, 312 D1 270 -
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)
- - - - -
- - - - -
- - - - -

(Year) (Year)
- - - -
- - - -
- - - -
Disease-a-month 57(4):203-
Crawford JM Periodontitis and Cardiovascular Disease 2011
205;2011
Briggs CL and Engeland CG. Publication

Crawford JM Bias and its Implications for Evidence – J.Dent.Educ. 74(6):593-600;2010 2010
based Clinical Decision Making.
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Charles F. DiFranco DDS MS

Current
Institution: UIC

Yr of
Grad.
Loyola University Chicago 1973
Loyola University Dental School 1981 DDS
Loyola University Dental School 1983 Certificate Periodontics
LICENSURE
Illinois - NERB 1981 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
American Board of Periodontology Periodontics 1988

UIC Graduate Perio Clinic Perio Implant Surgery 2005 2013
Loyola Graduate Perio Clinic Perio Implant Surgery 1984 Closing

\
Students (Year)
UIC Graduate Perio Clinic All Grad Students Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
~200
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
Chicago Dental Soc – NW Side Branch Held all offices up to President 1983 Present
Arcolian Dental Arts Held all offices up to President 1983 Present
DiFranco, Rowden, Gargiulo, Toto Kangerheris cells in Gingival Epithelium Journal of Periodontology 1984
DiFranco, Gargiulo Lateral Periodontal Cysts Case Reports in Periodontology 1986
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: David L. Gaston

Current
Institution: University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
The Ohio State University Biological Sciences
The Ohio State University 1959 D.D.S Dentistry
Naval Dental School, NNMC, Bethesda, Md. 1970 Certificate in Periodontics Periodontics
Georgetown University 1971 M.S. Periodontics
LICENSURE
State of Illinois 1982 present
BOARD CERTIFICATION

Clinical
University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Assistant
Dentistry Professor Periodontics 1992 present
\
Students (Year)
University of Illinois at Chicago Postgraduate, D3, D4 Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
American Dental Association Life Member 1959 Present
American Academy of Periodontology Life Member 1971 Present
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Daniel A. Greenberg

Current

Yr of
Grad.
University of Wisconsin - Madison 1965 B.S. Molecular Biology
University of Illinois at Chicago 1969 D.D.S. Dentistry
University of Illinois at Chicago 1979 Ph.D. Biochemistry
LICENSURE
Specialty License in Periodontics 1974 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION

University of Illinois at Chicago Assoc. Prof Periodontics 1979 Present
University of North Carolina Assoc. Prof Periodontics 2010 Present

Students (Year)
University of Illinois at Chicago Literature Post Graduate Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
University of Illinois at Chicago Seminars Post Graduate 132 700
University of North Carolina Post Graduate Variable Variable
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
ADA, CDS, ISDA, AAP, Membership
Illinois Society of Periodontics Membership
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Tom Hart

Current
Institution: University of Illinois at Chicago College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
Echols
University of Virginia, Charlottesville, VA 1981 BA Scholar/Biochemistry
Emory University, College of Dentistry, Atlanta, GA 1985 DDS Dentistry

Virginia Commonwealth University/School of Dentistry,
Richmond, VA 1991 Certificate Periodontics
Virginia Commonwealth University/Medical College of
Virginia, School of Basic Sciences, Richmond, VA 1991 PhD Human Genetics
LICENSURE
North Carolina Dental License 1994 Present 2013
BOARD CERTIFICATION

Department Chair, Population Genetics

Research, teaching: lectures genetics of
dental disease and periodontics (D2
class; graduate orthodontics residents,
Classic literature review postgraduate
University of Illinois at Chicago, College of periodontics residents, Small group Present/
Dentistry Professor learning facilitator. 2010 2013
\
Students (Year)
UIC COD, Chicago, IL Small Group D2 27

Learning facilitator
UIC COD, Chicago, IL DAOB 321 D2 and IDDP1 1
Appendix I
UIC COD, Chicago, IL Classic Literature Graduate Periodontics 3
Review, Graduate Residents
Periodontics
UIC COD, Chicago, IL ORTD 524 Graduate Orthodontics 1

Craniofacial Residents
Anomalies
Ohio State University, College of DENT 6564 Clinical D1 undergraduate dental 1

Dentistry Features, Biology and students
Etiology of
Periodontal Diseases

From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
American Dental Association Member 1993 Present

2013
American Dental Association, Council on Scientific Member of Council 2011 Present

Affairs 2013
Professional Products Report (PPR) Oversight Committee Member 2013 Present

Committee, American Dental Association, Chicago,
IL
Subcommittee on Caries Management by Risk Subcommittee Member 2013 Present

Assessment (CAMBRA), American Dental
Association, CSA
American Academy of Periodontology Member 2010 Present
American Association of Dental Research Member 1986 Present

American Society of Human Genetics
Member 1991 Present
Costello BJ, Marshall KL, Schafer The utility of hybrid promotion and Journal of Dental Education 2013
T, Phillips S, Hart TC. tenure tracks for dental school faculty.
Periodontol 2000. 2013
Do X-Linked diseases affect periodontal Jan;61(1):266-78.
Chien HH, Hart TC 2013
health?
PLoS One. 2012;7(10):e47628
A characterization of the oral
Ames NJ, Sulima P, Ngo T, Barb J,
microbiome in allogeneic stem cell 2012
Munson PJ, Paster BJ, Hart TC
transplant patients.
Appendix I
Nephrocalcinosis (Enamel Renal Nephron Physiol. 2012;122(1-
Jaureguiberry G, De la Dure-Molla
Syndrome) Caused by Autosomal 2):1-6. 2012
M, Parry D …. Hart TC et al.,
Recessive FAM20A Mutations.
Hart TC, Corby PM, Hauskrecht M, Identification of microbial and

Hee Ryu O, Pelikan R, Valko M, proteomic biomarkers in early childhood Int J Dent. 2011;1-13. 2011
Oliveira MB, Hoehn GT, Bretz WA. caries.
Cells Tissues Organs.
Wright JT, Torain M, Long K, Seow
Amelogenesis imperfecta: genotype- 2011;194(2-4):279-83
K, Crawford P, Aldred MJ, Hart PS, 2011
phenotype studies in 71 families.
Hart TC.
Alrayyes S, Hart TC Periodontal disease in children. Dis Mon. 2011 Apr;57(4):184-91. 2011
Clinical and molecular characterization

Bleyer AJ, Zivná M, Hulková H,
of a family with a dominant renin gene Clin Nephrol. 2010
Hodanová K, Vyletal P, Sikora J, 2010
mutation and response to treatment with Dec;74(6):411-22.
Zivný J, Sovová J, Hart TC,
fludrocortisone.
Choi SJ, Song IS, Feng JQ, Gao T, Dev Biol. 2010; 344(2):682-92.
Mutant DLX 3 disrupts odontoblast
Haruyama N, Gautam P, Robey PG, 2010
polarization and dentin formation.
Hart TC.
Novel cathepsin C mutation in a

Pallos D, Acevedo AC, Mestrinho Brazilian family with Papillon-Lefèvre
Dent Child 2010;77(1):36-41. 2010
HD, Cordeiro I, Hart TC. syndrome: case report and mutation
update.
Bassim CW, Gautam P, Domingo Oral Dis. 2010 Jul;16(5):488-95.

Craniofacial and dental findings in
DL, Balog JZ, Guadagnini JP, Gahl 2010
cystinosis.
WA, Hart TC.
Pediatr Dent. 2009 Nov-
Cogulu D, Becerik S, Emingil G, Oral rehabilitation of a patient with Dec;31(7):523-7. 2009
Hart PS, Hart TC. amelogenesis imperfecta.
Choi SJ, Roodman GD, Feng JQ, In vivo impact of a 4 bp deletion Dev Biol. 2009 Jan 1;325(1):129-
Song IS, Amin K, Hart PS, Wright mutation in the DLX3 gene on bone 37. 2009
JT, Haruyama N, Hart TC. development
Choi SJ, Marazita ML, Hart PS,

Sulima PP, Field LL, McHenry TG, The PDGF-C regulatory region SNP
Govil M, Cooper ME, Letra A, rs28999109 decreases promoter Eur J Hum Genet. 2009
Jun;17(6):774-84. 2009
Menezes R, Narayanan S, Mansilla transcriptional activity and is associated
MA, Granjeiro JM, Vieira AR, with CL/P.
Lidral AC, Murray JC, Hart TC.
Hart PS, Becerik S, Cogulu D, Novel FAM83H mutations in Turkish

Emingil G, Ozdemir-Ozenen D, Han families with autosomal dominant Clin Genet. 2009 Apr;75(4):401-4 2009
ST, Sulima PP, Firatli E, Hart TC. hypocalcified amelogenesis imperfecta.
Domingo DL, Trujillo MI, Council

Hutchinson-Gilford progeria syndrome: Oral Dis. 2009 Apr;15(3):187-95
SE, Merideth MA, Gordon LB, Wu 2009
oral and craniofacial phenotypes.
T, Introne WJ, Gahl WA, Hart TC.
Wright JT, Frazier-Bowers S, J Dent Res. 2009 Apr;88(4):356-

Phenotypic variation in FAM83H-
Simmons D, Alexander K, Crawford 60. 2009
associated amelogenesis imperfecta.
P, Han ST, Hart PS, Hart TC.
Exclusion of candidate genes in seven Am J Med Genet A. 2009

Becerik S, Cogulu D, Emingil G, Jul;149A(7):1392-8
Turkish families with autosomal 2009
Han T, Hart PS, Hart TC.
recessive amelogenesis imperfecta.
Genetic studies of craniofacial Orthod Craniofac Res. 2009 2009

Hart TC, Hart PS. anomalies: clinical implications and (3):212-20.
applications.
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Simona Katona

Current
Institution: UIC College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
UIC College of Dentistry 2010 DDS Dentistry
College of Dentistry 1998 Certificate OS OS
Cluy Mapoca, Romania 1992 DMD Dentistry
LICENSURE
General Dentist / Periodomtist 2006/2010 current
BOARD CERTIFICATION
American Board of Periodomtology Periodontics 2011

UIC College of Dentistry Clinical 2011 Current
Assistant
UIC College of Dentistry Professor
\
Students (Year)
UIC College of Dentistry DAOB 311 D1 Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
UIC College of Dentistry DAOB 312 D1 x Lab
UIC College of Dentistry DAOB 323 D2 x Clinical
UIC College of Dentistry Peri-351-353 D 3 /I 2 Clinical

Appendix I
UIC College of Dentistry Peri-361-362 D4 Clinical

From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Nadia Kawar

Current
Institution: University of Illinois

Yr of
Grad.
Scholars for Teaching
Excellence Faculty
University of Illinois- Chicago IL 2012 Fellowship Medical Education
Masters in dental science
Saint Louis University- St Louis MO 2005 (research) Periodontics
Certificate in
Saint Louis University- St Louis MO 2004 postgraduate periodontics Periodontics
Bachelor in Dental
University Of Jordan 1995 Surgery General Dentistry
LICENSURE
Dental specialist 9/11/2007 09/30/2015

Dentist 07/11/2006 09/30/2015
BOARD CERTIFICATION

Clinical Perio manager, undergraduate

Assistant Periodontics clinical instructor, post
University Of Illinois Professor graduate clinical instructor 2006 2013
Adjunctive Undergraduate clinical

Southern Illinois University Faculty instructor/resident 2001 2004
\
Appendix I
Students (Year)
University Of Illinois-Chicago -IL Clinical Periodontics Second, third, fourth year X

dental students
University Of Illinois-Chicago -IL Dentistry Oral Third year X

Science Topics
University Of Illinois-Chicago –IL Clinical Periodontics Post graduate residents in X

periodontics
Post graduate residents in

University Of Illinois-Chicago -IL Classic Literature periodontics
X

From To
(Year) (Year)
North Chicago Veterans Administration North Chicago IL 2005 2010

(Year) (Year)
American Academy of Periodontology Active member 2001 2013
American Dental Association member 2001 2010
Midwest society of Periodontology member Past

member
Illinois State of Periodontology member
Chicago Dental Society member
Osteonecrosis of the jaws: what the Dis Mon. 2011 Apr;57(4):231-41.

Abughazaleh K, Kawar N. physician needs to know: practical doi: 10.1016/j.disamonth.. Review. 2011
considerations.
Periodontitis in pregnancy: the risk of Dis Mon. 2011 Apr; 57(4):192-202.

Kawar N, Alrayyes S.
preterm labor and low birth weight. doi:10.1016/j.disamonth.2011.03.0 2011
05.
Kawar N, Gajendrareddy PK, Hart

Periodontal disease for the primary care Dis Mon. 2011 Apr; 57(4):174-83.
TC, Nouneh R, Maniar N, Alrayyes
physician. doi:10.1016/j.disamonth.2011.03.0 2011
S.
03. Review.
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Frank A. Maggio

Current
Institution: U of I Dental School Chicago

Yr of
Grad.
U of I – Urbana 1967 BA Anthropology
Loyola University, Chicago 1971 DDS Dentistry
University of Illinois at Chicago 1975 Certificate Periodontology
LICENSURE
Ill 1971 Present
California 1972 Present
Ill Perio 1975 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION

Clinical
U of I Dental Chicago Assistant Periodontics 1975 Present
\
Students (Year)
U of I Dental Chicago Periodontics Clinic Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
252
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)
Sherman Elgin Ill 1975 Present

(Year) (Year)
State Dental Society Present 1984 1984
Ill State Board Dentistry Member 1990 1998
American Dental Association Trustee 1984 1988
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Zakaria S Messieha, DDS

Current

Yr of
Grad.
Cairo University 1984 B.Sc. Zoology
The Ohio State University 1992 DDS Dentistry
LICENSURE
New York 1993 Present

Illinois 1996 Present
Indiana 2008 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
The American Dental Board of Anesthesiology Dental Anesthesiology 1996
National Dental Board of Anesthesiology Dental Anesthesiology 2004

National Board of Anesthesiology Anesthesiology 2008

Clinical Anesthesiology/Medicine and

University of Illinois at Chicago Professor therapeutics 1996 Present
\
Students (Year)
1 Appendix I: Messieha
Appendix I
University of Illinois at Chicago Seminars in Post-Grad Specialty 15 0
(UIC) anesthesiology, Pain
& Anxiety Control
UIC Medicine & Post-Grad Specialty 15 0

Therapeutics
UIC Introduction to DMD 3 1 0

anesthesia
UIC DMD 3 3 0
Hospital Dentistry
UIC Post-grad Perio and 0 400
Clinical Trianing in OMFS
Sedation and GA

From To
(Year) (Year)
University of Illinois at Chicago Hospital Chicago IL 1996 Present
University of Chicago Hospital Chicago IL 1998 2004
Long Island Jewish Hospital New Hyde Park NY 1996 1996

(Year) (Year)
American Society of Dentist Anesthesiologist Director 2000 Present
Illinois Dental Society of Anesthesiology President 2004 2005
American Dental Board of Anesthesiology Secretary 2002 2008

ADEA Chair Council on Hospital and Advanced 2004 2005
Education Programs
Retrospective Outcomes
Evaluation of 100 Parenteral
Messieha ZS, Cruz-Gonzalez W, Winter
Moderate and Deep Sedations Anesthesia Progress
Hakim, M 2008
Conducted in a General Practice
Dental Residency
Bispectral Index Monitoring (BIS)
as a Guide for Intubation Without
Neuromuscular Blockade in
Messieha ZS, Guirguis S, Hanna S Office-Based Pediatric General Anesthesia Progress
Spring
Anesthesia: A Retrospective 2011
Evaluation
Lin B, Messieha ZS, Hoffman W Safety and Efficacy of International Journal of Clinical August
Appendix I
Pediatric General Medicine 2011
Anesthesia by Laryngeal
Mask Airway With or
Without Intravenous
Access
Prevention of Sevoflurane Delirium and Spring
Messieha ZS Anesthesia Progress
Agitation with Propofol 2013
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Nuha Nakib DDS MS

Current
Institution: UIC College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
Bachelor of Dental
Science
Cairo University, Egypt 1971 B.D.S. Dentistry
Master in Science
Case Western Reserve Universal (Cleveland, Ohio) 1981 Periodontics Certificate Periodontics
LICENSURE
General Dentistry 1975 2013
Perio Specialty 1995 2013
BOARD CERTIFICATION
America Board of Periodontology Periodontics 1995

Anoliate
UIC College of Dentistry Problem Periodontics 1981 2013
\
Students (Year)
University of Illinois at Chicago Course Director, 2012-Present Didactic Clinic/Laboratory

Surgical Periodontics
Peri 341
University of Illinois at Chicago Periodontics Manager 2004-Present

for Group Practice
DaVinci
University of Illinois at Chicago Course Director, 2001-Present

Appendix I
Periodontics for
Dental Hygiene
Students
University of Illinois at Chicago Clincial Associate 1997-Present

Professor in
Periodontology

From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
Dug Induced gingival Overgrowth Nov 4,

Nakib Ashrafi
Disease –a- Month Vol 57 2011
Need for Antibiotic Premedication for

Nakib Ashrafi Patients Having Periodontal Dental –a-
Month
Signs and Symptoms of Periodontal Al-Boston, Local Arabic Bi-Weekly

Nakib, N.M. 1993
Disease and its Prevention Publication
Extent of Endotoxin Penetration into

Nakib, N.M., Bissada, N.F.,
Root Cementum of Periodontally Healthy J. Dent Res 61: 259,1982 (Abstract) 1982
Simmelink, J.W., & Goldestine, S.N.
and Diseased Teeth
Extent of Endotoxin Pentration into Root

Nakib, N.M., Bissada, N.F.,
Cementum of Periodontally Healthy and J. Periodontol. 368,1982 1982
Simmelink, J.W., & Goldestine, S.N.
Diseased Teeth.
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Alan L. Rosenfeld

Current
Institution: University of Illinois, College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
U of Illinois Champaign 1970 BS Biology
U of Illinois College of Dentistry 1971 BSD
U of Illinois College of Dentistry 1974 DDS
U of Pennsylania 1977 Certificate Periodontology
LICENSURE
Illinois (General & Specialty Sedation) 1977 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Diplomate American Board of Periodontology Periodontics 1982

Periodontal Dept
Clinical
U of Illinois College of Dentistry Professor Implant Seminar 2004 Present
Adjunct
LSU Dental Faculty Department of Oral Surgery 2013 Present
\
Students (Year)
University of Illinois Implant Seminar Grad Perio Didactic Clinic/Laboratory

Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)
Advocate Lutheran Gen Hospital (Department of Surgery) Park Ridge IL 1982 Present

(Year) (Year)
Alan Rosefeld, Phillip Tardies Art of Computer Guided Implantology Quintessence TextBold 2009
Alan Rosenfeld Implant Site Development Chapter 2 Woley-Blawwell 2012
MultiCenter Clincal Study on Accuracy

Alan Rosenfeld, Tiziano Testool Italan Oral Surgery 2012
of Guided
Alan Rosenfeld, George Manelarus Classification System for Surgery System IJPRD 2013
Alan Rosenfeld, George Manelarus Crestal Gradicular Denta; Vexlar IJPRD 2013
Alan Rosenfeld, Jefery Ganeles Image Guidance For Implants Inide Dentistry 2013
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Michael L. Schmerman, DDS
Current Institution: University of Illinois College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
History/
University of Colorado Boulder, Colorado 1971 Bachelor of Arts Biology,Chemistry
Northwestern University Dental School 1975 Doctor of Dental Surgery

General Practice
Michael Reese Hospital 1976 Residency
Universsity of Kentucky College of Dentistry 1978 Certificate in Periodontics
LICENSURE
Illinois, Wisconsin IL-1976, WI-1978 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Illinois State Board Periodontics 1978

Asst.
Clinical
UIC College of Dentistry Chicago, IL Prof. Pre & Post Doctoral Periodontics 2001 Present
Loyola University Maywood, IL Lecturer Non-Surgical & Surgical Periodontics 2003 Present
Asst. Pre & Post Doctoral

Clinical Periodontics,Current Literature
Northwestern University Dental School Prof. Review,Treatment Planning Seminars 1978 1987
\
Students (Year)
UIC College of Dentistry Chicago, DOST 331-SGL 3rd Year Pre Doctoral Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
IL
Appendix I
UIC College of Dentistry Ortho-Perio Lectures 2nd Year Pre Doctoral
UIC College Dentistry Ortho-Perio Lectures 2nd Year-Post Doctoral-

Ortho & Perio Residents
UIC College of Dentistry Clinical Supervision Pre-Doctoral Students 11/2 days/week
UIC College of Dentistry Clinical Supervision Post-Doctoral Students 1day/week
Loyola University Hospital Periodontics & Post-Doctoral 12 36

Maywood, IL Implants for General
Practice Residents
Illinois Masonic Hospoital Periodontics & Post-Doctoral 12 36+

Chicago, IL Implants for General
Practice Residents

From To
(Year) (Year)
Illinois Masonic Hospital Chicago IL 2003 Present
Loyola University Hospital Maywood IL 2003 Present
Weiss Memorial Hospital Chicao IL 1980 2012
Medical College of Wisconsin Milwaukee WI 1990 2003
Northwestern Memorial Hospital Chicago IL 1979 1987

(Year) (Year)
American Dental Association 1978 Present
Illinois State Dental Society 1978 Present
Chicago Dental Society 1978 Present
American Academy of Periodontology 1978 Present
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: John Vickery

Current
Institution: University of Illinois College of Dentistry

Yr of
Grad.
Southern ILL University 1983 B.A. Microbiology
U of Ill College of Dentistry 1985 BS Dentistry
U of Ill College of Dentistry 1987 DDS Dentistry
U of Ill College of Dentistry 1990 Certificate Periodontics
LICENSURE
Dental/Specialty Perio 1987 Present
BOARD CERTIFICATION
NeDB Gen Dentistry 1987
NERB Perio 1990

Teaching
U of Ill College of Dentistry Assistant Clinical Teaching Assistant 1987 1990
Assistant
Clinical
U of Ill College of Dentistry Professor Supervising P.G. Resident 1990 Present
\
Students (Year)
U of Ill College of Dentistry Clinical P.G. Perio Didactic Clinic/Laboratory
Appendix I
From To
(Year) (Year)

(Year) (Year)
Northsub Brand
Chicago Dental Society Prescelent Elect. 2013 2014
ILL State Dental Society Delegate 2010 Present
Appendix I
BioSketch
Print or Type Only
Name: Keiko Watanabe

Current
Institution
: University of Illinois at Chicago

Yr of
Grad.
University of Southern California, Los Angeles 1976 BS. Biological Science
University of Southern California 1983 DDS Dentistry

University of Illinois at Chicago, College of
Dentistry 1986 Certificate Periodontics
University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Biological
Medicine, Department of Biochemistry 1987 M.S. Chemistry
University of Illinois at Chicago
College of Medicine Molecular Genetics
Department of Molecular Genetics 2000 PhD
LICENSURE
California State License, Northeast Regional Board License, 1983, 1986, 1986 Present
Illinois Specialty License in Periodontics
BOARD CERTIFICATION
Diplomate, American Board of Periodontology Periodontics 1993

Director of
Post-
Graduate Master’s thesis research and
University of Illinois at Chicago Research periodontics Research 2007 Present
Associate
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor Periodontics clinic 1986 2013
Associate Junior and Senior Dental
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor Students Clinic 1993 2013
Associate
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor D2-D4 Clinic 1993 2013
Appendix I
Associate
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor PG Classic Literature 2009 2012
Associate Department of Pediatric
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor Dentistry PG Program 1997 2009
Associate
University of Illinois at Chicago Professor Dental Hygiene Class 1996 2009
University of Illinois at Chicago Senior Periodontal Surgery 1986 1988

Associate
Professor, Sophomore Periodontics Spring Spring
University of Illinois at Chicago Director Laboratory 1993 1996
Associate
Professor,
Co- Spring Spring
University of Illinois at Chicago director Sophomore Periodontics 1993 1995

Name of Institution, City, Course Title Discipline and Level Total Contact Hours Per Year
State of Students (Year)
Didactic Clinic/Laborato
ry
University of Illinois at Program Lecturer Periodontic Post
Chicago Graduate Program
University of Illinois at Peri 351, 352, D3 and D4
Chicago 353, 361, 362, periodontics clinic,
363 Summer, Fall and
Spring semesters
University of Illinois at OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis
Chicago Research
University of Illinois at Peri 698 Periodontics
Chicago Research

From To
(Year) (Year)
Consultant/attending in Periodontal surgery on 2007 2010
children in UIC Hospital
MEMBERSHIP, OFFICES OR APPOINTMENTS HELD IN LOCAL, STATE OR NATIONAL DENTAL OR

ALLIED DENTAL ORGANIZATIONS, INCLUDING APPOINTMENTS TO STATE BOARDS OF
DENTISTRY AND CODA
Appendix I
(Year) (Year)
University of Chicago University of Chicago Diabetes 2010 present

Research and Training Center (DRTC)
American Diabetes Association member 2005 present
American Board of Periodontology member 1993 present
American Academy of Periodontology member 1993 present

American Dental Association member 1986 present
Chicago Dental Society member 1986 present
International Association for Dental member 1985 present

Research
American Association for Dental Research member 1985 present
Illinois State Dental Society member 1986 present
PUBLISHED WORKS (For the most recent five years, list articles in which you were the principal author that
appeared in refereed journals or text books, by author(s), title, publication, and date)
Effects of low dose Doxycyline
and Bisphosponate clodronate on
Özdemir SP, Kurtiş B, Tüter J Periodontol 83(9):1172-
gingival levels of matrix
G, Bozkurt S, Gultekiin SE, 1182, 2012.
metalloproteinases-9, interleukin- 2012
Sengüven B, Watanabe K,
1β and alveolar one loss in
Aydın S.
diabetic rats. A histological and
Immunohistochemical study.
Periodontitis in diabetics: Is Disease-A-Month
Watanabe K*. collaboration between physicians 2011
and dentists needed? 57(4):206-213, 2011
The effectiveness of Oraqix Angle Orthodontist 81(5):754

Kwong TS, Kusnoto B, Viana versus TAC (a) for placement of 759, 2011. 2011
G, Evans CA, Watanabe K. orthodontic temporary anchorage
devices.
Watanabe, K*., Iizuka, T.,
Involvement of Toll-like receptor J Periodontal Res 46: 21-
Adeleki, A., Pham, L.,
4 in alveolar bone loss and 30, 2011
Shlimon, A.E., Yasin, M., 2011
glucose homeostasis in
Horvath, P., and Unterman,
experimental periodontitis.
T.G.
Watanabe, K*, Petro, B.J., Effect of periodontitis on insulin J Periodontol 79(7): 1208-
Shlimon, A.E., and Unterman, resistance and the onset of Type 1216, 2008. 2008
T.G 2 Diabetes Mellitus in ZDF rats.
Appendix I
Appendix J
Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday
AM Dr. Greenberg Dr. Gaston Dr. Greenberg Dr. Kawar Dr. Gluck
Dr. Gaston Dr. Khan Dr. Khan Dr. Abdullah Dr. Reddy
Dr. Reddy Dr. Gaston Dr. Vickery Dr. Schmerman#
Dr. Schmerman^
PM Dr. Greenberg Dr. Gaston Dr. Greenberg Dr. Kawar Dr. Schmerman
Dr. Gaston Dr. Khan Dr. Khan Dr. Schmerman Dr. Reddy
Dr. Reddy Dr. Freeman Dr. Schmerman Dr. Katona
REPRESENTATIVE WEEKLY SCHEDULE OF MONTHLY FACULTY COVERAGE
^ Available every other Wednesday a.m. # Not Available the first and last Friday of each month a.m.
Confirmed Dates for P/T faculty
Dr. Di Franco TBD
Dr. Maggio Aug 22, Sep 5, 26 Oct 3, 24 Nov 14 Dec 12, 19
Dr. Anasinski July 9, 23 Aug., 6, 13 Sept., 10, 24 Oct., 1, 29 Nov., 5,

19 Dec., 10
Appendix J
Appendix K
Annual Resident Evaluation of Faculty, the program, and courses directed by

periodontal faculty (on line, objective questions on a 1-4 0r 1-5 scale, open ended
questions allow for written responses)
PG Periodontics Survey
Course Information
Course Name: PERI611 – Classic Periodontal Literature Review
Department: Periodontics
Instructor: Dr. Nadia Kawar/ Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy/ Dr. Salvador Nares
Please click on the appropriate response below. Choose ‘N/A’ if a question does not apply to the
course being evaluated.
Lecture Course Evaluation
These questions refer only to the lecture portion of this course. You will be able to evaluate
individual faculty and the lab, clinic, and/or discussion group sessions separately, below.
1) I gained a good understanding of course concepts and principles.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
Not Applicable/Don’t Know
1 Appendix K
2) Sufficient resources (such as textbooks, handouts, examples, and audio-visual materials) were
available.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
3) The course policies and requirements (grading, assignments, attendance, etc.) were clear.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) These resources contributed positively to my learning.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
5) The course integrated basic science and clinical concepts effectively.
2 Appendix K
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
6) I was able to get personal help in this course if I needed it.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) The evaluation process (quizzes, exams, papers, etc.) was fair and appropriate, and adequately
measured my mastery of the course content.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
8) The quizzes and/or examinations reflected what was taught in the course.
3 Appendix K
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
9) The grading system and procedures were clearly explained.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
10) The coverage of each topic in this course was appropriate.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
11) The amount of work required for this course was reasonable.
Strongly Disagree
4 Appendix K
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
12) The instructional methods used (e.g., lectures, peer group discussions, problems to solve,
question/answer opportunities, reviews) contributed positively to my learning.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
13) Overall, how do you rate this course?
Very Poor
Poor
Fair
Good
Excellent
14) The course content was well integrated and coordinated with material from other courses (both
basic science and clinical) that I am now taking or have taken previously.
Strongly Disagree
5 Appendix K
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
15) What were the most positive aspects of this course?
16) What changes, if any, do you recommend to improve this course?

6 Appendix K
Lecturer Evaluation
Gajendrareddy, Praveen
1) This lecturer explained course material clearly.
7 Appendix K
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
2) This lecturer was well prepared.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
3) This teaching aids (handouts, problems, review notes, etc.) used by this lecturer were helpful.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) What were the most positive aspects of this lecturer’s teaching?
8 Appendix K
5) Overall, how do you rate this instructor?
1=Poor
5=Excellent
9 Appendix K
6) This instructor was knowledgeable, as indicated by relating concepts in the field to clinical dentistry,
discussing current developments, and answering questions.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) What changes, if any, do you recommend for improving this lecturer’s teaching?
Course Information
Course Name: PERI620 – Periodontics Clinic
Instructors: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy
Clinic Course Evaluation
1) This course improved my understanding of concepts and principles in the discipline.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
10 Appendix K
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
2) This course improved my clinical skills in this discipline.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
3) I am competent to perform clinical procedures that I learned in this discipline.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) I was exposed to current state-of-the-art concepts and techniques in this discipline.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
11 Appendix K
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
5) Clinical materials were readily available to perform the procedures required in this discipline.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
6) Instruments were readily available to perform procedures.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) There was an adequate supply of patients to complete procedures.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
12 Appendix K
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
8) There was sufficient faculty coverage to complete procedures in a timely manner.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
9) What were the most positive aspects of this clinical course?
13 Appendix K
10) What changes would you recommend to improve the teaching of this clinical discipline?
Course Information
Course Name: PERI620 – Periodontics Clinic
Instructors: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy
14 Appendix K
Clinic Instructor Evaluation

Abdullah, Bruce
1) Was routinely present and on time for clinic sessions
Strongly Disagree Disagree Agree Strongly Agree
2) Was well-prepared for each session.
3) Equitably distributed time among members of my group.
4) Skillfully utilized criteria to evaluate and provide accurate feedback on my work.
5) Effectively taught thinking skills (for example, by clearly conveying the differences between
acceptable and unacceptable products).
6) Effectively taught thinking skills (for example, by asking hypothetical questions, asking me to
make predictions, solve problems, or provide explanations).
7) Effectively taught motor skills (for example, by assisting in the use of instruments, giving
demonstrations, observing me as I worked, suggesting changes to improve performance).
8) Exemplified behaviors reflecting high professional values (for example, service ideal, concern for
15 Appendix K
patient, interest in continuing education).
9) Treated me with respect.
10) Overall, I learned a great deal from this instructor.
11) Overall, what were the most positive aspects of this instructor’s teaching?
16 Appendix K
12) What changes, if any, could you recommend to improve this instructor’s teaching?
Course Information
Course Name: PERI630 – Periodontal Treatment Planning Seminar
Instructors: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy; Dr. Daniel Greenberg
17 Appendix K
Lecture Course Evaluation
These questions refer only to the lecture portion of this course. You will be able to evaluate
individual faculty and the lab, clinic, and/or discussion group sessions separately, below.
1) I gained a good understanding of course concepts and principles.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
2) Sufficient resources (such as textbooks, handouts, examples, and audio-visual materials) were
available.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
18 Appendix K
3) The course policies and requirements (grading, assignments, attendance, etc.) were clear.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) These resources contributed positively to my learning.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
5) The course integrated basic science and clinical concepts effectively.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
6) I was able to get personal help in this course if I needed it.
19 Appendix K
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) The evaluation process (quizzes, exams, papers, etc.) was fair and appropriate, and adequately
measured my mastery of the course content.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
8) The quizzes and/or examinations reflected what was taught in the course.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
9) The grading system and procedures were clearly explained.
Strongly Disagree
20 Appendix K
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
10) The coverage of each topic in this course was appropriate.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
11) The amount of work required for this course was reasonable.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
12) The instructional methods used (e.g., lectures, peer group discussions, problems to solve,
question/answer opportunities, reviews) contributed positively to my learning.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
21 Appendix K
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
13) Overall, how do you rate this course?
Very Poor
Poor
Fair
Good
Excellent
14) The course content was well-integrated and coordinated with material from other courses (both
basic science and clinical) that I am now taking or have taken previously.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
15) What were the most positive aspects of this course?
22 Appendix K
16) What changes, if any, do you recommend to improve this course?
Course Information
Course Name: PERI630 – Periodontal Treatment Planning/Treatment Seminar
Instructors: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy; Dr. Daniel Greenberg
23 Appendix K
Lecturer Evaluation
Greenberg, Daniel A
1) This lecturer explained course material clearly.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
2) This lecturer was well prepared.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
3) This teaching aids (handouts, problems, review notes, etc.) used by this lecturer were helpful.
Strongly Disagree
24 Appendix K
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) What were the most positive aspects of this lecturer’s teaching?
25 Appendix K
5) Overall, how do you rate this instructor?
1=Poor
5=Excellent
6) This instructor was knowledgeable, as indicated by relating concepts in the field to clinical dentistry,
discussing current developments, and answering questions.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Undecided
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) What changes, if any, do you recommend for improving this lecturer’s teaching?
PG Periodontics Survey University of Illinois at Chicago

PG Program Evaluation
1) The program’s objectives were clearly explained.
26 Appendix K
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
2) All program requirements (exams, projects, requirements, clinic) were adequately explained at the
beginning of the program.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
3) There was no unnecessary duplication of material in the program.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
4) Exams reflected important aspects of the program.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
27 Appendix K
Agree
Strongly Agree
5) I was treated with respect by program instructors.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
6) The amount of work required was appropriate.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
7) Appropriate emphasis was placed on important topics.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
28 Appendix K
8) The program director set high but reasonable standards for students.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
9) Clinical faculty was readily available when I needed help.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
10) I would like to be more closely supervised in clinic.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
11) Clinical equipment and materials were adequate.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
29 Appendix K
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
12) Clinical administrative procedures helped me complete patient care promptly.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
13) An adequate patient pool contributed to my prompt completion of patient care.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
14) Orientation to the clinic and clinical administrative procedures were adequate.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
30 Appendix K
15) Clinic staff was very helpful and cooperative.
Strongly Disagree
Disagree
Neutral
Agree
Strongly Agree
16) How can the program director improve the program?
17) Which aspects of the program did you like the best?
18) Which aspects of the program did you like least?
19) What changes would you make in the program?
20) Which aspects of the program were most valuable?
21) Which aspects of the program were least valuable?
31 Appendix K
Alumni Questionnaire:
Post-Graduate Periodontics
Alumni Survey
Completing this survey will provide valuable information for improving the advanced programs. Thank
you!
Circle one answer code for each item. Some items ask you to write a brief response. For these items, use specific,
concrete language when possible. Feel free to use the other side of the sheet for additional space. When finished,
please send the form in the enclosed envelope. To maintain confidentiality you need not identify yourself on the
form or the envelope.
1. Overall, how would you rate your educational experience at the University of Illinois at
Chicago College of Dentistry?
Very 1
Poor
Poor 2
Good 3
Very 4
Good
2. Please indicate how well your dental education prepared you in the basic sciences
portion of your program:
Not at All Very
Prepared Prepar
ed
1 2 3 4 5
3. Do you have any comments regarding the basic sciences curriculum? You may be as
specific as you like. Use the back of this page if necessary.
4. Please indicate how well your dental education has prepared you in the following
behavioral sciences:
Not at All Very
Prepared Prepar
ed
a. Interpersonal communication skills 1 2 3 4 5
b. Ethics 1 2 3 4 5
c. Practice management 1 2 3 4 5
d. Overall, behavioral sciences 1 2 3 4 5
5. Do you have any comments regarding the behavioral science aspects of your program?
You may be as specific as you like. Use the back of the page if necessary.
32 Appendix K
6. Please indicate how well your dental education has prepared you in the clinical
sciences portion of your program:
Not at all Very
prepared prepar
ed
1 2 3 4 5
7. Do you have any comments regarding the clinical sciences curriculum? You may be as
specific as you like. Use the back of the page if necessary.
8. How were the basic, behavioral, and clinical sciences integrated in your program?
Very 1
Poorly
Poorly 2
Well 3
Very 4
Well
9. Please evaluate the following statements regarding your educational experience at the
College of Dentistry:
Strongly Strong
Disagree ly
Agree
a. Overall, I think I am proficient for the type of 1 2 3 4 5
dental practice for which I was trained.
b. I received appropriate and meaningful feedback 1 2 3 4 5
regarding my performance in the clinical program.
c. I received adequate opportunity for exposure to 1 2 3 4 5
research.
10. What was the best feature of your dental education at the University of Illinois at
11. What was the worst feature of your dental education at the University of Illinois at
12. Do you think as a result of you training in the program you are competent to continue
life-long learning to improve your knowledge and skills?
Yes 1
33 Appendix K
No 2
13. Are you a Diplomate of the American Board of Periodontology?

Yes 1
No 2
14. Is your dental practice limited to Periodontics and Dental Implants?

Yes 1
No 2
15. Please indicate how you expect to be employed six months from now.
Owner of Private Practice 1
Associate in Private Practice 2
Managed Care Employee 3
Military 4
Non-dental employment 5
Other 6
16. Completion of the UIC Post-Graduate Periodontics Program prepared me to take

the
Written and Oral exam given by the American Board of Periodontology
Not at All Very
Prepared Prepar
ed
1 2 3 4 5
Thank you for your time!
34 Appendix K
STANDARD 3 – FACILITIES AND RESOURCES
Appendix L
Exhibit 4
FACILITIES AND RESOURCES
Facilities, Capabilities/Equipment Within Clinic Readily Accessible Not Available
Intraoral radiographic facilities X
Extraoral radiographic facilities X
Dental laboratory facilities X
Operatories X
Staff offices X
Study areas X
Conference rooms X
Dental recovery area X
Sterilization capabilities:
Autoclave X
Ethylene oxide X
Dry heat X
Emergency drugs X
Emergency equipment: X
Oxygen under pressure
Suction X
Resuscitative equipment* X
*Each patient is expected to recover in the surgical operatory under the supervision of the
Resident/ Faculty prior to dismissal. As part of the requirement for providing conscious
sedation, a crash cart with an EKG/defibrillator and all necessary drugs and resuscitative
equipment is present in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. In addition, each floor of
the College has an AED and positive pressure oxygen available. The Emergency Team
in the College of Dentistry is prepared to respond quickly to emergencies. Additionally,
the UIC Hospital EMS provides support personnel. Further, the UIC Hospital Emergency
Room is located in close proximity to the College of Dentistry, across the street from it.
Appendix L
Appendix M
Exhibit 5
Information on Support Staff
Support Ms. Maria Ms. Rebeca Ms. Ms. Ms. Mr.

Staff for Guzman Abarca Sierra Fatima Stepahnie Ernesto
Advanced Fields Hernandez Quevedo Barrera
Specialty
Education
Customer Customer
6 Service Service C.D.A C.D.A C.D.A C.D.A
Representative Representative
Total #
Hours/
Week 40 40 40 40 40 40
240
Dental Ms. Petra

Hygienist Skrickova
1
Total #
Hours/
Week 16 8
24
Secretarial/ Ms. Colleen

Clerical Glascott
1
Total #
Hours/
Week 40 40
A copy of the institution’s infection and hazard control protocol available for inspection
on site.
Appendix M
STANDARD 4 – CURRICULUM AND PROGRAM DURATION
Appendix N
Exhibit 6
Students’ Total Program Time
Indicate the percentage of the students’ total program time devoted to:
Didactics ___20_____%
Clinical activities ___65_____%
Research activities ___10_____%
Teaching ____5_____%
Other (specify) ____0______%
Total __100____= 100%
Appendix N
Appendix O
PG PERIODONTICS COURSE SCHEDULE (REPRESENTATIVE- CLASS OF
2016)
Periodontics Certificate Courses MS in Oral Sciences Courses
CRN COURSE TITLE Cr CRN COURSE TITLE Cr
PGY1 – FALL 2013
20623 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 31467 OSCI 580 Adv. Oral Sciences I/II 2
20624 PERI 613 Current Periodontal Lit. Review 1 36716 OSCI 441 Biostats. (Oral Sci) 3
20625 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 15827 OSCI 451 Research Methodology 1
20626 PERI 630 Perio. Treatment Planning 1
Seminar
20637 PROS 628 Comp. Dental Implant Lit. 2
Review
20634 PROS 613 Perio-Pros Seminars 1
20629 PERI 698 Periodontic Research 1
Total Credits 21 Total Credits 6
PGY1 – SPRING 2014
20721 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 35040/35044 OSCI 531 Peer-Reviewed 3
Publication
20722 PERI 613 Current Periodontal Lit. Review 1 17756/17757 ANAT 544 Adv. Craniofacial 3
Anatomy
20723 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 16751 OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis 1*
Research
20724 PERI 630 Perio. Treatment Planning 1 OR PERI 698
Seminar (with K. Watanabe)
20690 OMDS615 Anesthesia and Pain Control 1
18011 ORTD 667 Orthodontic Perio. 2
Relationships
28388 PROS 613 Perio-Pros Seminars. 1
Review
26967 PERI 698 Periodontic Research OR OSCI 1*
598
Total Credits 23/24 Total Credits 6/7
PGY2 – SUMMER 2014
16156 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 16742 OSCI 583 Research Protocol 1
16221 OMDS Radiology for the Dental 1 Varies** OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis 1*
617 Specialist Research
15018 PERI 698 Periodontic Research OR OSCI 1* OR PERI 698
598
PGY2 – FALL 2014
20623 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 30376 OSCI 581 Adv. Oral Sciences I/II 2
20624 PERI 613 Current Periodontal Lit. Review 1 27200 OMDS Graduate Oral 2
503 Pathology
20625 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 Varies*** OSCI 594 Varies**** ***
20626 PERI 630 Perio Treatment Planning 1 Varies** OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis 1*
Seminar Research
20637 PROS 628 Comp. Dental Implant Lit. 2 OR PERI 698
Review
27875 OMDS Tempromandibular Disorders 1
623
1 Appendix O
598
Total Credits 21/22 Total Credits 6-7 / 7-8
20721 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 17577 HSTL 506 Adv. Oral Histology 2
20722 PERI 613 Current Periodontal Lit. Review 1 Varies** OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis 1*
20723 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 Research
OR PERI 698
20724 PERI 630 Perio Treatment Planning 1
Seminar
Review
598
PGY3 – SUMMER 2015
16156 PERI 620 Periodontics Clinic 12 16742 OSCI 583 Research Protocol 1
15018 PERI 698 Periodontic Research OR OSCI 1* Varies** OSCI 598 Master’s Thesis 1*
598 Research
OR PERI 698
*Select appropriate credit hours when registering

**Permission required (email your Department Business Manager if you encounter problems with OSCI 598 registration)
***CRN, Subject, and Credit Hours vary; please work with your advisor to make a selection
PGY3 – FALL 2015

20623 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 Varies*** Varies*** SELECTIVE** 2-3
OR PERI 698
Seminar
Review
598
Total Credits 20/21 Total Credits 2/4 or 3/4
20721 PERI 611 Classic Periodontal Lit. Review 3 Varies*** Varies*** SELECTIVE** 2-3
OR PERI 698
Seminar
2 Appendix O
Review
598
Total Credits 20/21 Total Credits 2/4 or 3/4
3 Appendix O
Exhibit 7
Sample Students’/Residents’ Schedules
Year 1-Summer of 2010

Introduction
Introduction to Introduction
Introduction to Introduction to to
Periodontal to Periodontal
Periodontal Periodontal Periodontal
Therapy and Therapy and
Therapy and Therapy and Therapy and
Biological Biological
Biological Basis of Biological Basis Biological
Basis of Basis of
Periodontics of Periodontics Basis of
Periodontics Periodontics
Periodontics
9:00-
12:30
Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic

Clinic
12:00
Lunch Lunch ‘n’ learn Lunch Lunch Lunch
-1:30
1:30-
Clinic. Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic
4:30
* Does not include 10% commitment to predoctoral teaching

# Does not include 5% commitment to research
4 Appendix O
Year 1-Fall of 2010
Omds 617/
Pros 613 7:30-
8:30
7:30- Peri 613Current
Omds 619/
9:00 Literature Seminar
Pros 628
Interdisciplina
ry Seminar
10:30-12:30
9:00- Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic Peri 611
12:00 Classic Lit.
Rev.
Peri 630
12:00 Tx. Planning in
Lunch ‘n’ Learn Lunch Lunch Lunch
-1:30 Perio
1:30-
4:30

5 Appendix O
Year 1-Spring of 2011
Implant Tx. Omds 617 7:30-
Peri Ortd 677 Adult
Planning with 8:30
7:30- 613Current Implant Lit. Orthodontics/Peri
Simplant-Dr. Omds 619
9:00 Literature Rev/Sem. o-Prosth
Alan Rosenfeld Interdisciplinary
Seminar Relationships
(once/month) Seminar
9:00- Peri 611

12:00 Classic Lit. Rev.
Peri 630 Oral

12:00- Lunch ‘n’
Tx. Planning in Pathology Lunch Lunch
1:30 Learn
Perio Seminar
1:30-
Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic
4:30
Omds 615 Peri 698 Anat 544

4:30- Anesthesia and Periodontic Adv. Craniofacial
7:30 Pain Control Research Anatomy

6 Appendix O
Year 1-Summer of 2011
9:00- Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic

Clinic
12:00
12:00
Lunch Lunch ‘n’ Learn Lunch Lunch Lunch
-1:30
1:30-
4:30
*all first year residents have a 5 week hospital anesthesia rotation in July & August. This is arranged for
each student
7 Appendix O
Year 2-Fall of 2011
Implant Tx.
Osur 619
Planning with
7:30- Peri 613Current Implant Lit. Implant Dx &
Simplant-Dr.
9:00 Literature Seminar Rev/Sem. Tx Planning
Alan Rosenfeld
Seminar
(once/month)
10:30-12:30
9:00- Clinic Clinic Clinic Clinic Peri 611
12:00 Classic Lit.
Rev.
Peri 630
Tx.
12:00
Planning/Thera Lunch ‘n’ Learn Lunch Lunch Lunch
-1:30
py Seminar
1:30-
4:30
Principles of Osci 580

5:00- Conscious Adv. Oral
8:00 Sedation/Medicine/ Sci. I/II
Pharm
8 Appendix O
Implant Tx. Osur 619
Peri
Planning with Pros 613 Perio- Impant Dx & Tx
7:30- 613Current
Simplant-Dr. Prosthetic planning
9:00 Literature
Alan Rosenfeld Seminar Seminar
Seminar
(once/month) I
9:00- Peri 611

12:00 Classic Lit. Rev.
Peri 630 Oral

12:00- Lunch ‘n’
Tx. Planning/ Pathology Lunch Lunch
1:30 Learn
Therpy Seminar Seminar
1:30-
4:30

9 Appendix O
Year 2- Summer of 2012

Clinic
12:00
12:00
-1:30
1:30-
4:30

10 Appendix O
Year 3- Fall of 2012
Implant Tx.
Pros 628 Comp Osur 619
Planning with
7:30- Peri 613Current Implant Care Implant Dx &
Simplant-Dr.
9:00 Literature Seminar Lit. Review Tx planning
Alan Rosenfeld
Seminar
(once/month)

Clinic
12:00
Peri 630
12:00 Tx. Planning in
Lunch ‘n’ Learn Lunch Lunch Lunch
-1:30 Perio
1:30-
4:30
Osci 580
5:00-
Adv. Oral
8:00
Sci.II
11 Appendix O
Behavioral
Implant Tx.
Peri Management/ Osur 619
Planning with
7:30- 613Current Patient Implant Dx &
Simplant-Dr.
9:00 Literature Management/ Tx Planning
Alan Rosenfeld
Seminar Ethics Seminar
(once/month)
Seminar
9:00-
12:00
Peri 630
12:00- Lunch ‘n’
Tx. Planning in Lunch Lunch Lunch
1:30 Learn
Perio
1:30-
4:30
4:30-
7:30
12 Appendix O
Year 3- Summer of 2013

Clinic
12:00
12:00
-1:30
1:30-
4:30

Students in special research tracks that are Postdoctoral fellows (i.e already hold a PhD in a basic
science) or students pursuing a PhD in addition to the Certificate in Periodontics complete the entire
requirement for the Certificate program. The programs are 4 and 6 years respectively. Postdoctoral
Fellows complete all the coursework with the same timing as Certificate or MS in Oral Sciences
Candidates. Their clinical activity is adjusted so that they have 3 days/week in the clinic the first year
and 2 days for years 2 – 4. The result is that the access to the clinic in half days is identical to that of the
Certificate and MS candidates. Similarly, the PhD candidates have 2 half days/week the clinic the first
year and 2 days/week in the clinic for years 2-6. The result is that the access to the clinic in half days
equals or exceeds that of the Certificate and MS candidates. The first year is focused on the didactic
course requirements of the PhD degree as well as 2 half days/week for a laboratory rotation experience.
The course requirements for the PhD degree will be completed in the AM Monday – Friday and depend
on the requirements of the Oral Sciences in the and the specific research project pursued by the student.
Didactic courses and Seminars that are part of the Postgraduate Program in Periodontics will be taken by
the PhD candidate during years 2-6
13 Appendix O
Appendix P
Biomedical Sciences
Exhibit 8
Are students required to take formal courses?

Yes
If YES, list the title of each course, year offered, number of credit hours and, if applicable,
name of affiliated institution providing the instruction.
Course Title Year Credit Where Given

Offered Hours
Osci 451Research Methodology 1 1 College of Dentistry
(COD)
Anat 544 Advanced Craniofacial 1 3 COD
Anatomy
Osci 580/581 Advanced Oral 1 or 2 2 each COD
Sciences I (fall) & II (spring)
Perio 698 Directed Research 1, 2, 3 4-8 credits COD
OMDS 623 Temporomandibular 2 1 COD
Disorders
OMDS 617 Radiology for the Dental 1,2,3 1
Specialist
Osci 441 Biostatistics 1 3 COD
Hstl 506 Immunology 2 2 COD
Omds 615 Anesthesia and Pain 1 1 COD
Control
Ortd 667 Orthodontic 1 2 COD
Perio. Relationships
Principles of conscious 1,2 3 COD
Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology
Peri 613 Current Literature Seminar 1,2,3 2/ year COD
Peri 611 Classic Periodontal 1,2, 3 6/ year COD
Literature Review
Peri 630 Periodontal Tx. 1,2,3 1/ year COD
Planning/Therapy Seminar
PROS 613 Perio-Pros 1,2,3 2/ year COD
Seminars
PROS 618-628 Comprehensive COD
Implant Considerations
Appendix P
Peri 698 DIRECTED RESEARCH
Course Director: Dr. Keiko Watanabe
Objectives:
1. To provide an experience in periodontal research that will provide the student with the
background in research necessary to critically evaluate published data in the literature and
participate in research projects in the future.
Schedule:
Arranged with the student’s research advisor and thesis/research committee
Evaluation:
Based on seminar participation with a Satisfactory/unsatisfactory effort as determined by the student’s

research advisor and the Director of Postgraduate Periodontics Research, Dr. Keiko Watanabe
For more details on Peri 698 please consult the Postgraduate Periodontics Program Manual found in
Appendix U.
Appendix Q
ADVANCED ORAL SCIENCES, I
(OSCI 580)
Fall
Dr. Xianghong Luan MD, MS Course Director

Office: Room 419 Dent, Orthodontics M/C 841
Fax : (312) 996-0873
e-mail : luan@uic.edu
Course Abstract
This course presents an in depth oral seminar series involving development, structure and clinical
application in the dental sciences. The course is dynamic and fluid and integrates basic science with
cutting-edge bench and clinical research.
Course Description
Interactive discussion follows presentation of faculty research. Topics include developmental and
molecular biology, tissue engineering, genetics and structural biology in conjunction with cutting –edge
dental technology.
Course Objectives
Students should:
Be familiar with basic concepts in oral sciences.

2 Gain proficiency in the biological basis of advanced dental sciences
3. Have advanced knowledge and understanding of the basic/clinical sciences
interface.
Evaluation Criterion
25% attendance and participation

75% final examination
Suggested Readings/Text
Schedule:
THE PERIODONTIUM
FALL 2013 ADVANCED ORAL SCIENCES
Advanced Oral Sciences: Clinical Implications of Oral Structures and Function. Graduate Course &
Lecture Series
[Advanced Oral Sciences 580 & CE Credit]. Thursdays 4.30-6pm, Room 230D. Course Director: Dr.
Xianghong Luan
Periodontal Disease, Development, and Regeneration
1 Periodontal Disease & Wound Healing Tom Diekwisch, UIC Brodie Sep 5
Appendix Q
2 Student Presentations I Perio Residents Sep 12
3 Antimicrobial peptides Sven-Ulrik Gorr, U Minnesota Sep 19 & periodontal bacteria
4 Student Presentations II Prostho Residents Sep 26
5 Periodontal Stem Cells & Regeneration Tom Diekwisch, UIC Brodie Oct 10
6 Student Presentations III Endo Residents Oct 17
Surface Topographies and Bone
7 Periodontal Cell Behavior on Douglas W. Hamilton, Schulich Oct 24
Surface Topographies Ontario, Canada
8 Student Presentations IV Pedo Residents Oct 31
9 Osteoblast-lineage Cells and NFkB in Dana Graves, UPenn Nov 7
Periodontal Disease
10 Primary Cilia in Skeletal Development L. Darryl Quarles, Memphis, TN Nov 14 and
Mechanosensing
11 Student Presentations V/ Review Ortho Residents Nov 21
12 Epigenetics and Dashzeveg Bayarsaihan, UConn Dec 5
Craniofacial Development
13 Student Presentations VI Ortho Residents and Ph.D. students
Examination Xianghong Luan, UIC Brodie Dec 12
Appendix Q
ADVANCED ORAL SCIENCES, II
(OSCI 581)
Dr. Xianghong Luan MD, MS Course Director

Office: Room 419 Dent, Orthodontics M/C 841
Fax : (312) 996-0873
e-mail : luan@uic.edu
Course Abstract
This course presents an indepth oral seminar series involving tissue regeneration, genetic aspects of oral
disease and craniofacial development. The course is dynamic and fluid and integrates basic science with
cutting-edge bench and clinical research.
Course Description
Interactive discussion follows presentation of faculty research. Continuation of

Osci 580. Topics include craniofacial tissue regeneration, genetic basis of disease and concepts in
clinical dental sciences.
Course Objectives
Students should:
1. Know about contemporary tissue engineering

2. Be familiar with advanced concepts in oral sciences.
3. Become familiar with the most up-to-date aspects of dental sciences
4. Have advanced knowledge and understanding of the basic/clinical sciences
interface.
Evaluation Criterion
25% attendance and participation

75% final examination
Suggested Readings/Text
Schedule:
CRANIOFACIAL DEVELOPMENT AND REGENERATION

FALL 2012 ADVANCED ORAL SCIENCES
Advanced Oral Sciences: Clinical Implications of Oral Structures and Function. Graduate Course &
Lecture Series
[Advanced Oral Sciences 581 & CE Credit]. Thursdays 4.30-6pm, Room 330D. Course Director: Dr.
Xianghong Luan
Craniofacial Development
Appendix Q
1 Introduction: Craniofacial Growth Tom Diekwisch, UIC Brodie Sep 6 and Development
2 Student Presentations I Ortho Students Sep 13
3 Signaling Pathways Regulating
Craniofacial Development David Clouthier, University of Colorado Denver Sep 20
Proteins in Enamel Development
4 Amelogenin – Thousand Faces Tom Diekwisch, UIC Brodie
of an Enamel Matrix Protein Sep 29
5 Student Presentations III Ph.D. Students/Others Oct 4
6 Ameloblastin – Enamel Protein or Vagabond King? Xianghong Luan, UIC Brodie Oct 11
Bone Regeneration
7 Biological Minerals as David Kohn, University of Michigan Oct 18
Templates for New Biomaterials
8 Student Presentations II Pros/Pedo Students Nov 1
9 Small Matrix Proteoglycans in Bone Regeneration Mitsuo Yamauchi, UNC Chapel Hill Nov 8
Enamel and Periodontal Tissue Engineering
10 Materials Design for Tom Diekwisch, UIC Brodie Nov 15 Periodontal Regeneration
11 Student Presentations IV/ Review Perio/Endo Students Nov 29
12 Enamel Tissue Engineering Masaki Honda, Nihon University Dec 6
13 Student Presentations V/ Examination Xianghong Luan, UIC Brodie Dec 13
Appendix Q
TEMPOROMANDIBULAR DISORDERS (OMDS 623)
Course Director: Charles S. Greene
Objectives: The purpose of this course is to introduce students to the anatomical, physiological,
pathological, and psychological basis for temporomandibular I disorders, as well as to discuss
differential diagnosis and treatment of TM disorders.
1. Anatomy of the TMJ: Describe normal and abnormal anatomy and function of the TMJ and
related structures.
2. Pathophysiology: Discuss modern concepts of pain pathophysiology.
3. Orofacial pain: Perform differential diagnosis of patients with orofacial pain.
4. Pain: Manage pain and dysfunction symptoms for TMD patients.
5. Referrals: Make appropriate referrals for complicated orofacial pain patients.
Schedule (Lectures)
Autumn 2013 - Thursdays 7:30 – 8:30 AM, Room 501

Lecture Schedule – TM Disorders Course (Postgraduate)
Course Director: C.S. Greene; Lecturer: A. Obrez
September 5 - TMJ Anatomy and Function - DISK Derangements Obrez

September 12 - Orientation Lecture – Changing Concepts in the TMD field Greene
September 19 - History and Examination Procedures Greene
September 26 - Neurophysiology of Pain – Acute vs Chronic Greene
October 3 - Etiology of TMDs – Impact on Treatment Greene
October 10 - TM Joint Disorders – Clinical Signs and Symptoms Obrez
October 17 - Masticatory Muscle Disorders – Clinical Signs and Symptoms Obrez
October 24 - Psychosocial Issues in TMD and Co-Morbid Conditions Greene
October 31 - Oral Appliance Therapy – Indications and Limitations Greene
November 7 - Screening Your Dental Patients for TMDs Greene
November 14 - Mandibular Repositioning – Theories & Cases Greene
November 21 - Clinical Management of TMD Patients – Simple vs Complex Greene
NOVEMBER 28 - THANKSGIVING
December 5 – Occlusion, the TMJ, and TM Disorders Obrez
December 12 or 19 – Final Exam
Appendix Q
SPRING SEMESTER (dates to be announced)
Treatment of TM Joint Disorders – Cases and Discussion Greene & Obrez
Treatment of Myogenous Problems – Cases and Discussion Greene & Obrez
Oral Surgery Lectures – Drs. R. Hussain and J. Jamali
Anesthesia/ Pain Management Lecture - Dr. N. Hussain
Physical Therapy for TMD Conditions Lecture – Dr. A. Duncombe
TEXTBOOK (Required): Greene, CS and Laskin, DM (Editors):

Treating TMDs – Bridging the Gap between Advances in Research and Clinical Patient
Management. Quintessence Publishing Co, 2013.
Format
This course will be presented in a lecture format. Each lecture will require assigned reading material.
Appendix Q
Radiology for the Dental Specialist: 2013
Course Status: APPROVED
Course: OMDS 621/617 Version: 1 Title: Radiology for the Specialist
Date Entered: 5/6/13
Course Director: Richard Monahan

Office: 563C
3-7925
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Course Rubric: OMDS/ Oral Medicine and Diagnostic Sciences

Primary Unit: 1965/ Oral Medicine and Diagnostic Science
Course Number: 621/617
Course Version: 1
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE TITLE: Radiology for the Specialist

____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE DESCRIPTION: (Limited to 250 characters or 25 words)
This course serves to supplement and expand the knowledge student’s gain in their pre-doctoral
curriculum. General principles of radiation physics, radiation biology, patient selection criteria, and
normal anatomy are presented in an overview format in order to reiterate the fundamentals of diagnostic
imaging. The radiographic characteristics of infection, cysts formation, neoplasms, reactive lesions,
systemic disease, trauma and developmental anomalies are presented in terms of selecting the proper
imaging modality and establishing a differential diagnosis. The advantages and disadvantages of
advanced diagnostic imaging systems, including digital radiology, CT/CBCT and MRI, will be
presented in light of their potential contribution in assisting the clinician in his/her ability to provide
optimal patient care at the level of a reasonably competent dental specialist.
NOTES TO STUDENTS:
PowerPoint handouts where appropriate. Specific references to slides and class notes will be available at
http://intranet/depts/radio/index.htm
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
ALIAS COURSE(S):
None
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
EXPECTED REGISTRATION:
Professional programs. (100%)
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Type of course:
Requirement for the following programs: certificate
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Relationship to other courses offered by primary unit:
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology presentations
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
The purpose of the course is to provide a clear understanding of diagnostic radiology as it relates to
clinical specialties within dentistry.
Appendix Q
1. This course expands the graduate student's appreciation of the integral part imaging plays in the
diagnosis and ultimate treatment of diseases that establish themselves in the oral and
maxillofacial region.
2. This course provides an excellent background for utilizing electromagnetic radiation as an

adjunct to establishing a differential diagnosis relative to the various clinical disciplines.
3. Successful completion of this course prepares the student for satisfactory performance as a
specialist.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________
MAJOR TOPICS:
1. Radiographic signs: Recognize the radiographic signs of infection, cysts, tumors, fibro-osseous lesions and
traumatic injury.
2. Metastatic lesions: Recognize the radiographic hallmarks of metastatic lesions and radiographic manifestations
of systemic diseases.
3. Computed tomography/cone-beam tomography: Understand the concept, application, benefits and limitations of
CT and CBCT
4. Magnetic resonance imaging: Understand the concept, application, benefits and limitations of MRI
5. Digital imaging: Understand the concept, application, benefits and limitations of

intraoral/panoramic/cephalometric digital imaging.
6. Advanced imaging studies: Appreciate the radiobiologic consequences associated with an advanced imaging
study.
7. Imaging modalities: Understand the clinical indications for selecting an advanced imaging modality in order to
solve a complex diagnostic problems.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
SAMPLE SOURCES AND RESOURCE MATERIALS: PowerPoint handouts where appropriate.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
EVALUATION CRITERIA FOR STUDENT PERFORMANCE: Final Examination
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
PREREQUISTE(S): Enrollment in a certificate program in the College of Dentistry/Medicine
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
RECOMMENDED BACKGROUND: DDS/DMD/Medical degree
CREDIT HOURS: 1
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
TYPE OF INSTRUCTION: Discussion
CONTACT HOURS: 7
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
FACULTY PROPOSER(S): Richard Monahan
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
RADIOLOGY FOR THE SPECIALIST

(OMDS 617)
Meets Monday, 7:30 am-8:30 am
Conference Room in The Department of Orthodontics
Appendix Q
June 10 Introduction & Pathology Review
June 17 Radiographic Interpretation: part 1.

Radiobiology, ALARA/ALRAP, recognize the radiographic
signs of infection, cysts
June 24 Radiographic Interpretation: part 2.

Recognize the radiographic signs of tumors, fibro-osseous lesions and
traumatic injury.
July 1 Computed tomography/Conebeam CT

concept, application, benefits and limitations. Software navigation and
interpretation.
July 8 Digital Imaging and Magnetic Resonance Imaging: concepts, application,

benefits and limitations
July 15 How to review a CBCT scan
July 22 Review: Q&A
FINAL EXAMINATION AS SCHEDULED
Any questions please contact me the course director: Rmonahan@uic.edu
Revised May 2013
Appendix Q
OSCI 441 Statistics for Oral Sciences
Instructors:
Christopher Engeland, PhD
Charles W. LeHew, PhD
Brad Johnson, DDS, MHPE
Grace Viana, MSc
Ellen BeGole, PhD
Judy Yuan, DDS, MS
College of Dentistry, University of Illinois at Chicago
Fall 2013 3 credits
Course Director:
Christopher Engeland, PhD, Assistant Professor, Department of Periodontics, College of Dentistry, UIC,
801 S. Paulina (MC 859), Chicago, IL 60612, Tel: 814 865-4694; engeland@uic.edu
The primary goal of this course is to introduce residents to a variety of techniques for analyzing quantitative
data and to provide hands-on experience in performing these analyses with statistical software. Residents
will gain a sense of the breadth of techniques available for understanding and exploring relationships in data.
This course will provide a statistical basing for future research questions and projects. Ultimately, we hope
this course will free residents from the tyranny of fear which seemingly surrounds quantitative data analysis
in research.  
Course Instructors (Contact Information):
Christopher Engeland (Perio), Tel: 814 865-4694; engeland@uic.edu
Charles W. LeHew (Pedo), Room 563B, Tel: 312 355-4479; lehew@uic.edu
Brad Johnson (Endo), Room 302A, Tel: 312 996-8519; bjohnson@uic.edu
Grace Viana (Ortho), Room 109B, Tel: 312 996-1810; gviana@uic.edu
Ellen BeGole (Ortho), Room 237A, Tel: 312 996-1812; ebegole@uic.edu
Judy Yuan (Pros), Room 351C, Tel: 312-355-4027; yuanjudy@uic.edu
Course objectives: Upon completion of this course residents will be able to:
1 Organize a data set and examine data for discrepancies and errors in entry.
2 Explore the relationships between variables in a data set and identify interesting patterns.
3 Select appropriate statistical methods for testing hypotheses in a set of data and perform the analyses.
4 Interpret and report the results of statistical analyses.
5 Recognize the limitations of quantitative data analysis.
While residents will cover a number of issues during the course, it is not expected that they will gain an in
depth view of all aspects of every issue that is raised. However, the residents will have a chance to begin to
structure their thinking around issues in data analysis, gain a set of skills that will allow them to ask new
research questions, and become more informed consumers of the research literature in their field.
Suggested Resources:
There is no required textbook for this course. However, for a more comprehensive understanding of the
statistical methods used we do recommend the following textbook:
David C. Howell, Statistical Methods for Psychology, Thomson Wadsworth, 2007.
This textbook can be purchased online (new) from amazon.com for $98 (free shipping included) and second
hand for ~ $61 plus shipping. It is not mandatory for the course but is a useful resource. Your individual
departments have been encouraged to purchase a copy – before purchasing please speak to your individual
course instructor(s). This book is a useful and practical guide to statistics.
In addition, Dr. Ellen BeGole has written an SPSS Manual which will serve as a valuable study aid for this
course. A copy will be made available on Blackboard. Both the textbook and manual are optional for this
Appendix Q
course and material will not appear on the final exam that has not been covered in online lectures and
assignments. Optional readings from these two books will be suggested throughout the course.
Software:
Computers in the 4th floor Commons Area (COD) have been equipped with Statistical Package for the
Social Sciences (SPSS) 20.0 for the purpose of this course. If you prefer to own a copy of SPSS, this
software can be purchased from the UIC Micro/Station (http://www.microstation.uic.edu) or ordered online
or from many computer stores. It might also be available through UIC's E-Sales website (we can only see the
software available to faculty/staff): http://www.uic.edu/depts/accc/home/SOFTWARE.html
Versions of SPSS older than SPSS 20.0 may not be compatible and are not acceptable for this course.
SPSS has become the standard windows-based statistical software package for most psychological and
educational applications. It is available in versions for MS Windows, Mac, and other operating systems. It
includes a large array of statistical procedures and provides a convenient windows-based interface. As
residents, you are eligible to purchase the "Graduate Pack" version, which comes with very little
documentation but is only ~$115 for the PC and Mac, and includes all the procedures you're likely to want
for a long time. Be sure that your version of SPSS includes a full version of SPSS Base (with no case or
variable limits), SPSS Advanced Models™, and SPSS Regression Models™, as you will need them for this
course.
Course Sites:
We will be using Blackboard for this course. This is available through the UIC home page quick links, and
there is also a link from the College of Dentistry home page.
The URL is http://blackboard.uic.edu. You login using your University NetID and login.
All course lectures will take place in Blackboard. The course datasets and documentation will also be posted
there, as will class-wide discussions and questions for instructors.
Schedule:
The course includes posted lectures (in PowerPoint), assigned readings, and hands-on analysis of data sets.
The lectures and assignments for each topic (along with the data sets) can be found by pressing the
"Assignments" tab in Blackboard.
The optional readings will provide additional information on topics covered in the lectures as well as help in
conducting analyses using SPSS.
Assignments:
Residents will be grouped into pairs. For assignments, each pair will post their results on Blackboard. In
addition, residents will individually comment on the postings of 2 pairs each week who have been selected as
Presenters. Thus, online discussion is required about posted assignments and will comprise 20% of the grade
for each assignment. As with many things, the more you put into this course the more you will get out of it.
This discussion should take place between Tuesday (5 pm) and Fri (5 pm), after which we will provide
feedback on the assignments posted by that week’s Presenters, the other submitted assignments, and the
ensuing online discussion.
Although each assignment will be graded, we will not be able to formally review each individual assignment.
Rather, a general review of all the assignments will be posted. Each assignment is worth 8/10 marks.
The remaining 2/10 marks will be determined by the discussion, and this will be scored on an individual
basis. We strongly recommend commenting on the posting pair’s assignment before reading other people’s
points of discussion. You may also wish to comment on your experience in completing the assignment (e.g.,
things you had trouble with, things you liked/disliked, points of confusion).
Please take note of past residents’ experiences. Those who participated fully gained self-confidence in
quantitative analysis, while the few who remained silent got little out of the course. If you do not ask any
questions, we will presume that means you understand the topic fully. However, if it means that you feel so
confused that you don’t even know what to ask, we urge you to tell us, even if you can’t articulate the
specifics. The units build on one another, so it is vital that you stay up-to-date. To facilitate this, you will
generally be given two weeks for each topic. Importantly, we want you to get the most out of this
experience!
Appendix Q
The final assignment is an exam that allows you to put into practice many of the techniques you learned in
the course. The exam will be “open book” at a computer and will be completed individually.
A note about expectations concerning on-line interactions and feedback:
The faculty will prepare assignments for the residents and will monitor the on-line discussions about the
presentation. The faculty will not participate directly in the on-line “Questions for Each Other.” If we did, it
would inhibit the resident learning process. Residents are expected to learn from each other and their
colleagues’ expertise. However, faculty will read and respond to any questions posted in the “Queries to
Instructor” forum once every weekday. The faculty will also provide comprehensive end-of-topic
comments about presented assignments. The comments should be sufficient to provide adequate feedback to
residents. There will be no weekly individual feedback. This is an unrealistic expectation because of the
amount of time it would require from faculty. The on-line learning in this course is different from classroom
teaching. In the current asynchronous on-line mode, learning relies more on individual effort and group work
compared to the spontaneous interactions among/between faculty and residents in the classroom. One
advantage of the on-line format is that written interactions can be more thoughtful than in the off-the-cuff
classroom interactions because the residents have more time to think through their ideas before presenting
them. The time requirements of this course are very flexible in this format as well. And don’t forget, faculty
will always be there to clarify.
Office Hours:
Instructors for each department will hold one office hour per week, during which they will be available for
one-on-one instruction and advice if needed. Specific times will be listed (by department) on the Blackboard
site. Alternate times to meet will be at the discretion of the instructor.
Grading:
The course grade depends on two factors:
1) Completion of assignments 70% (breakdown: 80% group assignment; 20% individual on-line
discussion)
2) Final exam 30%. Grading: A: 85-100 B: 75-84 C: 66-74
Note. To obtain a grade of A, a resident must score high in both components AND get a total score of 85 or
more. To pass the course, the resident must pass both the assignments and the final exam.
Course Overview by Week:

Week 1 Design of Research and Experiments
Week 2 Hypothesis Testing and Error
Weeks 3-4 Data Entry and Exploratory Data Analysis
Weeks 5-6 Categorical Data and Chi-Square
Weeks 7-8 Hypothesis Testing Applied to Means
Weeks 9-10 Non-Parametric Tests
Weeks 11-12 Repeated Measures
Weeks 13-14 Correlation and Regression
Week 15 Review (Individual assignment)
2013 Receive Assignment Comment Points Assignment

Assignment assignment due due Done By…
Schedule: (Friday) - (generally (Friday 5pm)
Week(s) 7am Tuesday) -
5pm
1 8/27 (Tues) 8/30 (Fri) NA NA Individual
2 8/30 9/6 (Fri) NA /5 Individual
3-4 9/6 9/17 9/20 /10 Pair
5-6 9/20 10/1 10/4 /10 Pair
Appendix Q
7-8 10/4 10/15 10/18 /10 Pair
9-10 10/18 10/29 11/1 /10 Pair
11-12 11/1 11/12 11/15 /10 Pair
13-14 11/15 11/26 11/29 /10 Pair
15 11/29 12/6 (Fri) NA /5 Individual
16 Final Exam Thu Dec 12
5-7pm
Appendix Q
OMDS 615 (2013)
Seminars in Anesthesia, Pain & Anxiety Control in Dentistry
Course Director: Z. Messieha, DDS
Goals:
Course Participants should have an understanding of the following.
1) Pre-anesthesia medical risk assessment.
2) Monitoring under anesthesia.
3) Different anesthetic regimens available including enteric, inhalation and parenteral routes.
4) Non-pharmacological management of anxiety.
5) Post-operative analgesia.
Format:
Seminars with possible literature reviews.
Evaluation:
Satisfactory/unsatisfactory based on participation in the seminars.
Absence policy:
Each participant is allowed to miss one seminar with previous arrangement with the course director.
Unexcused absence or exceeding the allowed time will constitute an unsatisfactory grade in the course.
Location and time:

Pediatric Dentistry conference room on second floor.
Dates and time will vary. Schedule will be given to the participants via e-mail ahead of time.
Additional References:
Sedation; S. Malamed 4th Edition.
Sedation in the Dental Office; Dionne, Phero & Beck
Basics of Anesthesia; Stoelting
Seminar handouts
OMDS 615 (2013)

Introduction to hypnosis Dr. Anne Koerber (TBA)
Pre-anesthesia evaluation Dr. Z. Messieha (ZM)
Introduction to Nitrous Oxide sedation ZM
Sedative hypnotics ZM
Narcotics ZM
Oral Sedation ZM
Monitoring in anesthesia ZM
Dynamics of office-based anesthesia guidelines for patient selection and regulatory issues ZM
Anesthesia emergencies ZM
Overview of analgesics ZM
Inhalation anesthetics ZM
Principles of Dental local anesthesia ZM
Anesthesia and sedation for the special needs patient ZM
Local Anesthesia ZM
Appendix Q
Principles of Conscious Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology
Course Director: Z. Messieha, DDS
Objectives:
1) Familiarize the participant with the most common systemic conditions in the general patient
population.
2) Explain some of the common oral and periodontal considerations associated with such
conditions.
3) Explain the common therapeutics associated with the medical conditions and their possible
impact on oral and periodontal management.
4) Place an emphasis on common medical conditions and their therapeutics as they relate to
conscious sedation.
Schedule:
1) Introduction to history and physical taking.

2) Common congenital heart defects.
3) Renal Disease.
4) Pulmonary Disease.
5) Coronary artery disease.
6) Acute Stroke.
7) Management of Diabetes.
8) Anticoagulation therapy.
9) 50 most Commonly prescribed medications in the US.
10) Antibiotic prophylaxis for heart valve and joint replacement.
11) Sickle Cell disease.
12) Thyroid disease.
13) Liver disease.
14) Emergency management in the Dental office.
Format:
1 hour seminars with occasional literature reviews.
Evaluation:
Based on seminar participation with a Satisfactory/unsatisfactory outcome.
Text:
Internal Medicine for Dentistry. Rose/ Kay 4th Edition
Washington Manual of Medical Therapeutics
Appendix Q
Perio 611: Periodontics
Course Director: Periodontics: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy

Credit Hours: 3 per semester Term: Fall / Spring 2012-13
Level: First and Second Year Periodontics Residents
Faculty Contact Information

Name Email Phone Office Hours & Location
Dr. Gajendrareddy Praveen@uic.edu 3-8405
And full time/ part-time
Periodontics faculty
Purpose of the Course:

1. To provide a sound knowledge base in the classic periodontal literature.
2. To prepare the student to defend treatment plans and decisions in the clinic with evidence from
the periodontal literature and to present and defend their own cases in formal Case Seminar
Presentations and Oral examinations.
College Competencies Addressed in this Course:
 Make clinical decisions on the basis of the best available classic clinical research
evidence, i.e. to provide “evidence-based patient care”;
 Diagnose disease/dysfunction, and plan appropriate patient care on the basis of
scientific evidence, the patient’s needs, and in the context of health promotion and
disease prevention;
 Function as an effective lifelong learner by actively reflecting on his/her patient
treatment outcomes in conjunction with evidence from classic periodontal
literature;
Course Organization:
Classes will meet once a week during the semester. It will be important to maintain a copy of the
schedule in order to insure attendance at all classes. Attendance is mandatory and a portion of the grade
is determined by punctual attendance and preparation for class participation. Attendance at all plenary
and literature review sessions is mandatory. An anticipated absence must be requested prior to the day of
absence and recorded. Presenting to class more than 30 minutes late is considered an unexcused
absence. Students with more than 2 unexcused absences may receive a failing grade for the course and
will be subject to remediation or repeating the course the following year, as determined by the course
instructor.
Recommended Text for Periodontal Lecture Component of Peri 611
Periodontal Literature Reviews and Position Papers: Published by the American Academy of
Periodontology
Appendix Q
Peri 611 Course Summary
The Peri 611 classic periodontal literature course involves classes that will meet once weekly to discuss
classic periodontal literature related to a specified topic. A faculty member will preside over each
session, coordinate, and lead the class. Class discussions will focus on classic periodontal literature
relevant to a given topic. One resident will be designated for each discussion topic to provide access to
the articles listed under the topic for all residents and faculty members attending the session. This
resident in charge, as recommended by the course director, or presiding faculty, will also implement any
changes to the article list. Class discussions will focus on linking relevant basic science concepts from
classic periodontal literature to the clinical management of patients and will include the evidence for
clinical decision-making.
Grading
Grade for the course will be based on attendance and class participation with a
satisfactory/unsatisfactory outcome and written examination at the end of the semester. The written
examination will consist of essay questions from the topics discussed through that semester. Under
exceptional circumstances the student may request not to take the final exam on the specified date.
Under such circumstances, in lieu of the written exam, the student may be asked to take an oral exam on
the topics discussed during the semester. The timing and nature of the alternate exam will be decided by
the course director in consultation with other faculty participating in the course.
Grade cut off points
Grading scale: A= 91-100, B=75-90, F= below 75

Receiving a satisfactory grade for class attendance/ participation and receiving a passing grade in the
written exam are required for successful completion of the course.
Course Policies
Cell phones and PDA’s are not permitted in the lecture hall when a written examination is in progress
(and should not be “on” during class). All book bags / backpacks must remain in the front of the lecture
hall during an examination. Violations of this policy will result in referral to the student disciplinary
committee.
Attendance at all plenary and clinic sessions is mandatory. An absence must be recorded in The Office
of Academic Affairs. Presenting to class or clinic more than 30 minutes late is considered an unexcused
absence. Students with more than 2 unexcused absences may receive a failing grade for the course and
will be subject to remediation or repeating the course, as determined by the Sub-committee on Student
Promotions
Dress Code and I-pods: MP3 players, radios and CD players are not permitted during class hours. Proper
attire is required.
General Policies
Appendix Q
Policy on Disability Accommodations
To obtain academic accommodations for this course, students with disabilities should contact the Office
of Disability Services and the course director within ten days of the beginning of the course. Disability
Services can be reached at (312) 413-2183 Voice or (312) 413-0123 TTY.
Remediation Policy
Students who earn a final grade of “F” will have one of the following recommended by the course
director: (1) repetition of the course, (2) reexamination and/or additional work, or (3) no remediation.
Religious Holidays
Every reasonable effort has been made not to schedule exams or classes on or during religious holidays.
Students who choose to observe religious holidays that conflict with scheduled classes or exams must
notify the course director within ten days of the start of the class. Students will not be penalized for
religious observances.
Academic Dishonesty
Students are expected to complete all exams on their own, using only the resources and methods allowed
by the course director. Instances of academic dishonesty will be addressed with consideration to the
seriousness of the violation and in accord with university disciplinary policies. Sanctions for academic
dishonesty may include a failing grade for the assignment or examination, a failing grade for the course,
and/or expulsion.
Course Evaluation
Students must evaluate all semester courses through the online CoursEval system. Students not
completing the evaluations will receive an “I” grade until the evaluations are complete. Course
evaluations will be available for student completion two weeks prior to the final exam. During finals
week the Office of Academic Affairs will provide course directors with a listing of the students who
have completed the course evaluations. Course Directors and Department Heads will have access to
course evaluations once final grades have been submitted.
Policy on Make-Up Examinations

It is recognized that in some instances during the academic year, circumstances may prevent a student
from taking an examination on the day it is assigned. As a result, a make-up policy has been established.
A student who is unable to take an examination due to unavoidable circumstances should:

• Contact the course director at 3-8405 prior to the time of the examination (except during
unexpected circumstances), to notify the College of your absence.
• Unexpected circumstances shall be defined as, but not limited to, hospitalization, serious car
accidents, and major illnesses etc.
• At the discretion of the course director, the student may make-up the examination at an
alternative pre-arranged time only when the student has validated that due to unavoidable
circumstances, he/she was prevented from attending the scheduled examination.
• Normally, it is expected that make-up exams be completed within 2 school days of the students
return to the College. The course director is responsible for facilitating and proctoring the
examination.
Appendix Q
• Make-up exams should cover the same content area of the missed examination but should not be
the same exam as give to other students. Course directors have the option to give oral, essay,
short answer or multiple-choice exam for the make-up. The timing and nature of the make-up
exam will be decided by the course director in consultation with other faculty participating in
the course.
PERIODONTICS CLASSIC LITERATURE SCHEDULE SPRING 2013
Topic Date Time Topic Lecturer Resident
1/11/13 10.30 AM- Epidemiology/ Oral Hygiene Dr. Reddy Kate

1
12.30 PM
2/6/13 9.00 AM- Plaque, Calculus Dr. Greenberg Andrew

2
11.00 AM
Occlusal Trauma Dr. Gaston

3 2/19/13
9.00 AM- Andy
12.30 PM
4 3/1/13 10.30 AM- Immunology Dr. Crawford

12.30 PM Panos
3/8/13 10.30 AM- Smoking Becky

5 12.30 PM Dr. Khan
9.00 AM- Diabetes Dr. Gaston Harrison

6 3/13/13
12.30 PM
9.00 AM- Genetics Chuck

7 3/27/13
12.30 PM Dr. Greenberg
8 10.30 AM- Anatomic Etiologic Factors Dr. Reddy Erica

4/12/13
12.30 PM
10.30 AM- Pregnancy/Oral Kate

12.30 PM Contraceptives, Nutrition Dr. Kawar
4/19/13
9
5/09/ 2013
WRITTEN EXAM
Appendix Q
Course Director: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy/ Dr. Daniel Greenberg
Objectives.
Students should demonstrate the ability to confidently present cases that have treatment planned or
treated and justify the rationale for such treatment with appropriate citations from the classic and
current periodontal literature.
Students should be prepared to take and pass the oral examination given by the American Board of
Periodontology.
Format:
Seminars format with presentation of cases treated in the postgraduate periodontics clinic. Students will
answer questions based on their presentation from both faculty and residents.
Evaluation:
Students are graded on their presentation according to the evaluation form attached below. The average
for presentations given during the semester will comprise 50% of the student’s grade. The remaining
50% will be derived form the student’s performance on the oral examination given at the end of the
semester. The Fall examination follows the current American Board of Periodontology oral
examination. The Spring examination follows the previous ABP oral examination format where the
student presents a treated case for 20 minutes followed by 70 minutes of questions from two faculty
members. In both oral examinations the exam is given by twice by two pairs of examiners and the grade
is the average of the for examiners’ assessments. The grading form for the oral examination is attached
below.
Absence policy:
All residents are required to attend each seminar unless away with an excused absence (excused by the
course director, illness, Hosp. rotation, etc.)
Location and time:

Monday at 12:30 PM, PG Periodontics clinic conference room.
Appendix Q
UIC Post Graduate Periodontics
EVALUATION OF RESIDENT CASE PRESENTATION
RESIDENT: ________________________________________DATE: ___________________________
POINTS: GRADE: FACULTY:_____________________
AAP CASE TYPE: ASA CASE TYPE:
During your presentation, you will be rated in the areas listed below. This rating will be used in
evaluating your performance in oral presentation skills and level of preparation.
STANDARDS: OUTSTANDING GOOD SATISFACTORY MARGINAL UNSATISFACTORY

5 4 3 2 1
1. CASE DOCUMENTATION: Appropriate summary of medical/dental history, charting (Probings, _____

BOP, mobility, furcations, mucogingival defects), radiographs (# and quality), mounted casts.
CASE ANALYSIS: (Rationale and accuracy) etiologies (primary and secondary), diagnosis, prognosis
(short- and long-term)
TREATMENT PLAN: Addressed patient cc, appropriate modalities selected, well sequenced, _____
alternatives discussed, multidisciplinary consults. Tx. Goals well identified.
POSTSURGICAL CARE AND MAINTENANCE PLAN: Plan appropriate _____
WRITTEN REPORT: Comprehensive, well organized written handout _____
PRESENTATION: Delivery, photographs _____
DEFENSE: General concepts, literature support _____
Appendix Q
Total Points (21 points, minimal passing) _____
COMMENTS: (Use reverse if necessary)
Appendix Q
UIC Post Graduate Periodontics
Oral Examination
RESIDENT: ________________________________________DATE: ___________________________
FACULTY: _____________________
STANDARDS: OUTSTANDING GOOD SATISFACTORY MARGINAL UNSATISFACTORY

5 4 3 2 1
1. Knowledge of Periodontal concepts _____
2. Rationale for treatment. _____
General Knowledge of the Literature _____
Ability to apply literature _____
Communication with examiners _____
Approach to answering questions _____
Appendix Q
Total points ________________ /6 = ____________
(18 point is the minimum passing)
COMMENTS: (Use reverse if necessary)
Appendix Q
Course: Orthodontic-Periodontic Relationships Course Coordinator: Handelman
(ORTD 667)
Semester: Spring 2013 Updated: December 13, 2012
Credit Hours: Two (2) Class: Second Year
Faculty: Greenberg, Handelman, Nedvetsky
Schmerman
Course Description:
This seminar series will focus on problems encountered in the diagnosis and treatment of
malocclusions in adults with emphasis on periodontal, prosthestics and implants needs. The
importance of a close interaction between the periodontist, prosthodontist, implant surgeons and
orthodontist for optimal patient care will be stressed.
The importance of periodontal disease and the potential for loss of periodontal support as the
result of orthodontic treatment (iatrogenic) will be emphasized.
Participant Assignments
Each participant will be responsible for writing two short critical reviews covering specific
sections of the reading list which will be assigned at the beginning of the course. Such
reviews should be typed and one copy should be made available to the faculty and one copy
to the other participants at the time of the seminars.
Students will be asked to make one case presentation of an adult whom they are treating that
would be of interest to the group.
All participants should read all references, however, at minimum, read those with an asterisk.
Each seminar will be led by the assigned faculty member and active participation in seminar
discussions is expected.
Course Objectives
The student has a thorough knowledge of:
1) Indications and contraindications of orthodontic treatment in periodontically

compromised dentitions.
2) Specific aspects of orthodontics treatment in periodontically compromised dentition.
3) Contribution of orthodontic treatment to the periodontal condition of patients.
4) Limitations of orthodontic treatment including iatrogenic damage.
5) Specific aspects of orthodontic treatment in combined orthodontics-restorative patient

care.
Revised December 13, 2012
Appendix Q
ORTD 667
Calendar for Course in Adult Orthodontics – 2013

“Orthodontic, Periodontal and Prosthetic Relationships”
Faculty: Chester S. Handelman, Orthodontist

Daniel Greenberg, Periodontist
Yana Nedvetsky, Restorative Dentistry, Implants
Mike Schmerman, Periodontist
Time: 8:00 a.m. – 10:00 a.m., Thursdays
January 3 What the orthodontist must know about periodontal disease. (CH)
January 10 Orthodontic treatment of the periodontally compromised patient. (CH)
January 17 Molar uprighting and intrusion and 2nd molar problems. (CH)
January 24 Periodontal surgery as an adjunct to orthodontic treatment. (MS) (Start at 8:30).
January 31 Treatment of periodontal disease. (DG) (Start at 8:30 a.m.)
February 7 Transverse malocclusion. Maxillary expansion in adults (CH)
February 14 The limitations of orthodontic treatment and iatrogenic consequences. (CH)
February 21 Transverse malocclusion. Maxillary and Mandibular expansion in adults. (CH)

*First literature review papers due.
February 28 Gingival recession. Tony Eltink * Student case presentation.
March 7 Research and Clinic Day. No Class
March 14 Crowding and spacing. Evaluation and treatment options. (CH)

*Student case presentations.
March 18 No Class (Break Week)
March 28 Orthodontic treatment to enhance prosthetic periodontal and implant treatment

(CH)
*Second literature review papers due.
April 4 Soft tissue consideration in natural dentition and implant supported prostheses
(YN)
April 11 No Class - Department Debate
Appendix Q
April 18 Biological requirements for implant dentistry (YN)
April 25 The borderline surgical case.

* Student case presentations.
May 2 Periodontally accelerated orthodontic treatment (CH)

May 9 Idiopathic Condylar Rescription (CH)

Appendix Q
ANAT_544: Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy
Course Director: Dr Thomas C. Lakars
Credit Hours: 3 hrs Term: Spring semester
Level: Dentist-graduate students of specialty departments of the College of Dentistry
Meets: Wed. – Lect./discussion 1:00-2:00 CoD; Lab: 2:00-5:00 Coll. Med. West
Dr Thomas C. Lakars, B.S., M.S., D.D.S., course director,
Assistant Professor, Dept of Oral Biology, Adjunct faculty in Dept Anatomy & Cell Biology Rm
410C in College of Dentistry Office: 312-996-6046 E-mail: tlakars@uic.edu
Course Abstract
The Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy course is planned for dentist-graduate students in the postgraduate
specialties of dentistry. Postgraduates have previously taken an introductory course in head-neck anatomy
to complete the requirements for a D.D.S. or D.M.D. degree and therefore this course can begin at an
advanced level. In this course the mechanisms of the several craniofacial systems will be studied and the
functions of regional structures will be emphasized. Readings from research literature about the
components of the craniofacial systems -- the Oral Apparatus in particular -- will be analyzed to augment
the laboratory dissections during the course. The research reports are selected to provide insight into the
biomechanics of the Oral Apparatus.
Graduate Course Description
544 Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy 3 hours. Functional and clinical aspects of head and neck
anatomy, based on detailed laboratory dissection, original readings, and project work. Prerequisite(s):
Any human gross anatomy course or the equivalent.
Course Objectives
Dentist-students bring their “new eyes” from clinical experiences to this voyage of discovery and
adventure in which they will:
1- Study and dissect in detail the head & neck, focusing on the biomechanics of the Oral Apparatus and
how the Oral Apparatus is specially integrated into the head and neck of man;
2- Read and analyze selected research studies of the Oral Apparatus that provide the evidence for how the
oral apparatus is built and works in the functions of mastication, oral food-transport, swallowing, and
vocalization in speech.
3- View the regional anatomy in stop-frame and slow motion DVDs of photography and cineradiography
of the oral apparatus in mastication, food-bolus formation, swallowing, and speech.
Evaluation and Grades
Course grades are determined by student performance on exams and written assignments, the total score
apportioned: 65% laboratory exam and 35% final written exam. Letter-grades are assigned per total score:
A = 100-90, B = 89-80, C = 79-70, D = 69-60, F = 59 or less. Scores and grades are almost always high
because only outstanding dentists are accepted in specialty certificate programs of the departments of the
College of Dentistry.
Remediation
Students are absent occasionally due to clinical scheduling for patient care or for hospital service
assignments. Thus, the instructor will post all class materials on a Blackboard site for electronic access
and downloading outside of class-time so that a student who misses a class can keep up with course
topics. Students who miss dissection labs are expected to complete dissections on other days, because
they will have permission for I-Card controlled-access to the dissection laboratory from 8 a.m. to 9 p.m.
each day during the semester.
Appendix Q
ANAT_544 Schedule Spring 2013
Wed. 1:00–2:00p.m. Rm 430D of CoD
& Labs 2:00--5:00 Coll. Med. West
ADVANCED CRANIOFACIAL ANATOMY
Dr Thomas Lakars, B.S., M.S., D.D.S., course director, Rm 410C – College of Dentistry
Off: 312-996-6046 tlakars@uic.edu
Lab asst: Dr Robert Druzinsky, Ph.D. Associate Professor, Rm 410C – CoD druzinsk@uic.edu
Sessions Topics Lab
1) 9 January Introduction to ANAT_544 Study the skull.
Human Skull Design (Take loaned skull home for study.)
2) 16 January Functional Anatomy of Facial Skeleton Cranial Cavity & Face I
*Dissection lab begins today!
3) 23 January Designs of Skeletal Muscles: Face II
Facial Muscles
4) 30 January What’s in a Neck: Neck I – Hyoid Muscles
Fascia in Neck Organization
5) 6 February CMJ I: Craniomandibular Joint, Neck II – Visceral Structures
Posture and Skull Plan Neck III - Posterior Triangle
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
6) 13 February CMJ II: Internal Derangements Submandibular, Cheek; Temporal
& Infratemporal Fossae, CMJ
7) 20 February Jaw Muscles and Jaw Movements Deep Infratemporal Fossa &
Submandibular Region
8) 27 February Pharynx – Cross Roads of the Gut Pharynx and Larynx
9) 6 March Larynx in Swallowing: Palate, Nasopharynx, Larynx
Laryngeal Folding Mechanism 7 March = Clin. & Res. Day at CoD
______________________________________________________________________________
10) 13 March Trigeminal Nerve Pathways Tongue and Oral Floor
______________________________________________________________________________
March 18-(20)-22 NO CLASS SPRING BREAK CoD
ADEA = March 16-19, Seattle, WA IADR = March 20-23, Seattle, WA
11) 27 March Eye-Jaw Connection: Orbit, Orbit and Contents
Eye and Extraocular Muscles
12) 3 April Jaw-Ear Connection: External, Middle, Inner Ears
Ear Ossicles were Fetal Jaw Joints
13) 10 April Oral Apparatus in Action: Finish dissections and study
Videos of Chewing & Swallowing for lab exam.
14) 17 April Review for LABORATORY EXAM 1 – 5 p.m. in Anatomy Lab
15) 24 April LABORATORY EXAM 2 p.m. in Anatomy Lab
16) 1 May FINAL WRITTEN EXAM Rm 230D 2 - ~ 4 p.m.
______________________________________________________________________________
Appendix Q
Appendix Q
Department Seminars, Conferences, and Lectures
GRADAUTE PERIODONTICS
Course, seminars, Course Year Method of Evaluation

lectures Director/Instructor Offered
Introduction to Periodontal
Therapy and Biological Dr. Reddy/Faculty 1 Participation
Basis, Intraoral Photography
Practice Management Dr. Reddy/ Faculty 1, 2, 3 Participation
Dental Implantology
Dr. Reddy/ Faculty 1,2,3 Participation, Presentation
Literature Review/ Seminar
Oral Pathology Seminar Dr. Sara Gordon 1,2,3 Participation
Behavioral Sciences/Patient
Dr. koerber 1,2,3 Participation, Presentation
Management/Ethics
Dr. Reddy/ Dr. Gaston/
Current Literature Seminar 1,2,3 Participation
Faculty
Appendix Q
Introduction to Periodontal Therapy and Biological Basis, Intraoral Photography
Course Director: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy
Course Objectives:
1) To provide an introduction to postgraduate periodontics that reviews content from
predoctoral education and extends that knowledge to begin a deeper understanding of the
specialty and the controversial issues facing our specialty.
2) Introduce the student to techniques of case documentation and intraoral photography
3) Discuss basic concepts of asepsis and infection control
Format:
Lecture format, Intraoral Photography is completed in the clinic
Schedule:
Lecture 1- Ex., Dx., Px., Treatment planning
Lecture 2-Anatomy.Surgery ABCs
Lecture 3-Indications for Periodontal Surgery
Lecture 4-Guided Tissue Regeneration
Lecture 5-Management of Furcations
Lecture 6-Periodontal Plastic Surgery
Lecture 7-Suturing Basics
Lecture 8-Mixed Infections
Lecture 9 Host-Microbe Interactions
Lecture 10-Host Immune Response and Periodontitis
Lecture 11-Periodontal Medicine
Lecture 12-Introduction to Dental Implants
Lecture 13-case presentations, Intraoral Photography
Lecture 14- The ABC’s of Infection Control
Evaluation:
Absence policy:
Each participant is allowed to miss one seminar with previous arrangement with the course
director. Unexcused absence will require remediation determined by the course director.
Location and time:
PG Periodontics clinic conference room.
Schedule will be given to the participants.
References:
Clinical Periodontology, Carranza, 11th ed.
Appendix Q
Dental Practice Management/ Personal Financial Planning
Course Director: Dr. Reddy
Instructors: Faculty
Goals:
Course Participants should have an understanding of the following.
Understand the common employment issues for the new dental graduate
Understand the advantages/disadvantages the different types of compensation for the new
associate dentist
Understand the important considerations in determining the value of a dental practice the
graduate may consider for purchase.
Understand the tax implications for the dental practice and important considerations for
insurance.
Have an appreciation for personal financial planning for the new graduate to include
management of debt, investing for retirement, the basic types of investments and their
relative risk and the pro’s and con’s of each.
Schedule:
• Employment Issues for the Prospective Graduate.

• Dental Practice Finances.
• Dental Practice Valuation.
• Professional Taxes and Insurance.
• Personal Financial Planning.
Format:
Multiple seminars
Evaluation:
Absence policy:
Each participant is allowed to miss one seminar with previous arrangement with the course
director. Unexcused absence will require remediation determined by the course director.
Location and time:
PG Periodontics clinic conference room.
Schedule will be given to the participants.
Appendix Q
Course Syllabus
General Information
Course Director: Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy
Office/Phone: 801 South Paulina Str/ 413-8405
Location: 801 South Paulina-PG clinic
Class Time: 4:30-6:30PM. Dates will vary. Schedule will be given to the participants via e-mail
ahead of time.
Learning Resources
List of selected articles from implant dentistry literature.
Resource type: Various Journal articles.
Objectives:
Discuss the literature in implant dentistry with the expectation that clinical procedures will be
evaluated in terms of the best available evidence. Critical evaluation of key articles in implant
dentistry will be read and critically evaluated.
Dental implants have become one of the most exciting, rewarding and challenging aspects of
contemporary dentistry. As such, it is necessary and important that the contemporary periodontist
be well versed in this area in order to incorporate implant treatment into his/her practice, as well
as assume a leadership role in dispersing information on this topic.
This course is designed to provide the basic information necessary to prepare the resident to
treatment plan patients for implant therapy and surgically place implants.
Evaluation methods Overview

100% Classroom Participation
Policy and Procedures

Students are expected to read the assigned articles and be prepared to discuss them in class.
Students must attend all sessions unless they can present an acceptable excuse for absence.
Implant Literature Review Topics
1. Diagnosis and Treatment plan considerations

2. Sinus lift elevation
3. Vertical and Horizontal Augmentation on implants (Autografts, Allografts, GBR
membranes)
4. Vertical and Horizontal Augmentation on implants (Split ridge technique, distraction
osteogenesis)
5. Soft tissue reactions to Biomaterials
6. Complications/Ailing/failing Implants
7. Implant esthetics I
8. Implant esthetics II
9. Immediate function/loading/provisionalization
Appendix Q
Peri 613 GRADUATE PERIODONTICS
CURRENT PERIODONTAL LITERATURE SEMINAR
Course Director: Dr. David Gaston, Dr. Praveen Gajendrareddy
Objectives:
- To provide a sound knowledge base in the current periodontal literature.
- To prepare the student to defend treatment plans and decisions in the clinic with evidence
from the current periodontal literature and to present and defend their own cases in formal
Case Seminar Presentations and Oral examinations.
- To provide the student with the tools to evaluate the quality and value of current journal
articles in the periodontal literature
Schedule:
See outline of journal issues and schedule below.
Format:
Seminar format with faculty facilitating discussion of current journal articles from the
periodontal literature each week that is led by the residents.
Each week a resident is assigned to select articles from particular current issues of important
journals for the periodontist.
Evaluation:
Based on seminar participation with a Satisfactory/unsatisfactory outcome.
Appendix Q
SAMPLE SCHEDULE FOR CURRENT PERIODONTAL LITERATURE REVIEW
Tuesday 8:00 am to 9:00 am
(Periodontics Clinic Conference Room)
AUGUST 2012
7 Jperio/ JCPApr
14 JOMI/ JperioRestDent Apr
21 JperRes/I&I Apr
28 Jperio/ JCP May
SEPTEMBER
4 JperRes/I&I May
11 Jperio/ JCP June
18 JOMI/ JperioRestDent June
25 JperRes/I&I June
OCTOBER
2 AAP no seminar
9 Jperio/ JCP July
16 JOMI/ JperioRestDent July
23 JperRes/I&I July
30 Jperio/ JCP Aug
NOVEMBER
6 JOMI/ JperioRestDent Aug
13 JperRes/I&I Aug
20 Jperio/ JCP Sept
27 JOMI/ JperioRestDent Sept
DECEMBER
No Seminar
Appendix Q
Graduate Oral Pathology
OMDS 503
University of Illinois College of Dentistry 2013
Table of Contents
Basic Course Information ............................................................................................ 2
Course Description ...................................................................................................... 3
Goals/Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................... 3
Prerequisites .............................................................................................................................................................. 3
Required Textbooks and Optional Resources ............................................................... 4
Optional Resources .................................................................................................................................................. 4
Course Organization and Expectations ........................................................................ 5
Work Load ................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Communications ....................................................................................................................................................... 5
Guidelines for Evaluation, and Teaching Methods ....................................................... 5
Wiki briefs ................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Grading Rubric for Wiki Brief .............................................................................................................................. 8
Quizzes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Final Exam ................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Grading ....................................................................................................................................................................... 10
Official Course, School, and Univerisity Policies ....................................................................................... 11
Schedule ................................................................................................................... 13
Learning Objectives ................................................................................................... 14
Full 38 page syllabus available on site.
Appendix Q
Syllabus for Ethics and Behavioral Sciences Resident Case Rounds
Periodontics Department
Anne Koerber, DDS, PhD
I. Learner objectives
a. Learner will describe techniques for assisting an anxious patient to better handle
the periodontal treatment session.
b. Learner will describe methods for assessing a patient’s tobacco use, determining
whether medications are indicated, and assisting a patient to quit tobacco.
c. Learner will describe methods for helping a patient improve their plaque control.
d. Learner will describe methods for improving relationships with difficult patients.
e. Learner will describe ethically appropriate plans to handle ethical dilemmas
arising from periodontics practice.
II. Structure of Case Rounds
a. Meet 12:30-1:30 on 4 Tuesdays
b. For three of those sessions, a resident will present a case of one of the following:
i. An anxious patient
ii. A patient who might benefit from a health behavior change (tobacco use
or better plaque control, for example)
iii. A patient who presents another management difficulty to the treatment
team.
c. For the fourth session, ethics specific to the practice of periodontics will be
discussed.
d. Each resident will write a brief paper (less than 10 pages) describing the presented
case and reviewing the options for behavioral treatment.
e. Grading will be on a satisfactory/not satisfactory basis.
Behavioral sciences/Pt. Management/Ethics Seminar

Two general topic areas:
Ethics & Behavioral sciences- 3 sessions
For Ethics the following scenarios can be considered:

1- A patient is comes to you as a referral for crown lengthening from a GP dentist that has
seen the patient every 6 months for the last 20 years. Your examination reveals clinical
findings consistent with a diagnosis of Generalized Severe Chronic Periodontitis. The
patient is unaware of the periodontal condition. She reports seeing the hygienist for a 30
minute visit for a cleaning every 6 months at the GP’s office.
2- A patient is referred to you for removal of all his mandibular molars. They have had
RCT in the referring dentist’s office and are failing. The referral is for Extraction, site
preservation and implant placement. The RCT appears to be inadequate with most canals
having fill 4+ mm from the apex.
Appendix Q
3- A patient is referred to you for 4 quads of periodontal surgery. Your exam reveals 2-
5mm pockets and one 6mm pocket. There are no furcation involvements. There are
heavy deposits of subgingival calculus. The referring dentist has charged the patient’s
insurance company for 4 quads of scaling and root planing. Your assessment is that 4
quadrants of root planing in your office would likely be the only treatment needed.
Behavioral Sciences:
1- Introduction
2- 3 cases: Anxiety, Behavior modification (plaque control, smoking ceasation),
controlling patient
3- for these sessions a resident presents a case they treated that presented with a
challenging emotional issue as above, a paper related to the situation is presented by
the resident followed by open discussion.
Case Analysis for Ethics

Case I:
What are the relevant facts?
What ethical values are at stake?
What are your conflicts of interest?
What are your options?
What is the best thing to do?
Structure for Behavioral Case Presentation for Behavioral Seminar

We expect a 20-minute presentation to the seminar (less to allow discussion) of the following,
and then a less-than-ten-page paper covering the same material, to be emailed to Anne Koerber
at akoerber@uic.edu.
Problem: what is your problem with this patient? What is the concern that brought you to present
him or her to the seminar?
CC
HPI-give any relevant history that might explain the behavioral issue, for example, amount of
smoking, or history of abuse, or history of bad dental experience
Tx Plan: brief summary of the dental treatment. What is/was the periodontal treatment? What
treatment will remain and who will do it?
History with behavioral issue:
1. How did you first notice the issue?
2. What was your first statement to the patient about the issue?
3. What is the patient’s view of the issue?
4. Describe the course of your interventions to affect the issue?
Appendix Q
5. What ethical issues arose?
6. What is the current state of the patient?
7. What advise/assistance would you like (what help do you want from the seminar
participants?)
Relevant literature: Summarize what your research suggests about treating this kind of problem.
If there is a good handout to provide, provide it.
Appendix Q
SYLLABUS—COMPREHENSIVE DENTAL IMPLANT CONSIDERATIONS
PROS 618—RECONSTRUCTIVE IMPLANTOLOGY
PROS 628—COMPREHENSIVE DENTIAL IMPLANT LITERATURE REVIEW
COURSE DIRECTOR: DR. KENT KNOERNSCHILD

Introduction
This course provides a broad, comprehensive and in depth review of the dental implant literature through
seminar discussions. The knowledge base gained by the study of historical and current implant literature will
provide the framework for understanding and analyzing current and future comprehensive treatment concepts
for therapy with dental implants. A focus is on recognizing prognostic factors at diagnosis and treatment
planning that could have a significant influence on treatment outcomes. Critical appraisal of best available
evidence occurs in PROS 618 and PROS 628. Real-time critical appraisal of this evidence leads a
comprehensive discussion of best available evidence on all selected topics. These seminars provide the
knowledge foundation for comprehensive care of completely and partially edentulous patients.
Course Objectives
This is a 2-hour/week time commitment that cycles over three years. The course director will provide
registration timing. The course series will focus on the following areas.
CDIC I —Introduction to Dental Implants, Osseointegration, Biocompatibility, Biomechanics
CDIC II—Diagnosis, Treatment Planning, Prognostic Factors
CDIC III—Surgical Topics
CDIC IV—Prosthetic Topics
This course supports the student’s need for achieving competency and proficiency in clinical practice and
application of implant therapy options. At the conclusion of this course the student should be able:
1. Demonstrate an in depth knowledge of dental implant literature.
2. Describe the scope of implant literature.
3. Describe the levels of evidence used to justify implant therapy decisions.
4. Describe the best evidence in selected areas used to justify implant therapy.
5. Demonstrate ability to apply knowledge gained to clinical clinical care:
a. Collect, organize, analyze and interpret diagnostic data.
b. Determined a diagnosis.
c. Develop a comprehensive treatment plan and prognosis.
d. Critically evaluate the results of treatment.
e. Apply knowledge gained to develop treatment plans and predict prognoses In patient situations.
Student Responsibilities
1. Attendance at all scheduled sessions: Seminars and Lectures.
2. Seminar participation.
3. Participate in a reading list update on the assigned date(s) and distribute materials as assigned.
4. Distribute assigned article analyses to the class and Director.
5. Submit written examinations to the Director on the assigned date.
Grading Model
Criterion Weighted Percentage

Seminar participation and Article Analyses 35%
Examination 65%
Course grade will be calculated based on the weighted percentages above. Participation will be provided as a
single end of semester grade. All examinations throughout the course will be equally weighted.
Grading Scale
A: 90-100 B: 82-89.99 C: 76-81.99 D: 70-75.99 F: <70
Remediation
A failing grade for any examination in any semester will require a second examination that will either
written or oral as determined by the course director. Passing grade must be obtained to complete the
specialty program.
PROS 618 and PROS 628 – Comprehensive Dental Implant Considerations 1

Appendix Q
Reading Lists
Reading lists are evaluated on an ongoing basis and updated to meet course needs. Primary articles are
reviewed that address course outline topics. Reading lists and readings are distributed well in advance.
Seminar Participation
For each seminar, all participants will be assigned a core group of readings. Discussion of content in this
seminar will take place in several formats depending upon course content. The course director will determine
the appropriate approach based upon session content. Seminar format may include the following:
1. Lecture
2. Large group discussion
3. Small group discussion with large group summation of content
4. Review of articles with individual article analysis summaries as assigned
Session Guides
Study questions may be distributed prior to or during the session as a guide to the most important content to
glean from the session. This is not the only information one is expected to learn from the session. These
guides may be used to stimulate group synthesis of information during small group discussions. It will also be
used to to summarize main points as a large group at the end of each session.
For each seminar, all participants will be assigned a core group of readings. Each student will be assigned
specific readings to analyze and summarize orally. Students must read all articles to be able to actively
participate in the discussion. BE PREPARED! You will be evaluated on your analyses as well as upon your
level of participation in the seminar.
The student must provide a written article analysis to be distributed to other seminar participants. Summaries
should be no longer than one typed page and organized as described below. When a student summarizes a
reading orally, he/she must not simply read excerpts from the article. The student must assimilate the
information to generate a unique summary that shows his/her understanding of the material.
The reviewer and all seminar participants should expand upon the summary by:
1. Critically evaluating the article regarding research/clinical methodology and importance of the article
within the body of implant prosthodontic literature. Articles may also be critiqued regarding their
scientific writing style, concise presentation of the data, and accurate presentation of conclusions
based upon obtained results.
2. Relating concepts of techniques to those described in other articles in the same or related subject
areas.
3. Describing the relevance of the concepts or techniques for prosthodontic clinical practice, including
appropriateness, applicability and implications within the context of the prosthodontic standards of
care.
Seminar Participation Evaluation Criteria

Student evaluations each semester will be based upon the following:
1. Preparation and familiarity with assigned literature to support in-class discussion
2. In depth knowledge of the literature he/she must summarize orally.
3. Demonstration critical thinking through article analyses.
4. Timely distribution of abstracts.

Appendix Q
Article Analysis Format
Article analysis format is distributed at the beginning of the semester. Approach toward critical analysis is
discussed at that time and supported throughout the course. Contact the course director should questions
arise.
Clinical Research Article Analyses

Article analyses should follow the Journal of Evidence Based Dental Practice analysis format.
After by completing the analyses, included comments relating to the following questions.
a. Are the results valid?
b. Are the results applicable?
For clinical research, a secondary evaluation should be completed using the UIC-iCARE analysis. This
provides content and critical appraisal summary. Only clinical research publication or systematic reviews
should be appraised using the UIC-iCARE format.
Laboratory Research Article Analyses

Analyses of laboratory research should follow a format that also allows for critical appraisal of the study
design. After by completing the analyses, included comments relating to the following questions
a. Are the results valid?
Literature Review or Opinion Article Analyses

Opinion and literature review article analyses should follow the general format of the article. Identify the
publication’s purpose and the salient points the support the author’s conclusions. This analysis must also
include a critical appraisal of the concepts presented. Systematic reviews of clinical research should be
evaluated using the UIC-iCARE format. If the iCARE format does not apply, analyses should include
comments relating to the following questions:
a. Are the opinions valid?

Appendix Q
Student Participation Evaluation
Student:
Date:
Course:
Yes No
Preparation and familiarity with assigned literature and contributes to in-class discussion
In depth knowledge of the literature he/she must summarize orally.
Demonstration correct and accurate critical thinking through article analyses.
Timely distribution of abstracts.

Appendix Q
UIC Advanced Prosthodontics
Examination Evaluation Criteria
Please respond to the following questions. Spend as much time as is necessary to

thoroughly answer each question. Use literature reviewed in the course as references
to answer the posed questions. You may also use additional outside references. For
essay answers, each response must be at least one single spaced page in length 11-12
point font and will likely be longer. Your synthesis of the literature will be assessed
using the following rubric.
Accurately cited the included references
individual papers and the provided body
Responses were consistent with clinical

Supported response with appropriate
Appropriately answered the posed
Recognized level of evidence of
of evidence
references
Question
question
practice
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Grading criteria
0 No
1 Yes
Proportion of affirmative answers as calculated as percentage will be used to calculate

the grade for the semester.

Appendix Q
UIC ADVANCED PROSTHODONTICS
COMPREHENSIVE DENTAL IMPLANT CONSIDERATIONS
Fall 2012 - Spring 2013
Prosthetic Design Consideration - Treatment Planning, Therapy, Outcomes Expected Maintenance
Date Topics Faculty
Fall 2012 Sept 7 No class

14 Course overviiew, EBD considerations Knoernschild
21 ST AND Site preservation Knoernschild
28 Dr. K out
Oct 5 CE: Design, biomechanics, prosthetic options Knoernschild

12 CE: Prosthesis design (Max vs Mand; Fixed vs. OD) AND implant survival, success, complicationsl) Knoernschild
19 Dr. K out CE continued Knoernschild
26 CE:Prosthesis design (Max vs. mand; Fixed vs OD) AND prosthesis survival, success, complications Knoernschild
Nov 2 CE: Implant number AND Prothesis design (Max vs. mand; Fixed vs. OD), rationale Knoernschild
9 ACP Annual Session
16 CE: Immediate vs delayed implant placement,loading AND survival, design rationale Knoernschild
23 Thanksgiving Break
30 CE: Immediate vs delayed placement, loading AND esthetics (patient, clinician) Knoernschild
Dec 7 CE: Fixed AND patient satisfaction, bite force, diet, nutrition, OHQoL Knoernschild
14 CE: Catch-up FINAL EXAM DUE Knoernschild
21 No class
Spring 2013 Jan 4 CE: Mand OD AND patient satisfaction, biteforece, diet, nutrition, OHQoL Knoernschild
11 PE: Diagosis, patient and implant placement considerations, prosthetic options Knoernschild
18 PE: Design considerations - metal ceramic, zirconia, adv, disadv, complications Knoernschild
25 Dr. K out PE: Abutment designs Knoernschild
Feb 1 Dr. K out PE continued Knoernschild

8 PE: Screw vs cement AND prosthesis survival, complications, rationale Knoernschild
15 PE: Max anterior, max post, mand post AND survival Knoernschild
22 AAFP Meeting
29 PE: Passivity of fit AND implant, prosthesis survival, bone loss Knoernschild
Mar 8 PE: patient satisfaction, bite force, diet, nutrition, OHQoL Knoernschild
15 PE: Posterior mandible - design, success, survival, complications, iimplant vs prosthesis Knoernschild
22 PE: Posterior maxilla - design, success, survival, complications, implant vs prosthesis Knoernschild
29 ST diagnosis, prosthetic design, risk Knoernschild
Apr 5 ACP - Dr. K out
UIC ADVANCED PROSTHODONTICS

COMPREHENSIVE DENTAL IMPLANT CONSIDERATIONS
Spring 2013 - last 8 weeks
Prosthetic Consideration
Group 1 - 4
Spring 2013 11-‐Apr P Pa8ent with ST implant Knoernschild
I immediate place
C delayed place
O survival (implant and prosthesis) esthe8cs, clinician (e.g. PES, WES) pa8ent sa8sfac8on, OHIP complica8ons
Group 5 - 9
11-‐Apr P Pa8ent with ST implant Knoernschild
I early place
C delayed place
O survival (implant and prosthesis) esthe8cs ,clinician (e.g. PES, WES) pa8ent sa8sfac8on, OHIP complica8ons
Group 10 - 13
I buccal bone graLing
C no graL on buccal
Group 14, 1 - 3
I early place, graL bone/soL 8ssue on buccal later (e.g. Buser group)
C delayed place
Group 4 - 6
I full flap
C flapless or limited flap (papilla sparing, etc.)
Group 8 - 10
2-‐May P Pa8ent with ST implant Knoernschild
I immediate provisionaliza8on
C proivisionaliza8on
Group 11 - 14
2-‐May P Pa8ent with ST implant Knoernschild
I 8tanium abutment
C alterna8ves (e.g. alumina, zirconia)
13-‐May EXAM DUE -‐ ALL DOCUMENTS SUBMITTED
Appendix Q
Appendix R
Exhibit 9
Off-Service Assignments
Please complete the form below to provide information about residents’ off-service assignments.
NAME OF SERVICE YEAR ASSIGNED LENGTH OF ASSIGNMENT

Anesthesia 1 6 weeks/7AM-12:30 PM Mon,
7AM-4PM Tues-Fri
Medicine n/a
General Surgery n/a
Surgical Subspecialties (specify) n/a
Pathology n/a
Clinical Laboratories n/a
Other (specify) n/a
UIC Hospital Anesthesia Rotation
a. Objectives of assignment
1. The resident will assist attending anesthesiologist in delivering general or conscious
sedation in the operating room environment.
2. Important basic skills for conscious sedation will be gained including: establishing IV
access, endotrachial intubation, review of pertinent medical history and preoperative
assessment of patient, intraoperative monitoring of patient’s status (BP, EKG, O2 saturation,
etc.), detailed and accurate anesthesia record keeping.
b. Duties of residents when on assignment

1. Residents on this rotation are expected to arrive on time for their rotation each day and
complete all duties as assigned by attending anesthesiologist.
2. Residents also must attend the didactic sessions given each day during the rotation.
3. Satisfactory completion of this rotation includes attendance, participation, and favorable
evaluation by the attending anesthesiologist (evaluation recorded with the form below).
c. Training received on assignment:
Appendix R
Residents will receive training and are evaluated for the following activities and experiences:
1- Pre-anesthesia Patient Evaluation
2- Mask Airway Ventilation Skills
3- Basic Intubation Skills
4- LMA Placement Skills
5- IV Placement Skills
d. Indicate whether residents are required to participate in the seminars, lectures and
conferences conducted by these services
There are didactic sessions given each day during the rotation that complement formal
courses in anesthesia, conscious sedation, medicine, and pharmacology given in the COD
e. Faculty member responsible for off-service rotation

The attending anesthesiologist is responsible for the daily activity each day as well as
evaluation of each resident. In addition, this rotation is organized and monitored by our
dental anesthesiologist responsible for the entire anesthesia program for our residents.
f. How training and supervision of residents is evaluated.
The form below is used to evaluate each residents’ progress in attaining the skills and
completing the objectives of the Hospital Anesthesia Rotation.
Appendix R
University of Illinois at Chicago
Department of Periodontics
Anesthesia Rotation evaluation
Resident: Faculty:
Period: Date:
• Please rate the student in each of the following categories making individual comments
in any area you feel necessary.
• Composite scores and ranges will be discussed with the student as well as consensus
comments.
Superior Above Average Below Unacceptable

Average Average
1. Punctuality and Professionalism 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA

2. Participation in morning 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
And First Month Course
3. Pre-anesthesia Patient Evaluation 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
4. Mask Airway Ventilation Skills 5. . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
5. Basic Intubation Skills 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
6. LMA Placement Skills 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
7. IV Placement Skills 5 . . . . . 4 . . . . . 3 . . . . . 2 . . . . .1 . . . . . NA
Do you believe the resident has successfully completed the rotation Yes ___ No__
COMMENTS (Please include written assessment of student’s progress relative to year in

program):
Signature Extension Date
Appendix R
Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd

4-7a Collect, organize, analyze and interpret data
Area:
• Indicate how instruction is provided in this subject area:
X Dental department seminar, conference, lecture program

X Formal course—Title: Osci 451 Research Methodology (Yr 1)
Osci 441 Biostatistics (Yr 2)
Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy
Seminar
Intro. To Periodontal Therapy and Biological Basis of
Periodontics (Yr 1)
Peri 698 Directed Research
Off-service rotation to:
X Other (specify):
No formal instruction is provided.
• Total hours of instruction: 4500
• What is the level of instruction: Proficiency
Is instruction in this subject the same as that provided to:
a. undergraduate dental students? Yes X No

b. predoctoral medical students? Yes X No
If YES, describe how this instruction is modified for the advanced education program.
• Assess the scope and effectiveness of the students’ clinical experiences in this area:
The collection and organization of data as part of clinical periodontics and periodontal research
is learned in classroom lectures, seminars, laboratory research experiences and in the
Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. The faculty review, evaluates, and discusses the resident’s
analysis and interpretation of clinical and research data. Outcome assessment measures for the
students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student success in completion/passing of
mock boards, thesis, AAP in-service exams and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness
of experiences provided in these areas are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
1 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7b Interpret radiographs as they relate to the

Clinical Year
diagnosis of periodontal diseases and 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: Offered:
dental implants

X Formal course—Title: Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy
Seminar
Periodontics (Yr 1)
Omds 617 Radiology for the Dental Specialist
X Other (specify):

The interpretation of radiographs related to the diagnosis of periodontal diseases and dental
implants is covered extensively in didactic courses, seminars in the Postgraduate Periodontics
Clinic. The attending faculty review, evaluates, and discusses the resident’s interpretation of
radiographs. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area
relate to student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams,
treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope and
effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
2 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical
4-7c Formulate a diagnosis and a prognosis Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:

X Formal course—Title: Oral Pathology Seminar
Periodontics (Yr 1)
Seminar

Other (specify):

The formulation of a diagnosis and prognosis is covered extensively in didactic courses,

seminars and in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. The presentation of a diagnosis and
prognosis is followed by an evaluation by the attending faculty and review with the resident.
Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student
success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment planning/
interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical
experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
3 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical Year
4-7d Develop a Comprehensive Treatment Plan 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: Offered:

X Formal course—Title: Intro. To Periodontal Therapy and Biological Basis of
Periodontics (Yr 1)
Seminar
Other (specify):

The development of a comprehensive treatment plan is covered extensively in didactic courses,
seminars and reinforced by faculty in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. The presentation of
a treatment plan is followed by an evaluation by the attending faculty and review with the
resident. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate
to student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment
planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the
clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
4 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-7e Understand and discuss a rationale for the Year

1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: indicated therapy Offered:

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Seminar
Ortd 667 Adult Orthodontics, Perio-Prosth
Relationships
Principles of Conscious
Other (specify):

The development of rationale and justification for indicated therapies is covered extensively in
didactic courses and seminars as part of the preclinical experience. Faculty in clinic then
reinforces didactic information. Presentation of the rationale for indicated therapy is followed
by an evaluation by the attending faculty and review with the resident. Outcome assessment
measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student success in
completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment planning/
5 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical Year
4-7f Evaluate critically the results of therapy 1st, 2nd,3rd
Area: Offered:

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Seminar
Other (specify):

The critical evaluation of results of therapy is covered extensively in didactic courses, seminars
reinforced by faculty in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Clinical assessments of treatment
outcome are followed by an evaluation by the attending faculty and review with the resident.
Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student
success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment planning/
6 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7g Communicate effectively to patients the

Clinical Year
nature of their periodontal health status and 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: Offered:
treatment needs

X Formal course—Title: Behavioral Sciences/Patient Management/Ethics
Seminar
Seminar
Other (specify):

The development of effective communication skills is emphasized and covered extensively in
didactic courses, seminars and reinforced by faculty in Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic.
Treatment plans and case presentations are followed by an evaluation by the attending faculty
and review with the resident. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical
experiences in the area relate to student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-
service exams, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope
and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
7 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7h Communicate effectively with dental and

Clinical other health care professionals, interpret their Year
1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: advice and integrate this information into the Offered:
treatment of the patient

Seminar
Other (specify):

The development of effective communication skills with dental and other health care
professionals is covered extensively in didactic courses, departmental and interdisciplinary
seminars and reinforced by faculty in Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Case management is
evaluated by the attending faculty and reviewed with the resident. Outcome assessment
completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary
seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences
provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
8 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-7i Integrate the current concepts of other

Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: dental disciplines into periodontics

X Formal course—Title:
Seminar
Other (specify):

The integration of current concepts in other dental disciplines into periodontics is covered
extensively in didactic courses, departmental and interdisciplinary seminars reinforced by faculty
in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Case management is evaluated by the attending faculty
and reviewed with the resident. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical
service exams, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope
and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
9 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7j Organize, develop, implement and evaluate

Clinical
periodontal disease control programs for Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
patients

Seminar
Peri 613 Current Periodontal Literature Review\
Working with our staff hygienists, dental assistants,
clinic coordinator and predoctoral students in the
X Other (specify): clinic

The organization and development of periodontal disease control programs for patients are
covered extensively in coursework and seminars. Faculty in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic
then reinforces implementation and evaluation of periodontal disease control programs. Case
management is evaluated by the attending faculty and reviewed with the resident. Outcome
assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student success in
seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided
are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
10 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7k Organize, develop, implement and evaluate

Clinical
a patient recall program and provide Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
supportive Periodontal therapy

Seminar
Working with our staff hygienists, dental assistants and
X Other (specify): predoctoral students in the clinic

The organization and development of a patient recall program are covered extensively in
coursework and seminars. Implementation and evaluation of patient recall programs are then
reinforced by faculty in Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Case management is evaluated by the
attending faculty and reviewed with the resident. Outcome assessment measures for the
students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student success in completion/passing of mock
boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral
examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to
achieve proficiency.
11 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical
4-7l Utilize allied dental personnel effectively Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:

Formal course—Title: Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy
Seminar
Working with our staff hygienists, dental assistants,
clinic coordinator and predoctoral students in the
X Other (specify): clinic

The utilization of allied dental personnel is covered extensively in coursework and seminars.
Clinical experiences permit utilization of multiple allied dental personnel and predoctoral
students. Faculty in clinic reinforces effective utilization of allied dental personnel. Outcome
assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to students’
successful feedback from clinic directors, clinic coordinators, faculty and allied personnel. The
scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve proficiency.
12 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-7m Organize, develop and implement an

Clinical
infection control program for a dental Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
practice setting

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Off-service rotation
to:
Other (specify):
• Total hours of 3740

instruction:

The organization, development, and implementation of an infection control program for a
dental practice setting are covered extensively in coursework and seminars. Infection control
practice and procedures are then reinforced and monitored by faculty and staff in clinic.
Completion of a procedure is followed by an evaluation by the attending faculty and review
with the resident. Monthly assessment of infection control procedures are monitored formally
and documented by the Program Director or Department Head on a monthly basis. Outcome
assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to students’
successful feedback from faculty, clinic directors, clinic coordinators, and allied personnel.
The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve
proficiency.
13 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10a Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical
level of proficiency in scaling and root Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
planing

Formal course—Title: Intro. To Periodontal Therapy and Biological Basis of
Periodontics (Yr 1)

Other (specify):

All clinical procedures are learned in the classroom, seminar, and reinforced in Postgraduate
Periodontics Clinic by faculty. Completion of the procedure is followed by an evaluation by the
attending faculty and review with the resident. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical
14 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10b Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical
level of proficiency in adjunctive use of Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
chemotherapeutic agents

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Other (specify):

15 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10c Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical
level of proficiency in gingivectomy/ Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
gingivoplasty

Periodontics (Yr 1)

Other (specify):

16 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10d Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical level of proficiency in Periodontal flap
Area: procedures to include: replaced, apically
positioned and coronally positioned techniques

Periodontics (Yr 1)

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Other (specify):

17 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10e Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical level of proficiency in Periodontal
Area: resective surgery (osteoplasty, ostectomy, and
root resection)

Periodontics (Yr 1)

Other (specify):

18 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-10f Tooth extraction in the course of

Area: periodontal and implant therapy

Periodontics (Yr 1)

Other (specify):

19 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10g Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical level of proficiency in Periodontal soft
Area: and hard tissue regenerative therapies for
health, comfort, function and esthetics

Periodontics (Yr 1)

Other (specify):

20 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10h Clinical training for the student to the

Clinical level of proficiency in Periodontal soft
Area: and hard tissue regenerative therapies for
health, comfort, function and esthetics

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Other (specify):

21 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-10i Clinical training for the student to the

level of proficiency in Management of
endodontic-periodontal lesions; treatment
Clinical
should be provided in consultation with the Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
individuals who will assume the responsibility
for the completion or supervision of
endodontic therapy

Periodontics (Yr 1)
Other (specify):

22 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical
4-11.1 Didactic instruction in oral medicine Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:

X Formal course—Title: Principles of Conscious
Hstl 506 Immunology
Osci 580 Advanced Oral Sciences I & II
Other (specify):
• What is the level of instruction: Competency

Residents receive in-depth didactic instruction in oral medicine in graduate courses. Didactic
information is then reinforced by faculty in treatment planning and case management in the
clinic. Case management and level of understanding are evaluated by attending faculty and
reviewed with the resident. In addition the Hospital Anesthesia Rotation, Oral
Path/TMJ/Medicine Clinical Rotation, and management of patients receiving conscious
sedation in our clinic (under the direction of our dental anesthesiologist) reinforce the didactic
content. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate
to student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams and oral
examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided are sufficient to
achieve competency.
23 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical
4-11.2 Clinical training in oral medicine Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:

X Formal course—Title: Perio 620 Clinical Periodontics
Hospital Anesthesia Rotation

Other (specify):

Residents receive in-depth didactic instruction in oral medicine in graduate courses. The
didactic information is then reinforced by clinical faculty in treatment planning and case
management of patients, including older adults and medically compromised patients. Residents
are frequently exposed to non-plaque related periodontal diseases and disorders. Residents also
provide care to patients with complex systemic diseases including immunodeficiencies in the
Clinic. Case management and level of understanding are evaluated by attending faculty and
reviewed with the resident. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided
are sufficient to achieve competency.
24 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-12.1 Didactic training in implants to the level

Area: of competency

X Formal course—Title: Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy Seminar
Other (specify):

Residents receive in-depth didactic instruction in dental implants in graduate courses and seminars.
Didactic coursework includes the historical development, biological basis, treatment planning,
prosthetic requirements, surgical placement, implant site development, restoration, and
management of peri-implant tissues. Didactic information is then reinforced by faculty in treatment
planning and case management in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Case management and
level of understanding are evaluated by attending faculty and reviewed with the resident. Outcome
assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to student success in
seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the clinical experiences provided
are sufficient to achieve competency.
25 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-12.2 Clinical training in dental implants to the Year

1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area: level of competency Offered:

Seminar
Anat 544 Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy
X Other (specify): Preclinical exercises with implant instrumentation

Residents receive in-depth didactic instruction in dental implants in graduate courses and
seminars. Didactic coursework includes the historical development, biological basis, treatment
planning, prosthetic requirements, surgical placement, implant site development, restoration, and
management of peri-implant tissues. Didactic information is then reinforced by faculty in
treatment planning and case management in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. Case
management and level of understanding are evaluated by attending faculty and reviewed with the
resident. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate to
student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment
planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations. The scope and effectiveness of the
clinical experiences provided are sufficient to achieve competency.
26 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-13 In-depth knowledge in all areas of conscious

Clinical
sedation and proficiency in more than one Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
method of conscious sedation
Dental department seminar, conference, lecture program

X Formal course—Title: Omds 615 Anesthesia and Pain Control
Staff dental anesthesiologist supervises weekly sedation
X Other (specify): cases and provides the didactic material above
• What is the level of instruction: In-depth knowledge (in all areas)

Proficiency (in more than one method)

Residents receive in-depth didactic instruction in all areas of conscious sedation in graduate
courses and seminars. Didactic information is then reinforced in clinic by means of a pre-
treatment assessment with an attending dental anesthesiologist prior to administering sedation and
performing treatment under direct supervision. Completion of the procedure is followed by an
evaluation by the attending faculty and review with the resident. Residents complete a minimum
of 20 sedation cases. Each resident completes a 6 week hospital anesthesia rotation during their
first year. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate
to student success in oral and written evaluation by an anesthesiologist and success in
completion/passing of mock boards, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral
examinations. The didactic instruction and clinical experiences provided in these areas are
sufficient to achieve in-depth knowledge in all areas of conscious sedation and clinical
proficiency in nitrous oxide/oxygen inhalation sedation and oral sedation.
27 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-14 a. Treatment in a hospital setting of patients

Clinical
with periodontal disease to the level of Year Offered: 1st, 2nd,3rd
Area:
familiarity
Dental department seminar, conference, lecture program

Formal course—Title: Hospital Anesthesia Rotation
X

Other (specify): As part of Peri 620 above, residents participate in
Clinical mandatory treatment rendered to patients of the Postgraduate
training during Pediatric Dentistry Program along with the residents
X orientation of that service.
• What is the level of instruction: Familiarity

Residents receive didactic instruction in the treatment in a hospital setting of patients with
periodontal disease in a graduate course and seminars. Didactic information is then reinforced
through experiences in their Hospital Anesthesia Rotation and treatment of patients in
collaboration with the Postgraduate Pediatric Dentistry Program.
28 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
Clinical 4-14 b. Management of temporomandibular

Area: disorders to level of familiarity

Seminar

X Other (specify): Guest lecturers

Didactic instruction in the management of temporomandibular disorders is provided in a graduate
courses and seminars. Coursework includes instruction in radiographic interpretation, differential
diagnosis, treatment planning, symptomatic treatment, occlusal appliances, and referral.
Concepts related to more advanced forms of therapy and case management also are reviewed.
Didactic information is then reinforced by attending faculty in the Postgraduate Periodontics
Clinic and during the Oral Path/TMJ/Oral Medicine Clinical Rotation. Outcome assessment
seminars and oral examinations. Clinical experiences include management of cases with selected
temporomandibular disorders under appropriate consultation.
29 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-14 c. Orthodontic procedures in conjunction

Clinical
with periodontal therapy, to a level of Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
familiarity

X Formal course—Title: Peri 620 Clinical Periodontics
Off-service rotation to: Pros 613 Interdisciplinary Seminar
Seminar
Other (specify):

Didactic instruction in minor tooth movement in conjunction with periodontal therapy is provided
in departmental and joint specialty seminars as part of the preclinical experience. Clinical
experiences include cooperative treatment of cases requiring minor or comprehensive tooth
movement. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate
to student success in completion/passing of mock boards, AAP in-service exams, treatment
planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations.
30 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-14 d Surgical exposure of teeth for

Clinical
orthodontic purposes to level of Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
Area:
understanding

X Formal course—Title: Peri 620 Clinical Periodontics
Seminar
Other (specify):
• What is the level of instruction:
Is instruction in this subject the same as that provided to: Understanding

Didactic instruction in the surgical exposure of teeth for orthodontic purposes is provided in
departmental and joint specialty seminars. Didactic information is then reinforced in clinic by
means of a pre-surgical assessment with attending faculty prior to performing the procedure under
direct supervision. Completion of the procedure is followed by an evaluation by the attending
faculty and review with the resident. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical
service exams, treatment planning/ interdisciplinary seminars and oral examinations.
31 Appendix T
Exhibit 11
4-15 Adequate training in the management of a

Clinical Area: Year Offered: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
periodontal practice.

Formal course—Title:
X Other (specify): Invited private practicing Periodontists including PTF
• What is the level of instruction: Understanding

Didactic instruction in the management of a periodontal practice is provided in seminars given by
multiple faculties. Didactic information is reinforced in clinic by volunteer faculty, who also
encourage residents to visit their private offices to view office design and practice management
techniques. Outcome assessment measures for the students’ clinical experiences in the area relate
to students’ successful feedback and evaluation by faculty. The instruction provided in these
areas has been sufficient to achieve adequate training in the management of a periodontal
practice.
32 Appendix T
STANDARD 5 – ADVANCED EDUCATION STUDENTS
Appendix U
Admission Data for Recent Admitted Students
Last Country of Visa NBDE NBDE Part Year Started

Name First Name Citizenship Status Part I II Program
Drucker Scott US 89 2013
Patel Ankur S. US 84 2013
Shango Jennifer US 83 2013
Suleiman Samia US 84 2013
Mackler Harrison US 96 2012

Carmosin
o Andrew US 88 80 2012
Rebecca
Kibler Jean US 93 2012
Dragonas Panagiotis Greece NR - - 2012
DiFranco Charles US 85 2011

Hsiao Erica US 87 2011
Quinlin Kate US 86 2011
Moneste
ro Andrew US 86 82 2011
Dunn Whitney E. US 84 2010

Ebrahimi Nima US 92 2010
Maniar Nisha US 89 2010
Belani Sonia US 90 2009

Masoud Fadi Kuwait PR in US 89 84 2009
0 Appendix U
PROGRAM MANUAL
POSTGRADUATE PROGRAM
IN PERIODONTICS
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS AT CHICAGO

COLLEGE OF DENTISTRY
Program Policies and Guidelines
(Revised August 1, 2013)
0 Appendix U
GENERAL PROGRAM INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Postgraduate Program in Periodontics at The University of Illinois at Chicago, College of
Dentistry is a 33-month program that provides training in four domains: didactic, clinical,
research and teaching.
The program accepts only highly qualified students.
A. The Program Description:

The Department of Periodontics offers unique opportunities for advanced clinical specialty
training in Periodontology at the graduate level that fulfills requirements for eligibility to
the American Board of Periodontology. Additionally, the program is fully accredited by the
Commission on Dental Accreditation of the American Dental Association. All students
must participate in research. Students may, at their option, choose to pursue a program
and research project leading to a Master's or Ph.D. degree. The following programs are
offered currently:
1. A three-year clinical certificate: The Certificate in Periodontics is awarded upon
completion of all program requirements and only after all degree requirements have been
completed (if a degree is sought by the student).
2. A three-year combined clinical certificate and Master's degree program.
3. A four-year combined clinical certificate and Postdoctoral experience (for students already
holding a Ph.D. in a related basic science area). The combined certificate/Ph.D. program is
available to highly qualified individuals anticipating a full-time career in academic teaching and
research. Individuals are selected through a special review and a selection committee.
4. A Six year combined clinical certificate and Doctor of Philosophy degree
These programs should be of special interest to those clinicians interested in combining careers
in academics, research, government, industry, or organized dentistry with clinical careers
involving specialty oral health care management and/or delivery in private practice or hospital-
based practice settings.
The training program commences annually in August and is a minimum of 33months in
duration. In pursuit of a degree, selected students may embrace a wealth of progressive and
diverse opportunities during their clinical training program through graduate school offerings.
Opportunities for the master (M.S.) and doctoral (Ph.D.) degrees could include such scientific
fields as Anatomy, Biochemistry, Experimental Pathology, Genetics, Microbiology and
Immunology, Oral Sciences, Pharmacology, and Physiology. At the doctoral level, a unique
"one-of-a-kind" program may be developed for the student with specialized and novel career
goals. Original research leading to submission and defense of an approved thesis or dissertation
is a general requirement for a graduate degree which is coupled with award of the clinical
certificate denoting completion of advanced clinical specialty training. Such fields of study
combined with the clinical specialty program at the University of Illinois at Chicago provide to
1 Appendix U
applicants with diverse interests and strong career goals opportunities that are not commonly
available in conjunction with clinical specialty programs at other institutions.
The program of study for the clinical component of specialty training consists of didactic
courses and seminars, clinical management of patients with periodontal disorders, and teaching
experiences. Core didactic courses consist of Immunology, Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy,
Principles of Conscious Sedation/Medicine/Pharmacology, ACLS, BLS, Oral Pathology
Seminar, Behavioral Sciences/Patient Management/Ethics Seminar, Advanced Oral Sciences I &
II, Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy Seminar (case reviews including diagnosis,
treatment planning and therapy), Biostatistics, Temporomandibular disorders, Adult
Orthodontics/Perio-Prosth Relationships, Classical and Current literature reviews.
Interdisciplinary/Implantology seminars are also held on a weekly basis.
Comprehensive periodontal health care is performed in the Periodontology Postgraduate
Clinic at The University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry. Residents are provided the
opportunity to integrate periodontal therapy with other clinical disciplines and also to practice
conscious sedation measures for pain control to include oral, inhalation, and intravenous
sedation, thereby experiencing complete management in the oral health needs of their assigned
patients.
Experiences in clinical teaching are provided through opportunities to participate in pre-
doctoral clinical courses in Periodontics at the College of Dentistry.
Residents will be offered Graduate Teaching Assistant appointments available within the
Department of Periodontics at the College of Dentistry. Residents teaching performance will be
reviewed annually may be renewed for an additional year depending on positive teaching
outcomes as reviewed by the Department Head and the Program Director.
B. The Physical Environment

The University of Illinois at Chicago (UIC) was formed in 1982 by the consolidation of two U.
of I. campuses: the Medical Center campus, which dates back to the 19th century, and the
comprehensive Chicago Circle campus which replaced, in 1965, the two-year undergraduate
Navy Pier campus that had opened in 1946 to educate returning veterans. It is a major research
university located in the heart of one of the world’s great cities. UIC provides a first-rate
education for its students and is committed to creating and disseminating new knowledge as a
university of growing national and international stature. The largest university in the Chicago
area, UIC has 25,000 students, 15 colleges and annual research expenditures exceeding $290
million. Growing numbers of students are attracted to UIC, and they reflect the global character
of Chicago; more than a third of UIC students speak English as a second language. UIC’s
student body—approximately 65 percent undergraduate and 35 percent graduate and
professional—is recognized as one of the nation’s most diverse. The university considers the
diversity of its student population among its greatest strengths. UIC’s hallmark is its Great Cities
Commitment through which UIC faculty, staff and students engage in hundreds of programs with
community, corporate, government and civic partners to improve the quality of life in Chicago
2 Appendix U
and other metropolitan areas around the world. Playing a critical role in Illinois healthcare, UIC
operates the state’s major public medical center and serves as the principal educator of Illinois’
physicians, dentists, pharmacists, nurses and other healthcare professionals. With more than 100
buildings on approximately 240 acres, UIC has recently transformed its campus environment
with its southern edge expansion. The South Campus project includes housing for more than
1,500 students, academic offices, 930 units of private residential housing, new retail
establishments, parking facilities and athletics fields on 85-acres immediately south of the east
side of campus.
The College of Dentistry is one of 15 colleges within the University and is located at 801
South Paulina Street. The College of Dentistry has seen many changes in its three eras of
development over the past seventy-five years. Since the College of Dentistry became part of the
University of Illinois in 1913, it has had three locations. Each facility has provided the most
current technology to students, and often the college's innovations in teaching and clinical
programs have been models for dental schools throughout the country. The College operates the
largest oral health care center in the state of Illinois in a building of approximately 193,000 net
assignable square feet. Its clinics include 360 chairs and accommodate approximately 80,000
patient visits per year. The University of Illinois Hospital is its primary hospital and accounts for
over 350 inpatient and outpatient dental cases annually. The Pediatric Dentistry service is also
responsible for dental care at the Mile Square Clinic, a community health center on Chicago's
west side operated by the UIC. The College and its departments are also affiliated with several
other hospitals, including the Westside VA Hospital and Mercy Hospital.
Classroom facilities in the five story structure include two lecture halls, with a capacity of
more than 100 seats per room, and three common seminar rooms, seating from 30 to 70 on the
2nd, 3rd, and 5th floors. Teaching facilities are provided for a per class enrollment of 52 DMD
students, six highly recognized specialty certificate programs (endodontics, oral and
maxillofacial surgery, orthodontics, pediatric dentistry, periodontics, and prosthodontics), and
the M.S. /Ph.D. in Oral Sciences. Individualized specialization programs and the two-year
International Dentists certificate program accommodate an additional 24 continuing education
students per year. Digital patient record keeping is managed with a comprehensive patient
management software program and computers at every dental chair. Visit the UIC homepage at
http://www.uic.edu/ for more details of the campus.
Post-graduate Periodontics Clinical Facility
The clinical facility for postdoctoral students pursuing advanced clinical specialty training in
periodontics is located on the third floor of the College of Dentistry. Each student is assigned an
individual clinical operatory and a lockable cabinet in which to store clinic-related items. Digital
patient record keeping is managed with a patient management software program and computers
3 Appendix U
at every dental chair. Additionally the clinical facility contains five individual operatories
dedicated to periodontal/implant surgery procedures, an X-ray machine, dry heat and steam-
pressure sterilization equipment, instrument cleaning equipment (ultrasonic), sterilized
instrument storage cabinets. Additional dental laboratory support is available through facilities
within the College of Dentistry.
Sources for Program Guidelines and Policies
A. Standards for Advanced Specialty Education Programs in Periodontics approved by the

Commission on Dental Accreditation of the American Dental Association and implemented July
31, 2008.
B. Annual Program Directors Meeting held at the annual meeting the American Academy of
Periodontology.
C. Program Directors Committee. The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs chairs a
committee of Program Directors of all the graduate-training programs offered at The
University of Illinois, College of Dentistry.
Program Goals
6. To prepare highly-qualified clinicians, educators, and scientists in the field of

Periodontology; that are capable of periodontal practice, research and teaching;
7. To provide patient-centered periodontal care that is evidence-based, comprehensive, and
compassionate for a culturally diverse population;
8. To foster collaborative research and develop specialized centers for innovative research
in areas of periodontal health and disease;
9. To prepare students to successfully complete the American Board of Periodontology and
become Diplomats of the AAP;
10. To provide and serve the mission of the UIC College of Dentistry by providing student-
oriented educational program that prepares learners to engage in the evidence-supported,
thoughtful, ethical practice of dentistry; and also provides an environment for individual
growth founded on mutual respect.
Outcomes Assessment Measures
A. Postgraduate Periodontics Students should enter private practice or an academic position in

the specialty of Periodontics. This is assessed through use of an Alumni Survey that is mailed
to all Graduates of the program.
B. Postgraduate Periodontics Students should believe that adequate emphasis was given to
appropriate areas of the curriculum. This is assessed by an Exit Survey, completed by all
Graduates of the program.
4 Appendix U
C. Postgraduate Periodontics Students should pass the American Board of Periodontology
written and oral examination and become Diplomats of the American Board of
Periodontology. This is assessed through use of data from the AAP and ABP.
D. Postgraduate Periodontics Students must achieve a passing grade on the Fall Oral Exam,
Spring Final Oral Exam Case Presentation, Fall and Spring Written exams for the Classic
Literature Review, and the AAP In-Service Examination. This is assessed by reviewing grades
assigned to each student.
E. All Postgraduate Periodontics Students must complete a research project and
thesis/dissertation for those pursuing M.S. /Ph.D. Degree. This is assessed by recording the
award of the M.S. /Ph.D. degree.
F. All Postgraduate Periodontics Students must produce research suitable for publication in a
refereed journal.
G. All Postgraduate Periodontics Students must become clinically proficient. This is assessed by
the Program Director in consultation with the Department Head and Teaching and Research
Faculty.
Scope of Training
Instruction in the Postgraduate Periodontics Program consists of academic courses, clinical

training, experience in scientific methodology and research, and teaching experience. Didactic
instruction is provided in courses, as well as through small group seminars that allow for student
participation and interaction. Students gain experience in the treatment of patients with all types
of periodontal diseases and implant placement needs including sinus augmentation/block
graft/GBR procedures. In addition, each student gains the necessary experience in IV conscious
sedation to permit eligibility for a sedation license in states where a license or certificate is
required. Postgraduate Periodontics students provide complex periodontal treatments and interact
with restorative, orthodontics, endodontics, oral medicine, prosthodontics and oral and
maxillofacial surgery faculty and residents through joint seminars and joint treatment of complex
cases.
Postgraduate Periodontics students must initiate and complete a research project
during their three-year program under the supervision of the Periodontics or other faculty
in the University. Results of the research must be written in a form suitable for publication
in refereed journals. All work on the research and Master's degree must be completed
before the Certificate in Periodontics is awarded. Similarly, all work on the research and
Ph.D. degree must be completed before the Certificate in Periodontics is awarded.
Successful completion of didactic, clinical, teaching and research requirements leads to
the award of a Certificate in Periodontics. The specialty certificate is recognized by state boards
of dental examiners, the American Dental Association, the American Academy of
Periodontology and the American Board of Periodontology.
5 Appendix U
Periodontics’ Faculty
This section faculty consists of both full-time and part-time members, with advanced degrees
from a variety of different institutions:
Salvador Nares, DDS, Ph.D. Joseph Gluck, DDS

Department Head & Professor Clinical Assistant Professor of Periodontics
(312 4135787-; E-mail: snares@uic.edu (312) 996-7374; E-mail: gluck@uic.edu
Praveen Gajendrareddy, DDS. PhD Daniel A. Greenberg, DDS, BS

Director of Postgraduate Periodontics Associate Professor of Periodontics
Assistant Professor of Periodontics (312) 996-7374; E-mail greenber@uic.edu
(312) 413-8405; E-mail: praveen@uic.edu
Simona Katona, DDS
Saba M. Khan, DDS, MSD Clinical Assistant Professor of Periodontics
Clinical Assistant Professor (312) 996-7374; E-mail: skatona5@uic.edu
(312) 355-4004; E-mail: sabakhan@uic.edu
Seema S. Ashrafi, DDS, MS. Nadia Kawar, DDS, MS

Clinical Associate Professor Clinical Assistant Professor of Periodontics
Director, Predoctoral Periodontics (312) 996-7374; E-mail: kawarnad@uic.edu
(312) 996-2089; E-mail: Sashra3@uic.edu
Martin Kolinski, DDS
Bruce Abdullah, DDS (312) 996-7374; Email: mkolin@aol.com
Clinical Assistant Professor
(312) 996-7374; E-mail: babdulla@uic.edu Frank Maggio, DDS
Clinical Assistant Professor of Periodontics
Dorothy Anasinski, DDS (312) 996-7374; E-mail:
Clinical Assistant Professor maggiof@sbcglobal.net
(312)996-7374; E-mail:
dr.d.anasinski@netzero.net Zakaria Messieha, DDS
Clinical Associate Professor of Anesthesia
Charles DiFranco, DDS, MS E-mail: Messieha@uic.edu
(312) 996-7374; Nuha M. Nakib, DDS, MS
difrancoperio@sbcglobal.net; Clinical Associate Professor of Periodontics
(312) 355-0126; E-mail: nakib@uic.edu
Arnold Freeman, DDS
Clinical Assistant Professor
Alan Rosenfeld, DDS
(312) 996-7374; E-mail: freeman@uic.edu
David L. Gaston, DDS (312) 996-2089; E-mail: alanr@uic.edu
Clinical Associate Professor of Periodontics
(312) 996-7374; E-mail: Michael Schmerman, DDS
davelgaston@aol.com
(312) 996-2089; E-mail drkool@uic.edu
6 Appendix U
John Vickery, DDS
(312) 996-2089; E-mail: vickery@uic.edu
Keiko Watanabe, DDS, MS, PhD

Associate Professor of Periodontics
(312) 996-0636; E-mail: keiko@uic.edu
1 Appendix U
Program Staff
1. The Department has a full time Assistant to the Department Head, 1 full-time Secretary, 1
clinic manager, 1 front desk coordinator, four full-time Clinical Staff Assistants, and one clinical
dental hygienist. They are:
Mrs. Colleen Glascott, Business Administrative Associate
Ms. Mirria Evans Customer Service
Mrs. Sharon Arrigo, Clinic Coordinator
Ms. Maria Guzman, Front desk coordinator
Ms. Rebeca Abarca, Front Desk Coordinator
Ms. Fatima Hernandez, Dental Assistant II
Mrs. Stephanie Quevedo De La Cruz, Dental Assistant II
Mr. Ernesto Barrera, Dental Assistant II
Ms. Sierra Fields, Dental Assistant II
Mrs. Petra Skrickova, Dental Hygienist
2. Assistant to the Department Head. The Assistant to the Department Head has assigned duties
from the Department Head generally related to the administrative operation of the Department.
Secretarial assistance to postdoctoral students is not available.
3. Department Secretary. The Department Secretary has assigned duties from the Department
Head generally related to the administrative operation of the Department. Secretarial assistance to
postdoctoral students is not available.
4. Clinical Staff
a. Clinic Coordinator and front desk coordinator has assigned duties for administration and
logistical control of the clinical facility. This includes making appointments, reappointments,
taking cancellations for patients, routing messages related to patient care, management of patient
records, directing patients and/or their records to appropriate facilities (e.g., insurance, cashiers,
other Sections, etc.), configuring clinical hours and student availability each semester on the
computer, billing and collecting fees from patients and recording such transactions, as well as
greeting and signing-in patients in the reception area.
b. Clinical Staff Dental Assistant (clinic/dental assistant) has the assigned duties for
maintenance of the operation of the clinical facility. This includes monitoring infection control,
sterilization and monitoring of equipment, inventory and maintenance of clinic equipment and
supplies, ordering and stocking of expendable supplies, maintaining and insuring the cleanliness of
the clinic and X-ray, sterilization and plaster area, maintaining the automatic radiographic film
developer, preparing all instruments and expendable supplies for sterilization, supervising and
instructing dental student assistants related to infection control, operatory cleanliness, instrument
clean-up, and routine clinical procedures. Also, should the other Clinical Staff Dental Assistant or
2 Appendix U
Customer Service Representative be away from the area on routine duties, absent for personal,
sickness, etc., this person needs to assume as best available those duties.
4. Clinical Dental Hygienist. The clinical dental hygienists have the assigned duties for
periodontal maintenance to patients having received active periodontal therapy in the periodontal
clinic by former residents. The resident is responsible for periodontal maintenance of all new
patients throughout their three-year program. Other periodontal maintenance patients can be
treated in the service provided by the program dental hygienist as space permits.
Phone and Fax Numbers

Department Office 312-966-7239 FAX 312-966-0943
Graduate Periodontology Clinic 312-966-7374/1264 FAX 312-996-8878
Program Director 312-413-8405
Clinic Hours:
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday: 9:00AM to 4:30 PM.
Accreditation
Postgraduate Periodontics Program in the College of Dentistry at The University of Illinois at
Chicago is a full-time, three-year structured course, designated as Accreditation Eligible by the
Commission on Dental Accreditation of the American Dental Association and is fully accredited.
This program is designed to comply with the standards for Advanced Specialty Education
Programs in Periodontics approved by the Commission on Dental Accreditation of the American
Dental Association.
Program Director
The Program Director of the three-year Postgraduate Periodontics Program is charged to
implement and carry out all appropriate and necessary administrative policies. In addition, the
Program Director will serve as advisor and chief evaluator for all Postgraduate Periodontics
students. General program policies are worked out during scheduled meetings between the Program
Director, Department Head, and periodontics faculty. The Program Director acts as the Chair of the
Selection Advisory Committee.
Students or faculty may meet with the Program Director individually at any time to discuss
problems or propose new ideas to improve the quality of instruction. The Program Director is
responsible to the Department Head.
Program Schedule
An updated program schedule will be published at the beginning of each semester (Fall, Spring,
Summer), but a year-round schedule is available for long-range planning. This schedule is updated
as needed and a new schedule is distributed. The schedule is formulated during the monthly
meetings of the Program Director and Department Head.
3 Appendix U
Security
Entrance to School and Department: Postgraduate Periodontics Students are supplied with a key
card for entry into the College of Dentistry after/before normal working hours (e.g. evenings and
weekends). Some rooms are locked unless in use, however, a key is available to Postgraduate
Periodontics Students. It is the responsibility of each student to ensure that all offices, supply
cabinets and/or clinic areas are locked when they are the last to leave the area.
University Buildings and Property: University buildings and property must be respected at all
times. Seek advice from faculty or staff should a security problem exist during normal working
hours.
Personal Security: Postgraduate Periodontics Students, faculty and staff are responsible for their
own personal security including their possessions, materials and equipment.
Health Care
A student health policy is available to Postgraduate Periodontics Students. Students are required to
carry health insurance. All Postgraduate Periodontics Students will be enrolled and billed for the
University Student health insurance policy (details regarding this policy are available at the UIC
web site (http://www.uic.edu/hsc/campuscare/chicago).
Immunization Policy
Pre-Enrollment/Pre-Employment Immunization
The College of Dentistry Immunization Policy requires that all clinical staff (including dental
hygienists, dental assistants, and radiology technicians), clinical faculty, student-dentists and
residents (including clinical fellows), enrolled in any UIC/COD-sponsored dental educational
program conducted in any health-care facility participating in the program, and all visiting,
exchange or special-program clinical healthcare providers from other institutions to comply with
several immunization requirements as outlined in the Immunization form found at the end of this
section.
New clinical healthcare providers will preferably be in full compliance with this policy prior to
beginning their programs, but must be in full compliance within six months of beginning their
duties.
Immunizations against hepatitis B are provided free to all College employees who perform these
tasks. Arrangements for immunizations may be made at the Office of the Associate Dean for
Patient Services (room 301). The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recommends
that individuals be tested for the effectiveness of the immunization one to two months after the
immunization series is complete.
All clinical faculty and staff must participate in the annual TB testing program, which occurs
during the fall season. Please contact the University Health Service at (312) 996-7420
Inquiries about immunization against HBV should be addressed to the University Health
Service/Employees – (312) 996-7420 or Family Practice Clinic/Students (312) 996-2901.
4 Appendix U
Immunity to hepatitis B also confers immunity to hepatitis D. However, at present there is no
immunization against hepatitis C, which has similar modes of transmission and sequelae.
Therefore, immunization against hepatitis B should not lead one to be complacent about injuries
during patient treatment.
Immunization records for students will be kept by Student Records and the Office of Academic
Affairs. Immunization records for employees will be kept by University Health Services/ Office of
Clinical Affairs, COD.
The Office for Patient Services will issue official student immunization records via the University
Mediease database upon request.
5 Appendix U
Mandatory Medical Immunization Documentation Form
6 Appendix U
No Smoking Policy
Smoking is not permitted anywhere in the College of Dentistry. There are no designated smoking
areas within the College of Dentistry.
Parking
Parking is available in designated areas adjacent to the College of Dentistry. Students needing
parking can obtain a parking pass at the parking office (828 W. Wolcott). The student will be
billed monthly for the pass.
7 Appendix U
GENERAL PROGRAM POLICIES
Graduate students and duties
A. Postgraduate Periodontics Training Program Students

In general, the Department admits four students each year into the three-year Postgraduate Program
in Periodontics. Applications are accepted from May through August for admission the following
academic year. Students are selected for an interview following application from which an
evaluation is made of their academic credentials (didactic and clinical transcripts, to include GPA),
letters and evaluation forms of reference, National Board Test scores, and individual biographical
sketch to include career goals, and appraisal of extracurricular contributions. Interviewed students
meet with all available full-time faculty and current postdoctoral students to receive all pertinent
information about the program as well as to be further evaluated personally as to their candidacy.
Following the interview process, applicants are ranked for acceptance and notified on a rolling
admission basis. Acceptance letters to each successful applicant inform and contain the specifics
of the program, financial costs (e.g., instruments, books, copy services, photography, licenses,
dues, etc.), and expectations. A formal letter of understanding and acceptance into the program is
required from each successful applicant.
B. Graduate Student Status

The Admissions Office of the Graduate School of the University also reviews each application to
the Postgraduate Periodontics Program. This review is made to admit the applicant as a
postgraduate student and accept the student as a candidate for an advanced degree (if applicable).
Additionally the review establishes residency status, English-speaking capability and visa
requirements for international students, acceptability for appointment as a Graduate
Teaching/Research Assistant, and review of academic credentials. All Postgraduate Periodontics
students accepted into one of the combined programs must be accepted into the Graduate School as
a graduate student. Additionally, students registered as graduate students are subject to all rules and
regulations for graduate students as promulgated by the Graduate School and as defined in the
Graduate School Handbook, which contains the policies, rules, procedures, and general information
affecting all graduate programs.
C. Student Progress
Currently the College of Dentistry and the University conduct the academic program on a semester
system of 17 weeks of instruction in the Fall and Spring Terms and 12 weeks in the Summer Term.
Therefore, graduate students will receive following each semester period a letter grade indicating
their achievement in registered courses undertaken based upon the results of an examination and/or
some form of evaluation as, determined by the course director. In order to retain full graduate
student standing, a GPA of 3.0 (scale of 4.0) or better in each course needs to be attained.
Additionally, reasonable progress toward program requirements also need be demonstrated. Grades
of record for graduate students are A, B and F. There are no pluses or minuses awarded. Should a
resident receive a final grade of C or less in any course, the student will be placed on academic
8 Appendix U
probation and an action plan of remediation is developed, by the Program Director, and
successfully completed by the resident. A student placed on probation who does not successfully
remediate the deficiency by the end of the next semester may be dismissed from the University.
Additionally, the Postgraduate Periodontics Program Director will periodically discuss with
each student their clinical progress based upon direct observation, input from attending faculty and
staff as well as monitoring their timely progress toward the achievement of an advanced degree (if
student is seeking a degree). Semester clinical grades will be based on four factors:
1. Accountability-the timely, accurate, reliable and quality execution of tasks assigned by
periodontal faculty or chief resident.
2. Punctuality- attending clinical activities at assigned times and being on time for such
activities. Unexcused absences are not tolerated.
3. Clinic utilization-effective use of clinic time for patient treatment. Feedback on clinical
progress will come from the Program Director.
4. Clinical skills-demonstration of clinical skills leading to proficiency. Timeliness and
thoroughness of patient treatment will also be monitored.
Postgraduate Periodontics students will be reviewed after the Fall, Spring and Summer Semesters
with an annual review as part of the Spring evaluation. The semester evaluation will take into
consideration the student’s clinical grades, didactic grades and research performance. A course
grade of “B” or better denotes acceptable progress during any semester. The “A” grade is reserved
for students who have extraordinary skills and/or made significant contributions of time and effort
in graduate clinic activities, including assisting the Program Director or clinic staff during times of
manpower shortages, or otherwise contributing to the improvement of the program.
D. Student Duties
Students are expected to conduct themselves in a professional manner at all times. This includes
their demeanor, dress and interactions with faculty, staff and patients.
It is the student's responsibility to ensure that all patients are seen in a timely manner and
confirming the completeness of treatment and/or supportive periodontal therapy. The front desk
coordinator will make and confirm all appointments with student guidance and input. Broken
and/or canceled appointments are generally beyond control; however, each student should attempt
to develop a patient pool to be called for treatment on short notice when such openings occur (front
desk coordinator(s) will assist).
Students are reminded that completion of the clinical specialty-training program is coupled with
award of an advanced degree and/or completion of a research project. Therefore research time has
been scheduled for this purpose. Failure to make use of this time appropriately may jeopardize a
student's expected completion date.
Graduate Student Research

Completion of the combined Postgraduate Training Program may be coupled with receipt of an
advanced degree from the Graduate School of the College/University. Graduate students pursuing
a degree will follow a traditional route towards a M.S. or Ph.D. degree which includes a research
component and either a thesis or dissertation. Postgraduate Periodontics students pursuing the
9 Appendix U
Certificate only, will also be required to complete a research project. All students will be required
to prepare a manuscript suitable for publication.
To assist these students to progress in their research requirement in a timely fashion, the
Department has developed a timetable to be followed, which includes requirements and deadlines
for accomplishment. In addition to the deadlines outlined below, all students will have yearly
research committee meetings to formally discuss progress in their research projects and submit
update reports to Drs. Gajendrareddy, Watanabe, and Nares. Dr. Keiko Watanabe, as the Director
of Periodontal Graduate Research, will be responsible for assigning research grades. Students
should make all attempts to accomplish these goals and progress well in advance of the indicated
deadlines, as follows:
1st year
9/9, 9/11 Select mentor and committee members.
Meet with your committee and start writing protocol
9/15-12/15 Meet with your committee, revise protocol
1/15 Submit finalized protocol with your primary advisor’s signature to Dr. Gajendrareddy and Dr.
Watanabe. IRB/ACC must be approved by this date if applicable. Start data
collection/experiments.
nd
2 year:
8/1Meet with your committee and discuss your progress. First written progress report is due by
this date. Submit it to the committee and to Dr. Gajendrareddy and Dr. Watanabe.
12/1Meet with your committee. Submit the second progress report to Dr. Gajendrareddy and Dr.
Watanabe. Finish data collection/experiments and start data analysis.
rd
3 year:
9/1 Complete data analysis, meet with your committee and start writing thesis.
Make revisions as necessary.
12/15 Complete thesis and schedule thesis defense date.
2/15 Revised thesis should be completed and a final copy submitted to the Graduate School for
binding. Manuscript submission.
One manuscript suitable for publication (as determined by your Committee, and Drs. Gajendrareddy, Watanabe and Nares) is required for
program completion
Semester grades (S/U) are given for research efforts. Two U grades will place the student on
probation, and any deficiencies will need to be corrected prior to advancement in the program.
Three U grades for research activities will require additional semesters to complete program
requirements. The periodontics certificate will not be awarded until the research component of the
program is completed.
Policy for Extramural Practice

The Department has established the policy that extramural practice by Postgraduate
Periodontics Students is highly discouraged. The rationale for this policy is formulated from
10 Appendix U
the concept that the advanced clinical specialty-training program is a thirty-four month
rigorous program. In that respect, each student should be sufficiently career-minded to
direct all available energy and time to fulfilling the educational goals of specialty training
without the distraction of an outside practice.
Attendance Requirements, Time Off and Absence Notification Policies

The Postgraduate Periodontics Program is a 33-month program. Attendance throughout the entire
term of the program is required with full participation in all aspects of the courses. The program
generally follows the schedule of the College of Dentistry to observe holidays and time off except
during the College of Dentistry summer schedule when Postgraduate Periodontics will be in
continuous session. Monday – Friday 8AM – 4:30PM (at a minimum) residents are expected to be
involved with one of the following activities:
-Patient care in the PG Perio clinic- either on your own patient, or assisting and/or observing care
provide by another resident
- In class
- Working on your research project
- Teaching in the predoctoral clinic
A. Personal leave Policy. Each graduate student is permitted to take personal leave in any
academic year. In addition, the Periodontics clinic will be closed for winter break between the fall
and spring semesters, spring break (to coincide with the predoctoral students’ break), and a week in
August to coincide with the first week the predoctoral students are off. Vacation days will not be
used for these breaks.
1) Personal days: All residents will receive personal days off on the basis of need.
Procedure for requesting vacation (personal leave) days: 1) Fill out a leave request form 2) Submit
form to Clinic coordinator and Dr. Gajendrareddy for approval.
2) Vacation days should not be taken when classes/seminars are scheduled. In cases of special need
(e.g., family illness, weddings, etc.), exceptions may be granted but you must first obtain
permission from the course director and Dr. Gajendrareddy. Do not make travel arrangements
(hotel, air, etc.) before approval of vacation days.
3) You are expected to be physically present, in or around the Department of Periodontics (so we
can find you if necessary and, for example, help with emergencies), Monday through Friday, at
least between the hours of 9:00AM and 4:30PM (often earlier or later depending on class schedules
or other activities). You must let clinic coordinator know where you are and how you can be
reached if you plan to be away from the Department. Any unexcused absence will be counted as
vacation time.
4) The Periodontics clinic will be closed for the winter break between the fall and spring semesters,
the spring break (to coincide with the predoctoral break), and a week in August to coincide with the
first week the predoctoral students are off. Vacation days will not be used for these breaks.
11 Appendix U
5) General policies regarding vacation days
- All requested vacation days should follow the procedure outlined in #1 above
- Vacation days should be scheduled so as not to interfere with course work and other
educational aspects of the program
- You are required to arrange for coverage of your clinic teaching days during vacation time
(trade with other residents) and advise clinic coordinator and Drs. Gajendrareddy and
Ashrafi of the schedule changes
- Days spent interviewing for jobs and similar activities will count as vacation days
- Vacation days should be scheduled at least 30 days in advance
- The Department Head will serve as final arbiter in all questions and matters related to
interpretation of this policy
B. Sick Leave. Students who are sick for any reason should notify the department
secretary as soon as possible. Sicknesses requiring more than 3 days absence require a letter from
a physician as a condition to return to classes and clinics. In each instance the amount of time
absent due to sickness/injury will be recorded and any abuse or protracted time incurred will be
evaluated for consideration for extension of the program or dismissal. Time off for maternity leave
or absences for extended illness will be added to the program so that the total program commitment
equals 36 months. A maximum of 15 days per year of sick leave will be allowed. If more than 15
days of sick leave are taken, the graduate student may be considered not to have fulfilled the
requirements for graduation from the program. The Program Director in consultation with the
Department Head will make the final determination of how this situation will be resolved.
C. Emergency Leave. Emergencies, such as a death in the family, hospitalization of a
child, etc., arise from time to time and necessitate absence from the program. This will be
considered personal leave subject to the limitations of that section.
D. Professional Leave. Students who are invited to present results of research at major
regional, national and/or international meetings may attend at the Department's discretion without
utilizing personal days. Additionally, all students are encouraged to attend the Annual Meeting of
the American Academy of Periodontology. A leave form must be completed indicating that the
student is off campus on approved leave.
E. Holidays. All students will receive the official holidays as annually designated by the
University. However, any closures of the main dental clinic for predoctoral students (e.g., to take
National Boards, NERBS, competency exams, study periods, etc.) will not apply to closure of the
Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic unless notification is made by the Program Director.
Professional Memberships
All Postgraduate Periodontics Students are required to join the American Academy of
Periodontology. Students are encouraged to join the Midwest Academy of Periodontology and the
Illinois Society of Periodontist. Postgraduate Periodontics Students qualify for student membership
rates while enrolled in the program. Active participation in national, regional and state
organizations is important for professional development.
12 Appendix U
The University of Illinois at Chicago Identification Card
Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student is required to carry a University of Illinois at Chicago
Student Identification card. This card is necessary to use many of the UIC facilities including the
library and all sports facilities. Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student must be present in person to
obtain this card.
State of Illinois Dental License

Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student must hold an Illinois Dental License or an Illinois
Temporary Dental Training License that can be issued on credentials. A license should be obtained
prior to arrival at UIC. It is the responsibility of each Postgraduate Periodontics Student to obtain
this license. No patient contact can occur without a valid Illinois license.
Graduate Periodontics “Chief Resident”

Each year, the Program Director will select a Chief Resident to assist in effective communication
between the Graduate Periodontics Students and the Program Director. This duty carries direct
responsibilities to ensure efficient, productive and professional attention to matters within the
Graduate Periodontics Program. The Chief Resident has the authority to make student assignments,
schedule seminars, and is the first resource for clinic protocols and/or program difficulties.
The Chief Resident will be responsible for the following duties:

a. Inform, as necessary, any changes in seminar, lecture, teaching, or clinic schedules.
b. Make necessary arrangements for special seminars, lectures, and conferences.
c. Represent the primary source of communication between the postdoctoral students and
the Department faculty and staff. Serve as a liaison between staff, undergraduate
students, residents, and faculty. Problems or concerns should be brought to the attention
of the program director.
d. Each resident is responsible to be on-call for his/her own patients. If a resident will be out
of town, coverage will be arranged by that resident and the chief will be informed of such
coverage.
e. Assist the program director in the planning and implementation of tasks and projects
relevant to the function and operation of the program.
f. Work in unison with clinic customer service coordinator on the day-to-day management
of the graduate clinic.
g. Monitor clinic attendance, inform the director of attendance concerns for residents and
staff.
h. Assist the Program Director in the efficient management of the graduate clinic.
i. Attend all Department faculty meetings as required.
j. Arrange meetings with representatives from proprietary companies as approved by the
Department Head/Program Director.
Continuing Education Program

13 Appendix U
Students are encouraged to attend various outside seminars, lectures and approved courses. When
funds are available, the Postgraduate Periodontics Program may be able to assist in registration and
travel costs.
Hosting Invited Speakers

The Program Director will appoint a postgraduate periodontics student to host and assist invited
speakers. The host will ensure that the seminar/lecture room is set up in advance to meet the
requirements of the presenter. It is important to contact the guest lecturer in advance to determine
their specific requirements. A reading list should be recommended to familiarize all students with
the topic. At the conclusion of the seminar or lecture, the host will formally thank the presenter.
Visits of Commercial Representatives

During the course of the Postgraduate Periodontics Program, sales representatives from various
commercial companies/suppliers are permitted to make presentations with prior approval of the
Program Director. These visits must be scheduled well in advance and ensure that there will be no
conflicts with the program schedule. These presentations are usually arranged during the lunch
break and scheduled in one of the available conference rooms. Lunch is permitted during the
meeting, which must end in adequate time to ensure a prompt start to seminars, lectures or patient
appointments.
PROFESSIONAL AND ETHICAL CONDUCT
A clinical dress code has been established for all College of Dentistry students, faculty and staff in
order to present a positive professional image and to satisfy requirements for personal safety and
compliance with infection control principles and OSHA regulations. This will also increase the
confidence of patients in the care they will receive by our practitioners.
Please be aware that specific PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) AND INFECTION
CONTROL GUIDELINES SUPERSEDE DRESS CODE GUIDELINES UNDER CERTAIN
SITUATIONS.
Please consult the UIC/COD Infection Control Manual for details at:
http://intranet/clinics/chairside/ for details.
The clinical dress code applies to all clinics, and laboratories, according to the guidelines listed
below:
1. Clinical and laboratory dress MUST conform to applicable safety and infection control
regulations (see http://intranet/clinics/chairside/ for details). Proper personal protective equipment
must be worn when providing patient care or simulated patient care or any time there is a potential
of exposure to blood or body fluids and the protective equipment must be disposed of in the proper
waste receptacle after use. Personal protective equipment includes: disposable clinic coat, gloves,
face mask and eye protection. NOTE: Fluid resistant gowns will be worn over the scrubs or
professional attire during patient care or any time there is a potential of exposure to blood or body
fluids.
14 Appendix U
2. Personal protective equipment is not to be worn outside of the patient care or pre-patient care
facilities. PPE is NOT to be worn in other areas of the building (elevators, stairs, lobby, restrooms,
offices, etc.).
Students: surgical scrubs must be worn. Scrubs must be clean, unwrinkled and of materials
typically used in a health care setting. An appropriate solid color tee shirt should be worn under the
scrub top. Scrubs can NOT be substituted for approved PPE.
Faculty: due to the possibility of University and/or College administrative meetings; in lieu of
scrubs (as defined above), “business casual” clothing or better may be worn. “Business casual”
includes trousers/slacks for men and women or for women the option of wearing skirts or dresses.
“Polo-style” knit shirts or dressier wear are acceptable for tops. All clothing must be professional
in appearance and materials.
3. Clean socks or hose and shoes are required. Shoes must be professional in appearance. Athletic-
style footwear may be worn with scrubs. Sandals and other open-toed footwear are NOT
acceptable.
4. Hair, beards and mustaches must be clean and neat. Hair should be secured in such a way that it
would be out of the operating field.
5. The following attire is considered unacceptable: Jeans, t-shirts, tank tops, bare midriffs,
sweatshirts, stretch pants or leggings. Footwear that is dirty, torn or obviously designed for beach
wear or outdoor use, or that presents a safety hazard. Hats (other than surgical caps or religious
headwear). Cosmetics and colognes may be worn to a degree appropriate to the expected amount of
patient and visitor contact and with consideration for peers. Wear the least possible amount of
jewelry with respect to safe patient care and personal ability to perform the functions of the job.
6. Chewing gum is not permitted in patient care areas.
7. Maintain good personal and oral hygiene.
Professional Conduct
Professional treatment requires a standard of behavior that will encourage patient acceptance and
cooperation. Professional conduct and appearance of all individuals involved in patient treatment
is essential to maintain standards of excellence in the College of Dentistry.
Attitude to faculty, staff, colleagues, pre-doctoral students and patients must be professional,
courteous and complimentary at all times. The form of address should always be by title, especially
in the presence of patients. It is prudent to verbally acknowledge service or effort in a positive
manner.
Ethical Conduct
15 Appendix U
Postgraduate Periodontics Students must conduct themselves in a professional manner at all times
in their relationships with patients and with one another. Unprofessional conduct will result in the
loss of the patient's confidence, hinder patient treatment and may require a counseling session from
a faculty member. Continued unprofessional conduct can result in the dismissal from the program.
Disciplinary Actions
There should be no cases of disciplinary action due to the highly selective nature of the admissions
process. Professionals of such high caliber should never place themselves in a situation that will
require disciplinary action. Failure to follow program guidelines or policies, failure to perform
didactic assignments in a timely fashion, poor attendance or frequent late arrival for courses or
clinic, or failure to maintain proper standards of professionalism in the clinic can result in
suspension or dismissal from the program. Suspension from the program is to serve as a stern
warning that unacceptable behavior must be altered if the postgraduate periodontics student is to
continue training in the Postgraduate Periodontics Program at the University of Illinois at Chicago.
Suspension is at the discretion of the Program Director, Department Head, or the Associate for
Clinical Affairs and, if readmitted, any periods of suspension will be added on at the end of the
program to ensure a full 33 months of enrollment. All suspensions will be preceded by a letter
warning to the postgraduate periodontics student to correct unacceptable behavior or suspension
from the program may result if there are further infractions. Some offences may require an
immediate suspension; a letter will accompany such a suspension.
Matriculation into the periodontal postgraduate program at The University of Illinois at
Chicago carries numerous responsibilities for education as well as teaching and patient care.
Postgraduate students in Periodontics are responsible for following the rules and regulations of The
University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry, Graduate School and Department of
Periodontology. In regard to a student receiving postgraduate education in the Department of
Periodontics, the Program Director, in consultation with the faculty, will consider the following
criteria as a reason to loose one or more privileges or possible expulsion from the program:
1) Cheating.
2) Plagiarism.
3) Disruptive behavior (e.g., yelling, screaming, cursing, fighting, etc.) in the College of
Dentistry.
4) Abuse, neglect or abandonment of patients.
5) Sexual harassment.
6) Consistent failure to follow instructions from faculty.
7) Consistent failure of the student to take responsibility for his/her actions.
8) Frequent tardiness and/or absences to class, clinic and Department activities.
9) Insubordination.
10) Insufficient progress (example 2 course grades of F)
11) Insufficient research progress (example letter grade of U for research for 2 semesters).
12) Failure to comply with the rules and regulations listed in the “Program Manual for
Postgraduate Periodontics”, “The University of Illinois at Chicago Graduate School
Handbook” and policies and regulations of the College of Dentistry.
16 Appendix U
UIC College of Dentistry Policy on Dissemination of Examinations
For the purposes of this policy the terms “examinations”, “tests”, “quizzes” are synonymous.
1. Tests and quizzes should not be posted on bulletin boards or otherwise physically displayed.
Instructors who wish to make tests and quizzes available to students must post them on
Blackboard.
2. Consistent with university policy, instructors must allow students to review tests they have
taken. Exams may be reviewed only under supervision to avoid dissemination, or by posting
answers on Blackboard so they are systemically made available.
3. Any attempt by students to copy current test material without the knowledge of the instructor is
cheating.
4. Any dissemination of current test material obtained without the knowledge of the instructor, or
other material obtained or disseminated without authorization, by any means, including
electronically, is cheating. It is a particularly serious violation if a group of students conspire to
acquire test information without the instructor’s knowledge.
Graduate Teaching Assistantships (GTA)

The GTA is extremely important; not only as an invaluable learning tool, but also in the
relationship the Periodontics Department has within the college. Postgraduate Periodontics
students represent the Department each time they interact with other faculty, staff, pre-doctoral
students and patients and therefore need to take this responsibility very seriously.
GTA’s are:
1) Granted on a year by year basis
2) Available for no more than 33 months (exceptions may be made for postdoctoral
fellows and Ph.D. candidates if funds are available)
3) Primary responsibility is to teach on assigned dates (the only exception are any hospital
or other off site rotations). Unless approved by the Program Director or Department
Head, teaching assignments take precedence over all other activities in the clinic. In
any semester, students may be assigned to teach up to 1 full day per week. In the final
semester of the third year, teaching responsibilities may be increased due to shrinking
patient care and research responsibilities
4) The OFFICIAL SCHEDULE for teaching assignments is the one posted in the
department office. This is the schedule that has to be followed. Any conflicts between
the official teaching schedule and the graduate student’s schedule will be resolved in
favor of the official schedule. No changes can be made to the official schedule without
prior notification of and approval by the Program Director and/or Department Head and
Predoctoral Periodontics Clinical Director.
With regard to a student receiving a graduate teaching assistantship (GTA) in the

Department of Periodontics, the following are criteria that may result in the loss of GTA:
1) Frequent absence or tardiness in comprehensive care clinics when scheduled to teach.
17 Appendix U
2) Poor teaching performance (e.g., unfamiliarity with principles of periodontology, poor
clinical techniques, berating students, ignoring students or patients, unprofessional
behavior) in comprehensive care clinics as reported by students, patients, clinic
coordinator and Director of Periodontal Pre-doctoral Program and/or post-
graduate periodontal clinics as reported by attending faculty.
3) Refusal to teach in an assigned pre-doctoral clinic.
4) Behavior listed under Disciplinary Actions.
Grievance Policy
This Postgraduate Periodontics Program will follow the general rules of the College of Dentistry
regarding student grievances. Prior to filing a complaint with the Dean, students MUST first talk
to the Postgraduate Periodontics Chief Resident (if the concern involves an issue the student does
not wish to share with a peer he/she may choose to bring the concern to the Program Director first),
Program Director, then Department Head to find a solution at the lowest level possible. If the issue
cannot be resolved at the Program level then it should be pursued at the Department level and
finally at the College level. If the problem is still unresolved the student should consult the
University of Illinois at Chicago Graduate Manual about filing a grievance.
FACILITIES
Libraries
1. UIC Science Library

The UIC Science Library is located at: 845 W Taylor Street, Chicago, IL 60607, Phone: (312) 996-
5396. The Science Library houses books and journals in chemistry, physics, and the biological and
geological sciences, as well as indexing and abstracting journals, and reference works. Special
collections include the Sadtler Research Laboratories Standard Spectra Collections (IR, NMR, UV,
C-13) and The U.S. Geological Survey reports for the U.S., Midwestern states, and Canada.
Materials may be found by using UICCAT (the University Library's on-line catalog) on
workstations in the library or through remote access over the campus computer network. UICCAT
also permits searching of UIC's government documents collection and Illinet Online, a consortium
of over forty Illinois libraries. Science Library workstations are connected to the Internet and
provide access for UIC-affiliated users to hundreds of databases and thousands of electronic
journals. The Library's web pages also provide a gateway to numerous other research library
catalogs including those of the Big Ten and the University of Chicago. Chemical information may
be located using SciFinder Scholar (Chemical Abstracts) and the Beilstein (organic chemistry) and
Gmelin (inorganic chemistry) databases. Both these chemical databases are searching using client
software that is installed on Science Library public workstations.
3. Periodontal Conference Room
18 Appendix U
The Department of Periodontology maintains a Conference Room for the convenience of
Department faculty and students in which are contained bound and current issues of the major
journals related to Periodontology. Additionally, computer facilities located within the Department
allow faculty and students to perform literature searches through the Internet, Medline, and the
National Library of Medicine facilities. At no time, should journals or texts be removed from the
Conference Room except to photocopy an article.
PROGRAM FEES AND REQUIRED PURCHASES
Program Costs
The primary program costs are instruments (approximately $3000.00), purchase of a clinical
camera (approximately $2000.00), a computer, magnifying telescopic loops 2.5X ($1000.00) and
required books. Other University fees associated with health care, registration and graduation are
required and are approximately $1200.00/semester.
Tuition
A tuition waiver is granted for all residents who matriculated in the program prior to 2013 and
completing the program on schedule. If, due to academic performance, the student must complete
additional semesters beyond that scheduled for his/her program, tuition may not be waived.
Postgraduate Compensation Program (For Residents Matriculating in 2013 and after)

See document “Postgraduate Compensation Program Effective July I, 2013-June 30, 2014”
Equipment and Books Required for the Program

Clinical Camera and Equipment
Postgraduate Periodontics Students must provide their own clinical digital camera. The program
specifies which system must be purchased to ensure standardization among all Postgraduate
Periodontics Students. Contact the Program Director for additional information. Approximate
cost is $2000. In addition, the periodontal instruments will cost approximately $3000, including
both high and low speed handpieces.
Computer
A laptop computer is a required purchase for all Postgraduate Periodontics Students. Presently,
here is what you need...
For a PC:
15.4 inch Wide Screen WXGA+
Intel Core i5 or above
4 GB of RAM or above
Windows 7 Professional
256MB Video Memory
250GB Hard Drive 7200RPM (Laptop users tend to need larger hard drives than desktop users)
DVD+/-RW
19 Appendix U
VGA Webcam w/microphone
Wireless 802.11 a/g/n
MS Office
Anti-Virus/Spyware Protection is a MUST (Webroot or Symantec are good)
For an Apple:
Get the BEST MacBook Pro. 4GB of memory min, MS Office
Books
Essential reference texts and books are required of all entering Postgraduate Periodontics
Students. A list of required books is located in the following section of this manual.
Required Books
It is important for each Graduate Periodontics Student to have a reference library of essential
periodontal texts. Other texts or references pertinent to clinical treatment should also be readily
available for consultation. Books considered essential are listed below. Less frequently used texts
and references are available at the Medical Center Bookstore.
1. Carranza‘s Clinical Periodontology, 11th edition, 2011.

2. Rose, Mealy, Genco, & Cohen, Periodontics: Medicine, Surgery, and Implants, 2004,
Mosby, Inc.
3. Stuart J. Froum. Dental Implant Complications: Etiology, Prevention, and Treatment, 2010.
4. Malamed, S. Sedation, A Guide to Patient Management, Fifth Edition, Mosby, 2010.
5. Rose, et al, Internal Medicine for Dentistry, Mosby, Second Edition 1990.
6. Misch, Contemporary Implant Dentistry, Third Edition, Mosby, 2008
7. Stoelting, Basics of Anesthesia. Fifth Edition, Elsevier, 2006
8. Dubin, ECG Interpretation. Sixth Edition, Cover Publishing Company; 2004
REQUIREMENTS FOR GRADUATION
Graduation Requirements
Upon the recommendation of the Program Director and Periodontics Faculty, and approval of the
faculty and Dean of The University of Illinois at Chicago, College of Dentistry, a Certificate of
Advanced Training in Periodontics will be awarded to each student completing the following
requirements:
A. Demonstration of academic (cumulative GPA 3.0 or better) and clinical proficiency in

the field of periodontics.
B. Passing grades on the Fall Oral Exam, Final Case Presentation (ABP format), Classic
Literature written exams, and the In-Service Examination in the third year 65th percentile
20 Appendix U
C. Satisfactory completion of case and procedure requirements; including 20 intravenous
sedation cases.
D. Satisfactory completion of all required courses.
E. Completion of a M.S. or Ph.D. degree (if student is in a degree program), including
thesis/dissertation defense and bound thesis/dissertation delivered to the Department
Secretary, as well as completion and submission of a manuscript suitable for publication
in a referred journal; the manuscript must be ready to submit for publication to complete
the program. Students pursuing the Certificate only will be required to prepare a
manuscript suitable for publication in a referred journal.
F. Delay of completion of Program completion:
1-1st semester: no fee or tuition, no stipend, no responsibilities to Department.
2-Every semester thereafter: no stipend, must teach in Predoc Clinics, must apply for 3
credit hours, pay tuition and fee.
POSTGRADUATE PERIODONTICS PROGRAM

COURSE LISTING
Required Courses
Course No. Title Credit Hrs

First Year
Fall
Peri 620 Periodontics clinic 10-20 Cred
Orientation to Postgraduate Periodontics
Peri 611 Classic Periodontal literature review 3 Cred
Peri 613 Current Periodontal literature Seminar 1Cred
Peri 620 Periodontics Clinic 10-20 Cred
Peri 630 Periodontal Treatment Planning/Therapy Seminar 1Cred
Prosth 614 Implant Literature Review Seminar 1 Cred
Basic Implantology Seminar
Prosth 613 Implant Diagnosis and Treatment Planning Seminar 1 Cred
Osci 451 Research Methodology 1 Cred
Osci594 Biostatistics 3Cred
Peri 698 Directed Research 4-8 Cred
(8 credits minimum earned over the three-year program for Research)
Spring
21 Appendix U
Prosth 618 Implant Literature Review Seminar 1 Cred
Basic Implantology Seminar
Peri 698 Directed Research 4-8 Cred
Omds 615 Anesthesia and Pain Control (15 clock hours) 1 Cred
An544 Advanced Craniofacial Anatomy 3Cred
Ortd667 Adult Orthodontics, Perio-Prosth Relationships 2 Cred
Second Year
Summer
Omds 617 Radiology for the Dental Specialist 1 Cred
Fall
Osci 598 Directed Research 4-8 Cred
Clinical Conscious Sedation

(minimum 20 cases, with competency exam)
Principles of Conscious Sedation

/Medicine/Pharmacology (didactic) 3 Cred
(45 clock hours fall-spring arranged)
Spring
Omds 503 Oral Pathology 2 Cred
Hstl506 Immunology 2 Cred
Principles of Conscious Sedation
/Medicine/Pharmacology (didactic) 3 Cred
(45 clock hours fall-spring arranged)
22 Appendix U
Third Year
Summer
Third Year
Fall
Spring
OSCI 598 Directed Research 4-8 Cred

Given every other year taken once in the program:

Behavioral sciences/Pt. Mngmt/Ethics Seminar 1 Cred
Practice Management 1 Cred
Alternates every other year, taken by first and 2nd year residents
Osci581 Advanced Oral Sciences I 2 Cred
Osci581 Advanced Oral Sciences II 2 Cred
Elective classes for Postgraduate Periodontics
The Program director, the student’s research advisor, and student will determine the appropriate
courses for each resident based on their individual needs and to meet the minimum requirements
for the Master’s program if applicable. Students that are candidates for the MS in oral sciences
degree must also have a total of 32 credits of 400 & 500 level courses 9 of which need to be 500
level.
23 Appendix U
Case requirements for Certificate in Periodontics:
A total of 28 documented cases on 28 separate patients must be completed for certification. Each
resident must compile these cases together with indicated supporting and follow-up data and
information. The cases should demonstrate comprehensive cases ranging from ADA type I to IV
classifications & treatment modalities. Case documentation should be in a ‘power-point’ with
‘case-summary’ included in the slides.
I. Full cases (5): Non-surgical & surgical case combinations:

A minimum of five full cases with initial therapy done by the resident him/herself. Following
documentation must be provided:
i. Initial therapy: Full mouth pre-operative photos, full mouth x-rays and *complete
periodontal charting.
ii. 4-6 weeks re-evaluation: Full mouth photos, *complete periodontal charting.
iii. Phase 2 therapy: At least two quadrants of periodontal surgeries. The surgeries should
be documented with photos demonstrating pre-operative, incisions, flaps reflected,
after degranulation, post osseous or graft in place, membrane in place, sutures.
iv. 1-2 weeks follow-up: Demonstrated by clinical photos.
v. 6 months post-operative follow-up: Clinical photos & *complete periodontal charting.
vi. Periodontal maintenance: At least two periodontal maintenances performed by the
resident and documented with *complete periodontal charting.
vii. One year follow-up: Full mouth photos, updated bite-wings & necessary peri-apical x-
rays, *complete periodontal charting.
II. Full case (1): Non-surgical case:

A minimum of one non-surgical case with following documentation must be provided:
i. Initial therapy: Full mouth pre-operative photos, full mouth x-rays and *complete
periodontal charting.
ii. 4-6 weeks re-evaluation: Full mouth photos, *complete periodontal charting.
iii. Periodontal maintenance: At least two periodontal maintenances performed by the resident
and documented with *complete periodontal charting.
iv. One year follow up: Full mouth photos, *complete periodontal charting.
III. Periodontal surgical cases (10):

Ten periodontal surgical cases must include a full mouth initial therapy done by either the
resident or another student, followed by at least one surgery done by the resident.
i. Initial visit: Full mouth photos, *complete periodontal charting, full mouth x-rays.
ii. Surgery: At least one quadrant of periodontal surgery. The surgeries should be
documented with photos demonstrating pre-operative, incisions, flaps reflected, after
degranulation, post osseous or graft and/or membrane in place, sutures.
iii. 1-2 weeks follow-up: Demonstrated by clinical photos.
iv. 6 months post-operative follow-up: Clinical photos & *complete periodontal charting.
24 Appendix U
v. One year follow up: Full mouth photos, updated bite-wings & necessary peri-apical x-
rays, *complete periodontal charting.
IV. Limited or prescription surgeries (6):

Six periodontal surgical cases must include limited or prescription surgeries such as orthodontic
cuspid exposure, soft tissue grafting, gingivectomy and GTR. Crown lengthening (except
esthetic crown lengthening), distal wedge and osseous surgery cannot be included in this.
Documentation should include:
i. Initial visit: Photos (limited to the surgical site/quadrant only) that will include: pre-
operative, incision design, flaps opened (if any), graft placed, sutures. Periodontal
charting limited to the surgical site/ quadrant.
ii. 2 weeks follow-up: Limited photos.
iii. 3 month follow-up: Limited photos & periodontal charting.
V. Implant surgical cases (6):

Six implant surgical cases, with implants placed following site development or sinus lift
performed by the resident. Documentation should include:
i. Pre-operative: Limited photos, limited periodontal charting and peri-apical x-ray.
ii. Surgery: Photos limited to the surgical site/quadrant including pre-operative, incision
design, flaps, GBR / sinus window, implant placed, graft placed, sutures.
iii. 2 weeks follow-up: Photos.
iv. 3 month follow-up and/ uncovery: Limited photos & periodontal charting.
v. One year follow-up: Limited photos, periodontal charting and peri-apical radiograph.
*Complete periodontal charting: Periodontal charting with periodontal probing depths, clinical attachment levels, bleeding on
probing, plaque index, mobility, furcation, mucogingival junction location.
Submission schedule:
All cases must be submitted to the ‘S’ drive utilizing the following schedule:
Year Date PowerPoint presentation complete for:

1st May 1st i. 1 combination case with complete initial therapy and in maintenance
ii. 1 non-surgical case through initial therapy
iii. 3 periodontal surgeries (without initial therapy) and in maintenance
iv. 2 prescription surgery cases
v. 2 implant cases (1st stage: site preservation/sinus lift)
2nd May 1st i. Year 1 requirements plus
ii. 2 more combination cases with surgeries and in maintenance (total 3)
iii. Continue 1 non-surgical case in maintenance (total 1)
iv. 4 more periodontal surgeries (without initial therapy) and in maintenance
(total 7)
v. 2 more prescription surgery cases (total 4)
vi. 2 more implant cases (2 cases at 1st stage, with 2 cases completed w/ 2nd
stage: total 4)
3rd Jan1st/May i. Year 2 requirements plus
1st ii. 1 more combination cases with surgeries and in maintenance (total 5)
25 Appendix U
iii. Continue 1 non-surgical case in maintenance (total 1)
iv. 3 more full cases (without initial therapy) and in maintenance (total 10)
v. 2 more prescription surgery cases (total 6)
vi. 2 more implant cases (6 cases completed w/ 2nd stage: total 6)
PowerPoint presentation complete for all cases will be reviewed May 1st (or during the first week
in May) with the program director to ensure that the resident is on track for graduation. All cases
will be submitted with final maintenance examination data/clinical images and any radiographs on
May 1st of the last semester.
A delay in receiving your cases will result in a delay in receipt of your certificate.
If the resident senses a deficiency of any particular case type, it is their responsibility to discuss it
with the program director at the earliest.
**Cases should be deposited on the S drive in a folder entitled “Full Cases”.

Your cases should be in a folder with your name in the Full cases folder.
Your folder should be organized with following six sub-folders:
1) Combination cases (non surgical & surgical): 5 cases
2) Non surgical cases: (1 case)
3) Periodontal surgeries: (10 cases)
4) Limited or prescription surgeries: (6 cases)
5) Implant Cases: (6 cases) should have site development done & documented prior to implant
placement.
6) Clinical photos: This folder should have individual folders for all your remaining cases not
submitted in the previous folders, each folder is labeled with the patients name, Axium
number and a list of procedures completed on the patient, the raw images both clinical and
radiographic and any presentations you may have are then deposited in each folder).
‘S’ drive is the only place where you should store patients photos. Any files/images taken out of
the college in any form must not show the patient’s face and/or any identifying information such
as name, Axium number, etc.
B) Documentation of Implant Cases

All implant cases must be documented and treatment plan reviewed by Drs.
Gajendrareddy, Khan, Greenberg, or Gaston (And Dr. Knoernschild if the case is being
restored in Graduate Prosthodontics). Implants will not be placed unless case has been
presented to one of these attendings (and Dr. Knoernschild if the case is a Graduate
Prosthodontics case or an attending UIC Restorative Faculty if the case is a predoctoral case)
in advance of the surgery and a note indicating the meeting has been entered into Axium.
26 Appendix U
EVALUATION POLICIES
Oral Exams
At the end of the fall semester each student will participate in an oral exam in the current (new)
American Board of Periodontology format consisting of case scenarios. Students will be provided
with photographic images and written information about the case and allowed to ask questions to
collect additional information from the two faculty examiners. The examiners will ask questions
from a standardized list of questions as a starting point. The response of the student to the standard
questions will elicit follow up questions and discussion with the examiners. At the end of the
spring semester the oral exam for the 1st and 2nd year residents will consist of a case presentation
that includes initial documentation outline of Dx., Px., treatment plan and documents at least one
surgical procedure. The case will be presented in the format previously used by the American
Board of Periodontology and will allow for a 20 minute presentation followed by an hour of
questions by the faculty examiners (this format is similar to that utilized for Peri 630). For 3rd year
residents the spring semester oral exam will be the Final Case Presentation. This should be one of
the 6 fully documented cases described above. The presentation format will be similar to the 1st
and 2nd year residents and will include a 20 minute presentation. It will differ in that the final case
will be presented to the faculty of the college of dentistry to include all departments and any faculty
wishing to attend. There will be a 30 minute period for questions from all departments. After this
time, questions will be limited to faculty of the Department of Periodontics. All oral exams are
graded using a standard grading form that includes opportunity for written comments. All graded
content areas on the form are averaged for all faculty participating and summarized on the Oral
Exam Summary Form. This form includes space to summarize the consensus of the written
comments of the faculty. Students must receive a passing grade on their oral exam (80% or above,
i.e. A or B grade). The oral exam and evaluations of presentations made during the semester
determines the grade for Peri 630 (60% oral exam, 40% evaluations from case presentations during
the semester).
Written exams
At the end of the fall and spring semesters a written essay exam will be given covering the content
of the Classic Literature review for the respective semester. The score on this exam determines the
semester grade for Peri 611. Students must receive a passing grade on their exam (80% or above,
i.e. A or B grade).
In-Service Examination
The In-Service Examination is a means of objectively assessing each student’s progress in
comparison with their peers enrolled in programs in the United States. These exams are beneficial
in preparing the student for the challenges of the American Board of Periodontology written
examination. The In-Service Examination is administered in April of each year of training. It
should be understood that the percentile score evaluated is calculated based on the year of training
27 Appendix U
and not for all students taking the examination. Each student MUST pass this examination before
proceeding to the next year of training (in relation to his/her classmates).
Passing criteria: Currently, first year graduate students MUST score at or above the 35th percentile
(relative to all first year students nationwide), while 2nd year students MUST score at or above the
50th percentile (relative to all second year students nationwide). Students that fail to meet the
requirements, will need to remediate. Remediation generally consists of the student researching the
periodontal literature for the correct answers (with references) in a written narrative form submitted
to the Program Director. Third year graduate students must score at or above the 65th percentile
(relative to all students nationwide).
Peri 611 is scheduled for 1st and 2nd year residents to participate. If a first year resident scores 90%
or above on both written exams or passes both exams (80% or above) and scores in the 90th
percentile or above on the AAP In-Service Exam, that resident will be exempt from participation in
Peri 611 for the second year of the program. If a 3rd year resident has failed to achieve a passing
(A or B) grade on the fall and/or spring written exams after the first two years, he/she will have to
participate in Peri 611 in the 3rd year and must pass both exams in order to receive the Certificate in
Periodontics.
Ongoing Evaluation of Students by Faculty

Evaluation of the Postgraduate Periodontics Students is ongoing by faculty. These evaluations are
often communicated to the Program Director orally and corrective or remedial action may be taken,
if warranted. Reports of excellent or outstanding performance are recorded for inclusion in future
student evaluations.
Clinical Evaluations
A. Evaluation of Clinical Faculty by Students
Each clinical faculty member is evaluated yearly by all involved Postgraduate Periodontics
Students. These evaluations are reviewed by the Program Director and the Department Head and
communicated to the clinical faculty.
B. Evaluation of Student Clinical Performance by Faculty

Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student will be evaluated in writing at the end of the Fall
and Spring Semesters by all clinical faculty members. The Program Director will counsel
each student as to the results of these evaluations and their individual progress in the
program. Informal counseling and evaluations will be completed throughout the year on an
as needed basis. All completed evaluations will be kept on file by the Program Director until
the student graduates. Areas that are evaluated include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Progress in clinical areas will be monitored on the basis of oral and written reports of
supervising faculty. Performance on the case presentations will be considered an
indicator of clinical abilities. No student will receive certification in periodontics until
proficiency has been achieved.
28 Appendix U
2. Clinical faculties constantly evaluate student skill in patient examination, diagnosis and
treatment planning. The diagnosis and treatment planning session and the diagnosis
MUST be recorded in the periodontal Axium chart and in the Axium treatment plan.
The treatment plan MUST be electronically “swiped” by the attending faculty indicating
that the plan is approved, a hard copy of the approved plan MUST be reviewed and
signed by the patient and retained in the patient chart before treatment is begun, and the
patient MUST receive a copy of the treatment plan.
Patients requiring restorative/prosthetic care MUST have a restorative treatment plan
before periodontal therapy is begun. This can be in the predoctoral or postgraduate
clinics or a private practice setting. If the patient is having their restorative care in a
private practice setting there MUST be detailed documentation in the chart
summarizing the restorative/prosthetic plan and copies of referral letters and
other communication with the restoring dentist.
Chair side evaluation by faculty of the quality of care the Postgraduate Periodontics Student has
provided the patient is performed on a daily basis in the clinic. This includes patient management,
patient interaction and rapport, presentation of the diagnosis and treatment plan to the patient and
parents and execution of the treatment rendered.
Other factors that are considered in the clinical evaluation include annual completion of CPR
certification, an annual TB test and maintenance of the Illinois Dental License or Illinois
Temporary Training license as required by state law.
Didactic Evaluation
A. Evaluation of Courses and/or Faculty by Students

Each course and/or participating faculty is evaluated at the end of each semester by all involved
Postgraduate Periodontics Students. Students evaluate each course for content and relevance. The
Program Director will review the course content and relevance on the basis of topics presented,
student comments and student performance on standardized tests.
B. Evaluation of Student Didactic Performance by Faculty

Student performance in a course or seminar will be evaluated on the basis of the assigned grade.
The student will be advised of grades and the end of each semester. All courses offered by the
Postgraduate Periodontics Program will receive a letter grade or a pass/fail designation. In all
circumstances, courses with grades lower than a “B” must be repeated, and a passing grade B or
better achieved. Postgraduate Periodontics Students must maintain the equivalent of a minimum
cumulative GPA of 3.0 in all the didactic courses.
Teaching Evaluation
Evaluation of Student Teaching Performance by Faculty
Postgraduate Periodontics Students are scheduled to cover the pre-doctoral clinic and will be
observed during their teaching assignment and will be counseled concerning recommended
teaching methods.
29 Appendix U
DIDACTIC POLICIES AND GUIDELINES
Literature Review Seminars

The Postgraduate Periodontics Program is based extensively in the literature. Classic, as well as
current and implant literature, is thoroughly reviewed in preparation to be a specialist in
periodontics. Literature reviews will be conducted throughout the academic year. The topic list is
under constant revision and the latest version may be obtained from the Program Director.
Professional Journals
Postgraduate Periodontics Students are responsible, on their own initiative, to read current as well
as the classic literature as a supplement to assigned readings. As an aid to training, and to enhance
future professional knowledge, each student is required to subscribe to the Journal of
Periodontology (comes with AAP membership). In addition, students are encouraged to subscribe
to the following journals (in order of importance):
Journal of Periodontal Research
International Journal of Oral and Maxillofacial Implants
Periodontology 2000
Journal of Clinical Periodontology
Seminars
Postgraduate Periodontics Students are reminded to regularly consult the program schedule to
determine seminar/lecture times and topics and be aware of alterations to this schedule and the
need to amend patient appointments accordingly.
The Chief Resident has a direct responsibility to ensure that seminars/lectures will start promptly at
the scheduled time with all students present. This is a matter of courtesy to the lecturer/presenter.
Postgraduate Periodontics Students must be prepared and seated in the appropriate seminar/lecture
room five minutes before the scheduled start of the seminar or lecture. Should the Chief Resident
be unavailable, it is his/her responsibility to appoint an alternate representative.
Schedule
A seminar/lecture/course/conference schedule is provided to each Postgraduate Periodontics
Student. Regular updates or changes are made as soon as notice of a change in schedule is
received. The updated schedule will be given to the Chief Resident who has the direct
responsibility to inform all students. Patient appointments must fit in with such schedules.
Schedule changes will be communicated with as much advance notice as possible.
30 Appendix U
RESEARCH POLICIES AND GUIDELINES
Research Requirements
Postgraduate Periodontics Students are required to complete a research project. This project may
be part of the of the Master's or Ph.D. Degree requirements. A certificate of Advanced Training in
the Specialty of Periodontics will not be granted until after completion of all degree requirements if
the student is in a combined program.
Masters/Ph.D. Degree in Science

This degree is conferred by the Graduate School of the University of Illinois at Chicago. Many of
the Periodontics faculties are jointly appointed as Graduate School faculty. Each student should
consult with the Program Director during their first semester of enrollment so that a research topic
can be selected. A finalized research protocol is due by January 15 of the first year of enrollment.
31 Appendix U
CLINICAL POLICIES AND GUIDELINES
A. Facilities, Equipment and Supplies

1. Dental Operatories: Each clinical graduate student will be assigned an operatory in
the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic. The cabinet available in the operatory is for storage of
clinic related items and should be locked at all times when the student is not within the area.
Any malfunctions of the operatory equipment (unit, chair, light, etc.) or mobile cabinet should
be reported to the Clinical Staff Dental Assistant who will report it to the Maintenance
Department for repair.
2. Photocopying. Photocopy machines are available on the 4th and 5th floor of the
building.
3. Prescription Items. Prior to prescribing drugs/items for a patient, a review
should be made of their current medical history and drug usage, the pharmacologic action
of the drug and its interactions with other drugs, contraindications, etc., as well as the
purpose, quantity and duration of the item to be prescribed. Additionally, the student should
obtain approval with the attending instructor.
5. Photo documentation: All surgical procedures performed in the graduate clinic are
required. Also, photo documentation at initial presentation, re-evaluation presentation,
completion of therapy, and at first maintenance appointment is required for all comprehensive
cases.
6. Progress notes: Must be written at each appointment and include a description of
the treatment rendered
as well as any unforeseen difficulties that may have arisen. Clinical procedures
should be documented with appropriate CDT code (s) (Code on Dental Procedures and
Nomenclature) with the progress notes attached to the relevant CDT code. Notes should
address the patient's state, prior to therapy and at dismissal. Initial entries must always state
a review and update of the patient's medical history, meds taken/none by the patient, and the
patient's blood pressure. All entries must be written by the post-/pre-doctoral student
rendering treatment. Postgraduate Periodontics Residents must have all treatment notes and
procedures “swiped” in axium at the time of treatment. The attending faculty and resident
should also make certain that all procedures completed are included in the note and
“swiped”. This may include procedure added to the treatment plan during therapy that day
(e.g., during surgery it is decided that a bone graft is indicated, this is added to the treatment
plan after the procedure, mentioned in the daily note, and swiped to ensure appropriate
billing for the service). Post-op suture removal appointments may have notes attached to the
original op note from the day of surgery.
Clinic
Patients
A.
Source
32 Appendix U
Patients requiring periodontal treatment procedures by postdoctoral students in the
Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic are derived from:
1. Direct Referral from the metropolitan community
2. Direct Referral from the Predoctoral Dental Clinic
a. Complete Case- Dual-Assigned-Complete
Treatment Case b. Complete Case - Dual
Assigned-Surgery Only Case
c. Prescription Treatment
3. Direct Referral from other
Postdoctoral Clinics
a. Complete Case
b. Prescription Treatment
B. Assignment of
Patients
The Program Director, Clinic Director and/or attending faculty assign all patients to
Postgraduate Periodontics Students. Patient records from within the College of Dentistry
(from the predoctoral and other postdoctoral clinics) should contain an entry in the progress
notes and referral tab in Axium indicating the reason for referral and specific details when
appropriate (e.g. if for crown lengthening details regarding the amount of length in addition to
developing length for a biologic width should be noted). Each record must contain within the
Progress Notes a written summary of the reason for referral. Patients referred directly to the
Postgraduate Periodontics clinic shall have a patient record initiated and recorded in the
computer by the Customer Service Representative (front desk coordinator). Such patients shall
be appointed for a consultation to determine their needs and appropriateness of care within the
Graduate Program Clinic. During the consultation the patient will have a complete
periodontal examination to include a head and neck exam and dental exam (for caries,
failing restorations, etc.). If it is determined that only a prescription surgery is indicated
(e.g., a crown lengthening in a patient without periodontitis, exposure of impacted canine for
orthodontics, soft tissue grafting, etc.) a note MUST be made in the progress notes in Axium
that a complete periodontal exam was performed and that the patient is periodontally
healthy (no attachment loss, probing depths 3mm or less, no mucogingival problems or
comment on existing mucogingival problem including amount of recession and amount of
keratinized gingival present, etc.). If the patient is diagnosed as having periodontitis, a
complete periodontal exam is completed and charted in axium.
Dual-assigned patients must have the pre-doctoral treatment plan approved in Axium prior
to beginning any periodontal treatment. On occasion, patients present with very
complex treatment needs and will require additional treatment planning at the pre-
doctoral level or other postgraduate clinic, but the same rules apply to periodontal
treatment.
33 Appendix U
C. Patient Appointments
Students are expected to see and treat their assigned patients in a timely and routine
manner. All patient appointments should be made by the Customer Service Representative
(front desk coordinator) who will enter them into the computer according to the scheduled
clinic availability of each student. At the conclusion of each patient appointment, the
student should indicate at the end of the daily progress notes the plan for the
next appointment to include: the procedures to be performed (including the ADA
procedure code), the time needed, and the approximate next time frame (e.g., 1 week,
10 days, 3 weeks, 1 month, etc.). The front desk coordinator shall coordinate directly with
the patient in concert with the student's appointment instructions and availability the next
appointment for the patient. This will aid in scheduling or re-scheduling an
appointment (should the patient cancel or fail an appointment). Under no circumstances
should a patient leave without having made the next appointment unless the patient is
not to be seen for treatment again.
Students should avoid making appointments, reappointing patients, and/or receiving
cancellations outside of clinic hours and at their homes, but should rely upon the
front desk coordinator to arrange all patient appointments for active treatment except
emergency appointment and post-op appointment. If a patient contacts you to cancel an
appointment, you may reschedule the patient in axium. After rescheduling the patient,
immediately inform the front desk staff of the opening in your schedule. You also may
provide the names of patients that you are aware of that are available on short notice to
fill the open slot.
In those instances when the student is contacted by the patient for appointment scheduling
outside of clinic hours, the student should immediately inform the front desk coordinator
of any change in appointment and enter the appointment into axiUm.
D.
Consultation
During regular clinic hours within the College of Dentistry requests for a consultation on
patient treatment needs may arise from any of the predoctoral or other postdoctoral clinics.
The request will generally be directed to the Postgraduate Student by the front desk
coordinator. The student may be contacted during clinic hours by the referring predoctoral/
postdoctoral clinic. This student will respond and provide the needed consultation. The front
desk coordinator will either arrange for a resident to provide the consultation, if available, or
schedule a consultation appointment f o r the patient. Consultations for referrals from the
predoctoral implant program are also to be managed as described above.
34 Appendix U
Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR)
All Postgraduate P e r i o d o n t i c s S t u d e n t s m u s t be certified in CPR. A mandatory
t w o -hour c o u r s e i s scheduled each July-August.
Advanced Cardiac Life Support (ACLS)

All Postgraduate Periodontics Students must be certified in ACLS on a two-year cycle. A
course will be arranged by the Program Director. All new graduate students should attempt
to be ACLS certified before arriving.
Administrative Responsibilities
Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student is responsible to fully document all patient
treatment and procedures in an accurate and timely manner in the patient's Axium dental
chart. The student is responsible to initiate the financial process with the patient to assure
the College of Dentistry receives payment for the treatment rendered. At the conclusion of
each patient visit, a progress note must be entered into Axium and all procedures completed
for the day “swiped” the attending faculty member. If the appointment included the
Treatment Plan, Re- Evaluation, or a Surgical Procedure the attending faculty member MUST
read the progress notes and “swipe” all procedures for that day. It is important that
procedures added to the treatment that day be added to the treatment plan and swiped along
with other completed procedures (e.g. Flap and Osseous Surgery was completed as indicated
in the treatment plan, it was decided intra-operatively that a bone graft and membrane be
placed, the procedures and codes for these 2 procedures must be added to the treatment
plan, noted in the progress notes and swiped by the attending faculty). This assures that
appropriate fees are collected for treatment rendered. Each student will be delegated
various additional responsibilities throughout the program. These are designed to enable
the student to gain and sustain proficiency in practice management.
Informed Consent
Informed consent for dental treatment must be obtained from all patients. The general
consent form supplied by the Department will suffice for most circumstances. Certainly a
thorough, understandable explanation of the proposed treatment and treatment alternatives
must be presented to every patient. This must be documented in the progress notes in the
patient’s history in Axium. For patients scheduled to receive implant therapy, tissue
grafting, or conscious sedation, additional informed consent forms designed by the
Postgraduate Periodontics Program are required. Also, IRB approval and a separate
consent form are required for patients participating in a research project. The research
informed consent form must be approved by The University of Illinois at Chicago
Institutional Review Board prior to any subject enrollment in the study.
Financial Obligation
35 Appendix U
With the patient or responsible party accepting the proposed treatment plan, each
Postgraduate Periodontics Student has a direct responsibility to ensure that procedures are
properly “swiped” (by the student, or attending faculty when indicated as described
above) so the Customer Service Representative (front desk coordinator) can collect
appropriate fees for services rendered. Signatures are also required by the patient or
responsible party on the informed consent and the treatment plan. With payment of initial
treatment fees and the establishment of financial arrangements, treatment scheduling can
begin.
Assignment of Patients
The Program Director, Clinic Director and/or attending faculty assign all patients to
Postgraduate Periodontics Students. Cases are assigned based on the student’s experience,
level of proficiency, and types of procedures already completed. Procedures with limited
availability will be divided as evenly as possible to ensure that all students get experience.
Students that have not performed well on a certain procedures will be assigned that type
procedure until they become proficient. The Postgraduate Periodontics Program has
guidelines for numbers of procedures and case types that should be completed prior to
program completion. The Program Director will assign cases to ensure that all students have
adequate numbers of each procedure and case type.
Treatment Planning with Specific Faculty

When a patient is treatment planned with a faculty member the student should make every
reasonable effort to complete the entire treatment under that faculty member's supervision.
Faculty is assigned to cover certain time periods in the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic.
Insofar as possible the Program/ Clinic Director will attempt to consistently assign faculty to
the same time slot from semester to semester. This will permit the student to treat patients
using the treatment philosophy of a particular faculty member. Exposure too many
different treatment approaches is an important aspect of specialty training in periodontics.
Computer-entered Treatment Plan

A treatment plan must be developed and entered into Axium for each patient, prior to
providing any active treatment. The computer-entered treatment plan must be signed by the
patient. A copy of the signed plan is given to the patient and another is placed in the
patient’s chart. When the treatment requires the services of other areas within or
associated with the College of Dentistry active therapy should not commence until a
treatment plan is developed for all departments/services involved.
All treatment plans for patients that will also receive treatment by a predoctoral student
MUST be entered by the predoctoral student. The periodontal therapy will be
established based on the clinical data placed in the record by the resident (in the Perio
EPR) and a note in the history (daily note) section of the record on the day the patient
examined that includes a list of the anticipated periodontal therapy procedures to be
included in the treatment plan.
36 Appendix U
A faculty approved and signed (by the patient) treatment plan should always be in
place before any active therapy is provided.
ALL PATIENTS MUST HAVE A TREATMENT PLAN IN THE PREDOC OR

POSTGRADUATE PROSTHODONTICS CLINIC OR HAVE AN OUTSIDE
DENTIST WHO HAS TREATMENT PLANNED THE PATIENT BEFORE
RENDERING ANY CARE (OTHER THAN EMERGENCY CARE).
IN THE CASE OF A PATIENT NEEDING IMPLANT CARE AN IMPLANT

SHOULD NOT BE PLACED UNTIL YOU HAVE COMPETED A
COMPREHENSIVE EXAM, AND HAVE: 1) APPROVED/SIGNED (BY THE
PATIENT) TREATMENT PLAN IN OUR DEPARTMENT, 2) THERE IS AN
APPROVED/SIGNED (BY THE PATIENT) PROSTHODONTIC/ PREDOCTORAL
TREATMENT PLAN (IF THE CASE IS BEING RESTORED IN THE COLLEGE),
3) THE CASE HAS BEEN REVIEWED BY THE ATTENDING FACULTY ALONG
WITH ALL RESIDENTS/ STUDENTS INVOLVED IN THE TREATMENT).
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES MAY RESULT IN SUSPENSION OF
CLINICAL PRIVALEGES AND A DELAY IN GRADUATION.
PATIENTS ON BISPHOSPHONATE THERAPY NEEDING IMPLANT OR

OTHER SURGICAL CARE WILL BE REQUIRED TO HAVE A 3 MONTH
DRUG HOLIDAY BERFORE AND AFTER THE SURGICAL PROCEDURE(S)
IN CONSULTAION WITH THE ATTENDING PHYSICIAN.
Initial
Examination
As soon as practical after patient assignment, but no longer than a month’s time, students
are required to schedule their patients for an initial clinical examination. All relevant clinical
details must be recorded and checked with the supervising faculty member (this includes a
full periodontal charting in axium). Full mouth periapical and vertical bitewing radiographs
must be available for diagnosis and treatment planning (in rare cases where the disease
severity is mild, bitewings and a panorex radiograph may be sufficient). If indicated for
diagnostic purposes, a panoramic film or tomogram should be ordered.
Radiographic Procedures
Postgraduate Periodontics Students may legally request dental radiographs. Patient exposure
to ionizing radiation must be responsible and realistic in order to practice sound radiation
protection standards while providing the degree of diagnostic information required. All
radiographs must be properly labeled with patient name, date and chart number. Digital
radiographs must be attached to the patient’s electronic health record.
37 Appendix U
Dental Chart and Treatment Record
It is the responsibility of the Postgraduate Periodontics Student to maintain accurate
treatment records in Axium and orderly treatment plan, consent forms, and radiographs
in the patient's file. All progress notes for procedures are completed at the time they are
performed. Surgical procedures should be written in a standardized format as indicated by
the two examples below:
Example 1
Maxillary right (2-5) flap curettage surgery. Distal wedge #2.
Pre-Op, 12:00 noon: BP __________ Pulse __________ Resp __________

Temp __________ Post-Op, 3:00 pm: BP __________ Pulse __________
Resp __________
Anesthetic: Lidocaine 2% with epinephrine 1:100,000 X _________ Lidocaine 2% with
epinephrine 1:50,000 X _________ Carbocaine 3% with no vasoconstrictor X
1.8cc
Rx: Naproxen 500mg X 28. Sig: Take 1

q12h until gone.
Vicodin ES X 12. Sig: Take 1 q6h prn pain
Metronidazole 250mg X 21. Sig: Take 1 tid until
gone. Doxycycline hyclate 50mg X 28. Sig: Take
1 q12h until gone.
Flap curettage 2-5 w/ distal wedge, osteoplasty to improve flap adaptation. Distal #2, 2mm 3
wall defect debrided. Mesial #2, 4mm 3 wall defect grafted with DFDBA (complete flap
closure obtained). Mesial #3, 1mm 1 wall defect eliminated by osseous recontouring. Mesial
#4, 5mm 2 wall defect covered with Gortex Resolute XT double curved (complete closure
resolute sutures) flap closure with 6 X 4-0 Gore suture material)
Patient tolerated procedure well. Post-op instructions including post-op medication
regimen were given. Patient was dismissed in the care of sister.
Example
2
Maxillary left (11-15) gingival flap surgery. Distal

wedge #15. Mandibular left (18-27) gingival flap
surgery. Distal wedge #18.
38 Appendix U
Pre-Op, 12:00 noon: BP __________ Pulse __________ Resp __________ Temp
__________
39 Appendix U
Post-Op, 2:30pm: BP __________ Pulse __________ Resp __________
Anesthetic: Lidocaine 2% with epinephrine 1:100,000 X 3.6cc
Lidocaine 2% with epinephrine 1:50,000 X 5.4cc
Rx: Ibuprofen 800mg # 40. Sig: Take 1 q8h prn pain.

Vicodin ES # 12. Sig: Take 1 q6h prn pain
Doxycycline hyclate 50mg # 28. Sig: Take 1 q12h until gone.
Gingival flap 11-15 w/ distal wedge, osteoplasty to improve flap adaptation. Mesial
#15, 2mm 3 wall defect debrided only. 6 X 4-0 Silk.
Patient tolerated procedure well. Patient left accompanied by spouse.
**IF A PROCEDURE IS COMPLETED UTILIZING ALLOGRAFT (FDBA, DFDBA,

ALLODERM, ETC.) A STICKER IDENTIFYING THE SOURCE/DONOR OF THE
MATERIAL SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE ALLOGRAFT LOG. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION INDICATING THE PATIENTS NAME, AXIUM NUMBER,
DATE SHOULD BE ENTERED IN THE LOG. SIMILARLY IF ENDOSSEOUS
IMPLANTS ARE PLACED A STICKER IDENTIFYING THE IMPLANT
PLACED SHOULD BE PLACED IN THE IMPLANT LOG. THE LOG BOOK
SHOULD HAVE THE PATIENT’S NAME, AXIUM NUMBER, IMPLANT TYPE AND
SIZE AND STICKER (ONE ENTRY LINE FOR EACH FIXTURE PLACED). THIS IS
IN ADDITION TO DETAILED NOTES IN THE ELECTRONIC RECORD
INDICATING DETAILS ON ALL IMPLANTED MATERIALS (INCLUDING
ALLOGRAFTS, XENOGRAFTS, MEMBRANES AND GROWTH FACTORS). THE
ELECTRONIC RECORD SHOULD INDICATE DETAILS OF THE PRODUCT USED
(INCLUDING BRAND NAME/ PRODUCT NAME, REFERENCE NUMBER, SIZE/
QUANTITY, LOT NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE). IF A DOCUMENT TO
REGISTER USAGE INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE AS PART OF THE
PACKAGING INSERT FROM A TISSUE BANK, THE RESIDENT USING THE
PRODUCT SHOULD FILL IT APPROPRIATELY AND HAND IT OVER TO THE
FRONT DESK PERSONNEL FOR MAILING.
40 Appendix U
IMPLANT ORDERING and RETURNING
Implant, coverscrews and healing abutments to be used for surgeries for referral from the
predoctoral implant program will be obtained from Dr. Harlow by the predoctoral student
through a requisition form to be completed by the postgraduate Periodontics residents. All
other implants and related parts to be used by the Residents are to be obtained and handled as
per the following protocol:
Ordering Implants:
1. Implants should be ordered at least ten days ahead of the surgical date.
2. Cover screws & healing abutments: The existing stock* of implants is to be checked
before ordering. If the resident finds what he/ she needs, they do not order new ones.
New parts will be ordered only when the requested item is not in stock.
3. For ordering, the resident should fill out the ‘order form’ with specific catalog number
of the item.
4. Order forms are available with the clinic front desk/ Periodontics office.
5. The order form is incomplete without a faculty’s signature on it.
6. The form should be turned in to the Clinic Coordinator/ office staff for ordering as soon
as possible.
7. Any incomplete information will slow down the ordering process.
8. Once the implants are received, the Clinic Coordinator will hold on to the implants
for you until the day of the surgery.
NO STORING IMPLANTS OR IMPLANT RELATED PRODUCTS IN RESIDENT PRIVATE CABINETS

Unused parts:
1. Any unused ordered parts should be returned to the Clinic Coordinator. There will be
zero tolerance for this.
2. Unopened items: These are to be returned to the Clinic Coordinator in their original
packing.
3. Opened items, used or unused: To be HANDED to the dental assistants for autoclaving.
a. Implant fixture: The reference & catalog number should be noted and the
information transferred along with the date to the back of the autoclave pouch.
b. Cover-screw: Information on the size of cover screw should be noted on the back of
the autoclave pouch.
c. Healing abutment: Information on the size of Healing abutment should be
noted on the back of the autoclave p ouch.
d. Twist drills: Information on the size of Twist Drill should be noted on the back
of the autoclave pouch.
Implant inventory (“stock*”):

There are two systems that are stocked, i.e. Astra & NobelBiocare Replace straight. The
stock provides a very limited inventory of implant materials to be used as ‘back-up’.
41 Appendix U
IMPLANTS: The resident should be ordering their implants for every case and not rely
on the stored implants.
They are for EMERGENCY
use only.
Cover screws & healing abutments: The stock s to be checked before ordering. If the
resident finds what they need, new ones are not to be ordered. Orders will only be placed
when we do not have an item in stock.
*in a locked file cabinet behind the Clinic Coordinator’s desk.
42 Appendix U
Medical Consultation
Medical consults must be obtained when indicated. Consults must be written and should be
reviewed by the attending faculty or Program Director before they are mailed. In each consult
the following should be provided:
1. Description of the proposed treatment using simple, lay language and drugs to be
administered;
2. Review of pertinent past medical history and biographical data;
3. List of current medications by brand name (generic name in parenthesis), dosage and
regimen;
4. Specific questions (underlined for emphasis) that must be answered before
periodontal treatment is initiated.
An example of the general format of the letter is as follows:
January 30, 20012
Morris Weiss, M.D.

4812 Highway Rd., Suite 202
Lexington, Ohio 43210
Dear Dr. Weiss,

Mrs. Catherine Clare, a 76 year old Caucasian female was referred to the Graduate
Periodontics clinic for gum surgery. Her surgical treatment will consist of 2 appointments
lasting approximately 2-3 hours each. Local anesthetic dosage will be approximately 72 mg
of lidocaine with 0.18 mg epinephrine administered initially and an additional 36 mg
lidocaine and 0.09 mg of epinephrine administered over the remainder of the 2-3
hour appointment. Post-operative medications will include doxycycline hyclate 50 mg
q24h for 10 days, Motrin (ibuprofen) 400 mg, 800 mg stat and 400 mg q4h prn pain and
Vicodin q6h prn pain if Motrin is not adequate.
Review of significant medical history reveals that Mrs. Clare has Parkinsonism of unknown
duration; had a myocardial infarction in June of 1994; has functional paroxysmal atrial
tachycardia and stable angina pectoris.
Currently Mrs. Clare gives a history of taking the following medications: Lopressor
(metoprolol) 50 mg bid; Lasix (furosemide) 20 mg qd, Lanoxin (digoxin) 0.125 mg qd,
Sinemet (carbidopa and levodopa) C/L 25/100 one half tablet tid, and enteric coated ASA 81
mg qd.
Please confirm the medications and medical history reported by the patient and indicate
any modifications to the treatment plan you recommend based on your medical assessment.
43 Appendix U
Thank you for your time and assistance in this matter.
Sincerely,
Cheryl A. Dentist, D.D.S.,

M.S. Graduate
Periodontics
44 Appendix U
Policy on Treatment of Patients with Diabetes
In case of Diabetes; the post-grad perio dept will test patients for the fasting or non-
fasting glucose. This is an absolute necessity for patients who
• Are known diabetic (controlled or uncontrolled)
• Has a family history of diabetes mellitus
• Has a history of gestational diabetes
• Are at a risk of diabetes due to factors other than genetics such as obesity, metabolic
syndrome etc.
The residents are expected to make a note of the glucose reading in their patients chart
every time a reading is available. Failure to document will indicate failure to test and/or
comply.
Any values that are not within the normal limit should be brought to the attending faculty
member’s attention. A
clinical judgment should be made in consultation with the faculty member. Glucose value
above the normal limit necessitates a physician’s consult with a request of the most recent
HbA1c reading.
The following chart can be used for decision-making:
Fasting level: above 130mg/dL Non-

fasting level: above 200 mg/dL
No surgical elective treatment

Only emergency treatment
Request a medical consult with *current HbA1c value
HbA1c < 7 HbA1c > 7
Elective treatment ONLY emergency treatment

Monitor glucose regularly Advise the patient to return for elective treatment
(follow the chart) after medical clearance obtained
(follow the chart)
(* current: less than 3 months ago)
HbA1c Values¹:
< /6% - normal.
> 6.5% - Diagnosed diabetes;

> 7% - diabetes control may not be as good as it should be.
Reference:1. American Diabetes Association. Standards of medical care in diabetes--2010. Diabetes Care. 2010 Jan;
33 Supply 1:S11-61
45 Appendix U
Sedation Policy
All sedation will be provided exclusively under the direct supervision and direction of
Dr. Zakaria
Messieha.
Types of Referrals from the Pre-doctoral Clinic

Referral to Postgraduate Periodontics may be in one of three ways:
1. Referral of the case for complete periodontal treatment (Complete Treatment

Case, i.e. Postgraduate student provides all periodontal services and the Pre-doctoral
student provides restorative and other care).
2. Referral of the case for surgical treatment only (Surgery Only Case, i.e. Pre-
doctoral student provides initial therapy and Postgraduate student provides surgical
care).
Referral method: faculty referral (a periodontal faculty member MUST see
the patient and make an entry in the Axium progress notes and in the referral
tab).
Post-Surgical Care: Postgraduate Periodontics Student.
3. Referral of the case for one or two specific surgical procedures (Prescription Surgery
Case).
Referral method: faculty referral (a periodontal faculty member MUST see
the patient and make an entry in the Axium progress notes and in the referral
tab, this is especially important in this case, for a crown lengthening we will
need to know whether we a re-establishing a biologic width only or need
additional length for retention of a cast restoration, appropriate radiographs
should be available at time of surgery).
The following cases should be referred to Postgraduate Periodontics as Complete Treatment

Cases:
a. Moderate (class II furcations, mobility, and other needs for care that will obviously
require care in the PG
clinic), or Severe Chronic Periodontitis (Case Type III or IV).
b. Any Aggressive Periodontitis. Also Periodontitis associated with systemic disease.
The following cases should be referred to Postgraduate Periodontics as Surgery Only Cases:
a. The case must need surgical treatment;
the pre-doctoral clinic and must be done by the faculty and Postgraduate Periodontics
Student that will perform the treatment);
46 Appendix U
Post-Surgical Care: All post-operative care for Surgery Only Cases will be provided by the
Postgraduate
Periodontics Student.
The following cases may be scheduled for Prescription Surgery:

a. Cases that need no more than two areas of surgery that the pre-doctoral
student/faculty elects to refer to Postgraduate Periodontics;
b. Surgical procedures that the faculty determines should be performed by a
Postgraduate Periodontics Student.
Patients that need osseous grafting or GTR procedures should NOT be referred for
prescription surgery. These patients have more severe disease and should be referred to
Postgraduate Periodontics as Complete Treatment Cases or Surgery Only Case.
The difference between PRESCRIPTION surgery and a "SURGERY ONLY" case is:
PRESCRIPTION SURGERY: The patient has early or early to moderate periodontitis and
needs only one or two uncomplicated surgeries.
SURGERY ONLY CASE: Patient has more complex surgical needs and has 2 or more
procedures that need surgery.
Cases that need intensive post-op care, such as GTR or osseous grafting, fit into this category.
Cases where a referral Postgraduate Periodontics initially for complete periodontal

treatment may be most appropriate:
ALL cases of Severe Chronic Periodontitis, Aggressive Periodontitis or Periodontitis

Associated with Systemic Disease; ALL cases where GTR or osseous grafting treatment
is anticipated; ALL cases of gingival grafting, root coverage grafting, or ridge
augmentation should be referred to Postgraduate Periodontics for a complete exam (this
may just include a review and clinical conformation of the charting completed by the
predoctoral student if the patient does not have periodontitis) and evaluation before any
periodontal treatment is begun. If the patient was not referred initially, due to
oversight, the case should be referred to Postgraduate Periodontics at the time of re-
evaluation as a Surgery Only Case.
When active therapy is complete an e-mail in Axium should be sent to the predoctoral
student treating the patient and a detailed note summarizing the post-active treatment
evaluation entered in the progress notes in Axium.
When the postgraduate Periodontics resident receives a referral from the predoctoral clinic,
the resident is to make sure that he/ she completes the Referral tab under the Periodontic
EPR. This tab can be accessed as follows:
Electronic Health Record > Forms > Periodontic EPR > referral
47 Appendix U
The information in the tab is to be reviewed and the following information completed
by the resident at the appropriate time during care:
1. Date request received by Post Graduate Periodontics
2. Date Procedure completed
It should also be made sure that if a D9740 PG Periodontic referral code is entered in the
treatment history, that it is swiped as complete when the procedure is completed.
The Post Graduate Perio form under periodontics EPR should be completed any time an
initial consultation or exam is done on a patient. This form also needs to be updated as and
when required along the course of care for the patient.
Electronic Health Record > Forms > Periodontic EPR > Post Graduate Perio
For co-managed cases from the predoctoral clinics, if the periodontal EPR tab including forms
Periodontal Exam, Diagnosis, Prognosis and treatment plan have not been filled by the
predoctoral student yet, the resident would assist the student in completing these tabs (the
predoctoral student is expected to be available at the time the resident examines the patient)
When you receive an Axium e-mail from the Program Director indicating co-
assignment of a patient for p e r i o d o n t a l and/or implant care i n c o l l a b o r a t i o n
with a p r e d o c t o r a l student, please c o n t a c t the predoctoral student immediately
and invite that student to the examination/treatment planning appointment. They are
not required to be at that appointment but we do want to give the student the
opportunity to participate in that appointment.
Whether the student comes to the examination appointment or not, please send an
Axium e-mail after the appointment summarizing your examination findings and
proposed treatment plan. Please copy that e -mail to r e l e v a n t Predoctoral/
Postgraduate faculty, the m a n a g i n g partner for t h e G P w h e r e predoctoral
care will be provided, and to the perio manager faculty from our department assigned
to the GP when appropriate. In addition you should send an axium email to the dental
student to update him/her regarding the progress of periodontal therapy and any
updates in the patient status and potential changes in the treatment plan.
This communication will facilitate care here at the college and will provide the same
communication you will provide to your referring GPs when you enter private practice.
Similarly, when you receive a patient that has been referred form an outside
dentist, you should contact that dentist by phone as needed during the
examination/treatment planning phase as well as any other time it may be
appropriate. A letter summarizing your treatment plan should be sent to the referring
48 Appendix U
dentist when the treatment plan is complete and another letter when your active
therapy is complete. You should have attending faculty review any letters to outside
dentists before sending them. A copy of any correspondence should be placed in the in
the hard copy UIC patient record.
All items entered in the axium record (notes, completed procedures, charting, perio
EPR, etc.) must be approved (“swiped”) by the attending faculty on the day of service.
Failure to do so will result in “locking out” of the resident from axium and therefore
access to patient records. In this case the resident will not be able to provide care until
all unswiped items are resolved.
PATIENTS THAT MAY NEED TREATMENT THAT INCLUDES DENTAL

IMPLANTS:
Patients requiring (or that may require) dental implants that are referred to the Post Graduate
Periodontics Clinic are managed based on the source of the referral. If the patient is a
“patient of record of the COD” and is assigned to a dental student, or prosthodontics
resident, the patient should be referred to the Comprehensive Dental Implant Center (CDIC)
for screening. If the patient is referred from a private practice or presents to the Post
Graduate Periodontics clinic and is not a patient of record of the COD, a referral to the CDIC
is not required. Such a referral may be considered, but only if the patient is “self referred”
or with the permission of the referring private practice dentist (i.e. the private practice
dentist has indicated that he/she does not want to treat the patient). Any implant p a t i e n t
r e c e i v i n g treatment by a P o s t g r a d u a t e Periodontics student w i l l r e c e i v e a
c o m p l e t e dental examination to include a periodontal examination. A treatment plan will
be developed jointly with the restorative faculty/student or private practice dentist restoring
the case and the attending periodontal faculty and Postgraduate Periodontics student. It may
be useful to have the patient wear the surgical guide prepared by the restoring dentist when
taking the panoramic radiograph if available. The position of each desired implant site may
be marked with ortho wire affixed to the surgical guide.
FOR PATIENTS NEEDING IMPLANT CARE

AN IMPLANT SHOULD NOT BE PLACED UNTIL YOU HAVE COMPLETED A
C OMPREHENSIVE EXAM, AND HAVE: 1) APPROVED/SIGNED TREATMENT
PLAN IN OUR DEPARTMENT, 2) THERE IS AN APPROVED/SIGNED PROSTH.
TREATMENT PLAN (IF THE CASE IS BEING RESTORED IN THE COLLEGE),
3) THE CASE HAS BEEN REVIEWED BY THE FACULTY OF THE PROSTH
AND PERIO PROGRAM ALONG WITH ALL RESIDENTS INVOLVED IN THE
TREATMENT). FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES M A Y RESULT IN
SUSPENSION O F CLINICAL P R I V A L E G E S AND A DELAY IN GRADUATION.
Management of a Patient’s Removable Prosthesis During Treatment Appointments
49 Appendix U
When a patient presents for care and has existing removable prostheses (e.g. an RPD,
orthodontic retainer, occlusal guard, etc.), the appliance(s) should be removed, placed in a
plastic drinking cup with the patient’s name printed on the cup. The appliance(s) should
remain in the cup on the counter during the treatment appointment and returned to the patient
at the conclusion of the appointment.
NOTE: placing such appliances in a patient napkin or paper towel is unacceptable and may
result in the appliance(s) being discarded.
Transfer
Records
When a patient is transferred to a practitioner or treatment facility outside the College
of Dentistry a standard procedure applies. Original records must be retained by the
department and filed accordingly. Duplicate records and radiographs may be sent to the new
practitioner only after receipt of a written request by the patient. A complete periodontal
examination with accompanying intraoral photos should be taken at the time of transfer to
document the patient's periodontal status at the time of transfer.
Continuation of Regular Dental Care At or their private practitioner during the course
of active treatment.
The Postgraduate Periodontics Student should cooperate fully with other practitioners to
maintain all aspects of the patient's dental health during a course of periodontal therapy.
Postgraduate Periodontics Students are required to communicate by writing to all of their
referring doctors. Copies of all correspondence should be kept in the patient’s chart.
Communication is the key to a successful periodontal practice.
Patient Appointments and Scheduling

All appointments will be made by the Postgraduate Periodontics Customer Service
Representative (front desk coordinator). If there are any changes in the schedule, it is the
student's responsibility to ensure that patients have been canceled and rescheduled as soon as
possible. When a patient "no shows" or cancels an appointment, the Customer Service
Representative will schedule another appointment. To facilitate this process, it is important
that the progress notes indicate the procedure(s), ADA code(s) and time needed for the next
appointment. All patients are required to check-in with the Customer Service
Representative on arrival for their appointment at the Postgraduate Periodontics clinic.
Likewise, he patients are required to check-out with the Customer Service Representative at the
end of their appointment. The resident should verify that the patient has checked-in”\ prior
to commencement of care. When known, the fees appropriate for the care to be provided at
the appointment would be collected by the Customer Service Representative when the
patients check-in.
Surgical Sign up
Sheet
50 Appendix U
The following protocol is to be followed by the residents for scheduling surgeries in PG
periodontics
clinic:
• The resident MUST enter all surgical procedures, including extractions, in the surgical
signup book as
soon as the procedure is scheduled in Axium.
• The number of surgeries is limited to FIVE surgeries per session, where not more than
four implant
surgeries could be scheduled.
• The number of surgeries is limited to ONLY TWO surgeries on Friday
mornings.
• It is the resident’s responsibility to check the sign-‐up sheet before scheduling the surgeries
to reserve
their spot.
• When there are more than two implant surgeries scheduled, one of the surgical
suites with
radiographic equipment has to be left open for radiographs.
• Simple implant uncovery, where the resident does not anticipate the need for a surgical
assistant or a surgical suite, can be performed in non-‐surgical area with no sign-‐up. Implant
uncovery may also be performed above the surgical number limits for the clinic session as
long as a room / assistants are not required.
Screening Appointments for New Patients

Patients referred to Postgraduate Periodontics for periodontal treatment who have not been
previously seen by an UIC faculty member may be scheduled for a screening appointment.
The purpose of this appointment would be to briefly examine the patient and determine their
treatment needs. On the basis of the information obtained the Program Director or other
attending will determine if the patient’s needs are suitable for a Postgraduate Periodontics
Student. If so, an assignment will be made. The Customer Service Representative may
schedule a screening appointment for any clinic session.
Post-op Appointments
Each patient must continue to seek regular dental care from other programs within the College of Dentistry. Each
resident is responsible to see all his/her own post-op appointments. When out of the clinic on
a rotation, make arrangements to see your patients. On rare occasions when a resident can’t
see a post-op patient, the resident should make specific arrangements for another resident to
see the patient.
Appointments outside Clinic Hours

Occasionally, a Postgraduate Periodontics Student may be required to perform a clinical
procedure outside normal clinic hours. Should this situation arise, the student must inform
the Program/ Clinic Director and arrange for a faculty member to provide clinic coverage
until the procedure is completed and the patient dismissed. Under no circumstances is it
permissible for a Postgraduate Periodontics Student to perform a clinical procedure
51 Appendix U
without faculty coverage. All Postgraduate in Periodontics Students have a responsibility to
ensure that at least one faculty member is present until the patient is dismissed.
Emergency Appointments
Patients undergoing active periodontal therapy may occasionally require emergency care. All
patients should be provided with the Postgraduate Periodontics Student's home phone number
or cell phone number if the student will be away from home, and instructed to call at any
time if questions or problems arise. Emergency services are available at the College of
Dentistry.
1. Emergency Periodontal Treatment

a. During regular clinic hours, any emergency periodontal treatment which arises for a
patient assigned to a graduate student should be resolved by the student assigned.
Consequently, all students should notify the clinic of their whereabouts daily and be
reachable by cell phone, should they not be scheduled within the clinic.
b. During hours when the College of Dentistry clinics are not open, patients assigned
to graduate students who have a need for emergency periodontal treatments should first
contact their assigned student (student’s cell phone) who should determine the need for
emergency care. If it is determined that the patient has an emergency that necessitates the
patient be seen before the COD is open the next day (e.g. excessive postsurgical
bleeding), the patient should be directed to report to the UIC Hospital ER. The Oral and
Maxillofacial Resident “on call” should be contacted by and informed that the patient and
Postgraduate Periodontics Student are in route to the ER. The OMFS resident will assist the
Postgraduate Periodontics resident with logistics and procedures for seeing the patient in the
ER. The patient may incur an ER fee for use of the ER. .Graduate students who are
involved in rendering emergency periodontal treatment during either regular clinic hours
and/or after hours, whether assigned to the patient and/or responding in an "on call"
basis, need make a report to the Graduate Program Director as soon as feasible but no later
than 24 hours later and make a formal note in the Axium record of treatment rendered.
2. Medical Emergencies
During regular clinic hours (9am – 4PM) and when there appears to be the condition of a
medical emergency/life-threatening situation with a patient, the student should immediately
call for help and also notify the attending instructor. Following assessment of the situation
the attending instructor direct the institution of CPR and/or other emergency measures and:
Step 1: dial on campus phone 34733 (OMFS clinic overhead page system) and repeat 2X
LOUDLY “Code Blue in the Postgraduate Periodontics clinic” (or other appropriate location
with room number).
Step 2: On a campus phone dial 62242, when UIC hospital paging system answers then dial
6969# (pound sign) and then dial the call back number # (pound sign).
Step 3: after 1 minute if no response from OMFS or if attending faculty deems it
appropriate call 911 on outside line.
52 Appendix U
3. Emergencies Requiring Evacuation from the Building: Fire Alarm
In the event of a fire alarm during surgeries, sedations etc. – the healthcare provider is to report (either
personally or through staff personnel) to a College Fire Marshal that he/she will continue
treatment unless instructed by the Head College Fire Marshal (Fred Chapa) and/or
Chicago Fire personnel that the threat is real and everybody must evacuate for safety
reasons.
Periodontal Treatment Plan and Fees

Following the initial periodontal examination a written treatment plan with all treatment
procedures and fees must be presented to the patient. The patient should be thoroughly
informed in understandable terms of the proposed treatment and the alternatives to treatment
available. The final computer-entered and printed treatment plan must be signed by the
patient and swiped by supervising faculty or the Program Director. Arrangements for
payment of fees should be made at this time. For treatment to proceed, all accounts must
be current. Payment methods include Cash, Credit/ debit Card, and Check payment prior to
each procedure.
The Postgraduate Periodontics Student is responsible for determining if the patient's account
is current. If it is not, the patient should be informed that the outstanding balance must be
paid before treatment can proceed. Generally the Customer Service Representative (front
desk receptionist) will inform the Postgraduate Periodontics Student if the account is overdue;
however, it is the student's responsibility to make this determination.
A proper treatment plan should include all anticipated fees and appropriate ADA codes for
each procedure. The Customer Service representative will inform the patient of fees that will
be due at the beginning of the next visit when appointments are made and confirmed. The
patient should check in with the Customer Service representative (Front Desk receptionist)
prior to any surgical procedure to have any fees collected prior to initiating the procedure.
Patients should be advised if there is a possibility that the need for additional procedure/fees
will be identified intraoperatively. Should additional procedures (example: GTR) be indicated
during a surgical procedure the patient should be informed and give consent for the addition
of appropriate fees that are payable at the conclusion of the procedure.
Notes on ADA Codes and Fees (fees stated are representative and may not reflect
the current fees for the procedures):
Osseous surgery D4260 $39
Gingival Flap procedure D4240 $32
(i.e. the handpiece was not used during the surgery) 5
Any Additional sites of Bone Grafting D4264 add $17

(add for each site, 3 additional sites would be 250 for the first site and 450 for the three
additional sites)
53 Appendix U
If a single site Bone Graft D4263 is done with the add $29
If you perform Guided Tissue Regeneration (resorbable D4266 or non-resorbable
D4267) This adds an additional $341.00 for each site/membrane used
Example: if you do a quadrant of osseous with 3 grafted sites one needing a resorbable
membrane the total would be 390+296+177+177+341=$1381.
Free soft tissue graft D4271 (per donor site) $340
Subepith CT graft D4273 (per donor site) $351
Soft tissue allograft D4275 (per alloderm graft) $523
Extraction with site preservation

D7210 Surgical removal of erupted tooth $151
D7953 – bone replacement graft for ridge preservation (per site) $350.
Sinus Augmentation D7951 $1125

Ramus or Symphysis D7950 $1125
Guided Bone Regerneration D7950
$112
5 (including flap, membrane, allograft, autograft, pins, any other
materials)
Patient Transfer when Student Completes Program

Patients are usually assigned to an individual Postgraduate Periodontics Student. Third year
students must ensure that first/second year students are thoroughly familiar with all patients
whose treatment will not be completed prior to their completion of the program. In April
and May of each year patients of third year, Postgraduate Periodontics Students will be
transferred to first/second year students. The third year student must be available when
the first year student schedules the first appointment to facilitate introductions and
familiarization with treatment plan. This system makes an easier, more efficient transition
for the patient and assures continuity of high quality periodontal therapy.
Patient Records - Department Property and Legal Record

records
Patient records are the property of the College of Dentistry and constitute a legal record. Removal of
from the College of Dentistry is unlawful theft and Postgraduate Periodontics Students should
guard against careless handling of dental charts that could result in loss or theft. All entries
in Axium should be made in the treatment record immediately following treatment.
If information is needed from a patient's chart the record may be duplicated upon written
request of the patient. The Registration/ Records Department along with the Office of
54 Appendix U
Clinical Affairs in College of Dentistry receive and process all such requests. Duplication of
records for scientific purposes by Postgraduate Periodontics students and Faculty is permitted
as long as the patient's identity is protected and an appropriate IRB approval is obtained to
gather such information.
Dental Assistant Chairside Services

Chairside assistance is limited due to budgetary constraints but may be obtained when
an assistant is available on a first-come, first-served basis. The Postgraduate Periodontics
Program has two full time assistants. Surgical appointments receive first priority while
periodontal chartings get second priority. Other procedures most often have to be performed
without assistance. When the program assistant is unavailable, other individuals may be
available from the pre-doctoral program or other assisting/hygiene programs that periodically
rotate through the Postgraduate Periodontics Clinic.
Pre-doctoral Assistance
Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student receives a faculty number, which authorizes
them to sign or “swipe” appropriate clinic forms/records for pre-doctoral students.
When a DDS student serves as a surgical assistant it is essential that the Postgraduate
Periodontics Student act as an instructor so that the exercise serves as a learning experience
for the DDS student. The rationale for the surgical procedure, alternative treatment options
and required post-surgical fol low-up should be fully explained to the DDS assistant. The
same is true for “senior surgeries” under the direction of the postgraduate student, where the
predoctoral student performs most or all of the surgical procedure. The Predoctoral
students may be required to rotate through the Post-Graduate Periodontics Clinic as part
of their curriculum. During such times the following guidelines are to be followed by the
Predoctoral student in rotation:
-‐ The student will be required to sign in with the Clinic Coordinator/ Mrs. Sharon
Arrigo upon arrival at the clinic and sign out with them at the end of the clinic
session
-‐ Each student will be assigned to assist/ observe in a surgery. The post-graduate
Periodontics clinic has a surgical signup book with the list of surgeries that are
scheduled for any given clinic session. Each student is expected to refer to this book
upon arrival and proceed to the designated surgical room to assist/ observe
-‐ In the instance that the student does not have a specified assignment as described, they
can proceed to assist/ observe in any ongoing surgery. No more than two observers
shall be present in any surgical suite at any given time.
-‐ In the event that the student is unable to find a spot assisting/ observing in
surgical procedure, They should proceed to assist and observe in non surgical
periodontal procedures
-‐ If the student wishes to leave the clinic during the clinic session for an extended
period of time, the front desk staff should be informed of your departure and the
reason
55 Appendix U
-‐ If the student is unable to make it to an assigned session due to unforeseen
circumstances, They are to inform Sharon Arrigo of their absence. The students are
encouraged to switch with another student for a prior or later observation date or
arrange for an alternate day for observation in consultation with Sharon Arrigo.
-‐ The students are strongly encouraged to discuss their periodontal interests
and observations with the residents and faculty. Any questions or concerns
are to be directed to Sharon Arrigo, sarrig1@uic.edu.
Clinical Photography
Each Advanced Education in Periodontics Student is required to purchase a digital clinical
camera for use during the course of the program. Students are required to take all clinical
photographs with their own digital camera. Each documented full case should include facial
and lingual sextant images (12) and a facial image of the teeth in occlusion taken from the
anterior view. These 13 images should be taken at the initial exam, re-evaluation of initial
therapy, and at the completion of treatment. In addition all surgical therapy should be
documented with facial and lingual images preoperatively, with incisions before reflection,
after the site has been degranulated and the roots have been fully instrumented, after osseous
surgery if completed, after any regenerative procedure (i.e. bone graft, membrane), sutures
in place, post operative visit at 1 and two weeks. Additional post-op photos may be
desirable. Special photos are also encouraged when appropriate. Examples include images of
osseous defects or furcations with a probe in place, steps completed during root resection,
steps in GBR or block grafting etc.
Operatory Maintenance
Treatment operatories must be maintained in a clean, h y g i e n i c a n d o r ga n i z e d state at all
time i n accordance with provisions of the infection control policies of the College of
Dentistry. Textbooks, lecture notes, study models, charts, etc. are not to be kept in the
student's operatory.
Instrument Availability
Having a readily available supply of sterile instruments for patient treatment is essential to
efficient clinic operation. It is a top priority duty for the Postgraduate Periodontics assistants
to ensure that sterile instrument kits are always readily available for student use.
Equipment Repair
All materials, supplies and equipment needing repair or maintenance must be reported to the
Postgraduate Periodontics Customer Service Representative (front desk receptionist)/dental
assistants. Postgraduate Periodontics Students cannot order any supplies or equipment
for the department unless approved by the Program Director/ Clinic Coordinator. If the
student should note a low supply of any item or is aware of any item that should be ordered it
should be reported to the Postgraduate Periodontics Customer Service Representative
(front desk receptionist)/dental assistants, or the Program Director/ Clinic Coordinator.
56 Appendix U
REFERRAL
RESPONSIBILITIES
Initial Referral Acknowledgment

As in any periodontal practice, the Postgraduate Periodontics Program relies on patient
referrals. Each Postgraduate Periodontics Student has a responsibility to acknowledge the
referral in writing and thank the referring doctor. This is a professional courtesy that must
be performed for every referral. This is true for outside referrals and referrals from the
predoctoral clinic. In the latter case, a note by the Axium messaging system acknowledging
the referral and discussing findings and the treatment plan will enhance communication.
Treatment Plan and Progress Reports

Postgraduate Periodontics Students are obligated to forward to the referring dentist/predoctoral
student a complete diagnosis and treatment plan together with other relevant information.
Consultation with the referring doctor/predoctoral student & attending restorative faculty
member may be required prior to formulation of the final treatment plan. Where necessary,
it is courteous to provide a progress report to the referring dentist.
Dismissal and Transfer Reports

Following completion of active treatment each Postgraduate Periodontics Student has an
obligation to refer the patient back to the referring dentist/predoctoral student and give a
written account of the treatment results and maintenance needs. Provisions for maintenance
periodontal therapy should be spelled out in detail at this time. It should be absolutely clear
who is responsible for maintenance. When the periodontist and the referring doctor share
responsibility for maintenance it should be clear when each is responsible.
POSTGRADUATE PERIODONTICS HYGIENE RECALL PROGRAM
The postgraduate Periodontics clinic operates a hygiene recall program in the clinic with a
designated room, up to two dental chairs, and two hygienists. The therapeutic goals of the
program are as follows:
1. To prevent or minimize recurrence of disease progression in patients who were
previously treated for periodontitis, peri-implantitis, or gingivitis.
2. To prevent or reduce the incidence of tooth or implant loss by monitoring the
dentition and prosthetic replacements of the natural teeth
3. To increase the probability of locating and treating other conditions or diseases found
within the oral cavity in a timely manner.
The treatment protocol is as follows:
57 Appendix U
58 Appendix U
[Type text]
General Guidelines of the program: Hygienist is responsible for:

- Following up with patients for scheduling/ confirming appointments
- Gathering information on the medical and dental status of the patient
- Providing the residents with information on upcoming appointments for co managed patients
(patients treated by the resident and transferred to the hygienist for recall maintenance)
- Consulting with the resident/ faculty during appointments (and providing all necessary
information for the consultant to make decisions)
- Utilizing the last 45 Minutes of each day for communication with patients/
residents and confirmation of appointments.
Postgraduate Periodontics resident, in consultation with faculty, is responsible for:

- Reviewing medical/ dental Hx, reviewing hard/ soft tissue evaluations (including dental
caries)
- Determining the need for Rx
- Determining the recall interval
- Determining who should see the patient (hygienist vs. resident)
Appendix U
[Type text]
- Determining the nature of therapy provided at the appointment/ subsequent visits
Guidelines for the Assignment of patients for co management between the resident and the recall
program:
- Decision on a case by case basis based on clinical judgment with faculty approval
- General characteristics for a transfer patient:
- No significant medical Hx
- Active therapy not currently required
- Patient has been periodontally stable for at least two recall maintenance visits with the
resident
- Patient had seen the resident for limited (non periodontal disease related) evaluation
and therapy and now requires recall and maintenance.
Recall Maintenance appointments to be offered as a routine for:

- all periodontal patients currently under care of the residents as and when they are determined as to
be eligible for transfer into the program. These include
- All patients cared for in the PG Periodontics clinic for limited (non periodontal disease
related) evaluation and therapy and now require recall and maintenance.
- Patients seen in the Undergraduate clinics and now require recall and maintenance
It should be ensured that all patients of pre doctoral students in the recall program are in
active contact and follow up for POE with their respective students. In such instances, if
the predoctoral student providing care for the patient wishes/ is required to provide
periodontal maintenance care to the patient, then the patient will be transferred to the care of
the predoctoral student for maintenance care.
Appendix U
[Type text]
Appendix V – A student/resident evaluation form.
Please return to Dr. Reddy or Colleen by:
REVIEW OF GRADUATE STUDENT CLINICAL PROGRESS
Student: Faculty:
Period: Date:
• Please rate the student in each of the following categories making individual comments in any area you feel
necessary.
• Rate each student pursuant to his or her amount of training.
• Composite scores and ranges will be discussed with the student as well as consensus comments.
Outstanding Satisfactory Marginal Unsatisfactory
CLINICAL
1. Technical Skills 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
2. Patient Management 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
3. Treatment Planning Skills/ 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
Rationale
4. Clinical Judgment 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
5. Professional Conduct 4 . . . . .. . 3 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
6. Organization/Record keeping 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
7. Accepts Constructive 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
Criticism
8. Productivity 4 . . . . .. . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
9. Attendance 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
10. Collaborative Effort 4 . . . . .. . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . .NA
11. Teaching Ability 4 . . . . . . . 3 . . . . .. . 2 . . . . .. . 1 . . . . .NA
*
Outstanding- correct, thorough and impressive reasoning, skill assessed should exhibit performance that far
exceeds that of most residents for the year in program
Satisfactory- correct, clinical reasoning complete, skill assessed is adequate but not outstanding, this
performance is what we expect from most residents
Marginal- incomplete reasoning but safe, skill assessed exhibits performance that is below what we expect
for a resident for the year in program
Unsatisfactory- incorrect and/or incomplete and potentially harmful clinical reasoning, skill assessed
exhibits performance that is remarkably deficient for the year in program, this rating indicates that progress
in the skill assessed will need to improve dramatically to successfully complete the program
COMMENTS (Please include written assessment of student’s progress relative to year in program,
use reverse side if needed):
Faculty Signature:____________________________ Date:____________

[Type text]
Appendix W
Specific written due process policies and procedures for adjudication of academic and disciplinary
complaints, which parallel those established by the sponsoring institution
POLICY AND PROCEDURES FOR PROMOTION AND DISMISSAL
FOR ACADEMIC REASONS
STUDENTS IN ADVANCED SPECIALTY EDUCATION PROGRAMS
1. Recommendations for dismissal of student for academic

deficiencies or academic misconduct shall be made by the Department Head and Program Director
in consultation with the faculty of the respective certification program. Students holding General
Medical Education (GME) residency positions are also subject to the GME Resident Professional
Conduct policies.
2. The Program Director shall notify the Department Head

and student who has been recommended for dismissal for academic deficiencies in writing (if
present) or by certified mail. In the case of an absent student, notification shall be sent to the
student via the student’s University email and by certified mail to the address of record as found in
the Banner system. A copy will also be sent to the Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs.
The notification will include a copy of the Policy and Procedures for Promotion and Dismissal for
Academic Reasons – Students in Advanced Specialty Education Programs in Dentistry.
3. Review procedure
a. Upon receipt of written notification of recommendation

for dismissal, a student may request, in writing, a review of the recommendation for dismissal.
The written request for review must be received by the Executive Associate Dean for Academic
Affairs within five (5) working days of the student’s receiving notification of the action.
b. The student is entitled to and should attend all classes,

seminars and clinic sessions (unless the dismissal is for clinical incompetence) until final
disposition of the case is determined as set forth below.
c. The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs shall

set a date and time for the review hearing by the Graduate Dental Education Committee
(GDEC) which is to be held within ten (10) working days of the receipt of a written request for
a review from the student. The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs may extend the
10 working day limitation with the verbal concurrence of the involved student
d. The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs shall

notify the student and the student’s Department Head and Program Director of the time and
place for the review. Notification shall be sent to the student via the student’s University email.
In the case of an absent student, notification shall be sent to the student via the student’s
University email and by certified mail to the address of record as recorded in the Banner
system.
e. The review will be conducted by the Executive Associate

Dean for Academic Affairs along with the Program Directors of each of the other programs. No
[Type text]
entitlements accrue to the student at this review except that the student will be requested to be
present.
f. A simple majority of Program Directors from the

departments (excluding the student’s department) shall constitute a quorum.
g. The review hearing will held in accordance with the

Process for Appeals Hearing UIC Students in Predoctoral and Post-Grad Programs.
h. The Executive Associate Dean will chair the hearing and

will have no vote unless there is a tie vote, in which case, the Executive Associate Dean must
cast the deciding vote.
4. After the review has been held, the Executive Associate

Dean for Academic Affairs shall notify the Department Head, the Program Director and the student
in writing of the final decision within seven (7) working days of the completion of the review.
Notification shall be given to the student in a formal meeting with the student. In the case of an
absent student, notification shall be sent to the student via the student’s University email and by
certified mail to the address of record as recorded in the Banner.
5. PROCEDURES FOR APPEAL OF GDEC ACTION
a. General
A student affected by any GDEC action may appeal the decision. The Executive Associate
Dean for Academic Affairs (or designee), upon receipt of a written petition for appeal from the
student, shall initiate the formal GDEC appeal procedures.
A student petitioning for appeal of an action by the GDEC shall be allowed provisional
registration until final resolution of the action is made. However, if the cause for the action, in
whole or in part, is based on an "F" grade in clinical courses involving patient care, the student
shall not be permitted to participate in the clinical program of the College of Dentistry while the
appeal is in progress. If the student is considered to be a danger, in any way, to his/her patients,
peers, or staff, the student shall not be permitted to participate in the academic or clinical
program of the College of Dentistry while the appeal is in progress.
b. Request and Grounds for Appeal
The student’s appeal request must be in writing and received by the Executive Associate Dean
for Academic Affairs (or designee) within five (5) working days of the student receiving notice
of GDEC action. In the appeal request, the student must allege one or more of the following
grounds as justification for an appeal to overturn a GDEC decision.
1. Substantial evidence not previously considered:
New evidence exists, sufficient to alter a decision, which was not available to the student
at the time of the original hearing.
2. Evidence of prejudice by a member of the GDEC:

[Type text]
Significant evidence exists that a member of the GDEC who took part in the original
decision was prejudiced against the student and used that prejudice to influence the other
voting members of the committee.
3. Significant policy or procedural errors by the GDEC:
A procedural error occurred in the original hearing on the matter by the GDEC as set
forth above, which substantially affected the outcome of the review.
c. Selection of the Appeals Panel
Three (3) full time faculty members who were not part of the original hearing, and who are not
members of the appealing student’s department shall be appointed by the Dean within five (5)
working days of the student’s written request. The Dean shall notify the Executive Associate
Dean for Academic Affairs of the names of the Appeals Panel members.
d. Scheduling of Appeal
The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs (or designee) shall schedule a meeting of
the Appeal Panel within five (5) working days following receipt of the names of the Appeals
Panel members. The meeting shall be convened no sooner than ten (10) working days and no
later than twenty (20) working days from receipt of the student’s appeal request. The student
may waive the ten (10) working day provision by signing and dating a waiver agreement.
Should the student waive the ten (10) working day provision, all involved parties of interest
shall be notified promptly as to the date, time and location of the Appeal Hearing.
e. Notice of Appeal Hearing
The Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs shall notify the student, the Appeal Panel
and any involved Program Director(s) of the date, time, and place of the appeal hearing. Copies
of the GDEC on POLICY AND PROCEDURES FOR PROMOTION AND DISMISSAL FOR
ACADEMIC REASONS-STUDENTS IN ADVANCED SPECIALTY EDUCATION PROGRAMS
and the PROCESS FOR Hearing – UG-PG STUDENTS shall be furnished to the departments at
the same time that notice of the appeal is given.
e. Appeal Procedures
1. Composition of the Appeal Panel:
The Appeal Panel shall be chaired by the Executive Associate Dean for Academic
Affairs, who shall not have a vote. All voting members of the Appeal Panel must be
present for the appeal to proceed as scheduled. Ex-officio GDEC members may be
present at the discretion of the Chair. In the event of a tie vote, the Executive Associate
Dean for Academic Affairs must cast the tie-breaking vote.
2. Evidence to be considered:
[Type text]
The Appeal Panel shall examine the appeal request, consider all relevant information
presented to the GDEC at the time its original decision was made and may hear new
evidence, interview new witnesses or review new evidence as the Appeal Panel
members deem necessary.
a. The student must submit to the Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs (or
designee) a list of witnesses he/she would like the Appeal Panel to interview, with
reasons (in writing) why the interviews would be relevant. The list of witnesses
must be submitted at least 48 hours prior to the scheduled hearing. The Appeal
Panel shall have discretion to determine if the evidence or interviews would be
relevant.
b. The chair of the Appeal Panel shall limit discussion to only those issues contained in
the appeal request.
c. The Appeal Panel may recess and reconvene as necessary to consider the evidence
presented or as is otherwise appropriate.
d. The action of the Appeal Panel shall be based on all of the evidence presented at the
appeal.
3. Student Involvement:
The student need not appear at the appeal hearing, but the student may request that
he/she along with the Associate Dean for Student and Diversity Affairs or his/her
advocate be present at times when new evidence is presented. If the student opts to have
an advocate present, the Executive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs (or designee)
must be notified in writing at least 48 hours prior to the scheduled hearing. Should the
advocate be a lawyer, the College of Dentistry must notify University legal counsel and
have legal counsel present at the hearing. The Appeal Panel shall determine whether or
not it is appropriate to include the student, the Associate Dean for Student and Diversity
Affairs, witnesses and/or the student's advocate at the appeal hearing.
4. Decision of the Appeal Panel:
The Appeal Panel is empowered to do one of the following:
a. uphold the original hearing decision of the GDEC

b. modify the decision of the GDEC
c. overturn the decision of the GDEC
The decision of the Appeal Panel shall be final and shall be implemented immediately. The
Executive Dean for Academic Affairs must notify the student, in writing, within two (2)
working days of the Appeal Panel’s decision. If the student is not present this notification
will be sent via registered courier and U. S. mail to the student’s address of record in the
Banner system.
Approved by the Graduate Dental Education Committee June 17, 2013

[Type text]
Process for Appeals Hearing

UIC Students in Predoctoral and Post-Grad Programs
Executive Session
1) Assure a quorum is present
2) Explain purpose for the Hearing
3) Ask for questions or discussions prior to the Student/resident being seated (but only questions for process or
procedure)
Open Session
4) Escort the student and advisor and the Department Representatives into the hearing room
5) Call Meeting to order.
6) Explain the purpose of the hearing.
7) Introduce the student and advocate
8) Have each committee member introduce him/herself to the student
9) Explain the process and procedure and rules for advocate (if present).
10) Ask student/resident if he/she has any questions prior to the start of the hearing.
11) Chairperson of Hearing, Department Head, Program Director or Course Director addresses the committee and
explains the reason for action (dismissal). Any materials that are presented should be distributed to all members
of the committee and to the student/resident.
12) Committee asks questions of the Department Head/Program Director.
13) Student/resident is asked to address the committee. Any materials that are presented should be distributed to all
members of the committee.
14) The committee asks questions of the student/resident.
15) Witness or Spokesperson (if present)
a) Witness or spokesperson for student invited into hearing room
b) Witness speaks, committee asks questions
c) Witness leaves hearing room
16) Chairperson, Department Head, Program Director or Course Director closing statement
17) Student closing statement
18) Ask the student/resident if he/she felt that they had a fair opportunity to present his/her case to the committee.
19) Thank the student/resident for presenting
20) Thank the department for presenting
21) Inform the student/resident that they will receive a written response (certified US mail or delivery service) of the
committee’s decision within seven (7) working days
22) Department Head/Program Director/Course Director and Student/Resident are escorted out of the hearing room
[Type text]
23) Ask all parties to remain in the area should amplification be needed
Executive Session
24) Return to the conference room.
25) Advise the committee of the various options that are available. (a. continue academic dismissal or b. recommend
the reinstatement of the student into the program with or without conditions).
26) Ask that a motion be made.
27) Ask for a second to the motion
28) Open the floor for discussion
29) Vote on the motion.
30) Repeat 25-28 until a resolution is reached
Open Session
31) Thank the committee for meeting
32) Dismiss the department and student from the waiting area
33) Arrange for communication of outcome to all parties (department, university officials, student/resident.)
Approved by SSP September 20, 2012

Approved by Graduate Dental Education Committee June 30, 2013

Periodontics (PDFDrive)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Periodontics (PDFDrive)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Periodontics

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

Table of Contents iii

General Information Sheet v

Previous Site Visit Recommendations viii

Compliance with Commission Policies ix

Standard 1 – Institutional Commitment/Program Effectiveness/Affiliations 1

Standard 2 – Program Director and Teaching Staff 7

Standard 3 – Facilities and Resources 9

Standard 4 – Curriculum and Program Duration 15

Standard 5 – Advanced Education Students/Residents 33

Summary of Self-Study Report 41

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

Appendix A-1: UIC College of Dentistry Vision and Mission Statements

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

a. What is the length of the program? 34 months.

d. What is the program’s CODA-authorized base number enrollment?

e. The program offers a X certificate degree or both

Endodontics Accredited – CODA

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

h. What is the percentage of the students’/residents’ total program time devoted to

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

Total # Board # Educationally # Other**

Less than half-

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

Previous Site Visit Recommendations

There were no recommendations in the 2006 site visit report.

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

Compliance With Commission Policies

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

STANDARD 1 – Institutional Commitment/Program Effectiveness

A Brilliant Future STANDARD 1

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

The program documents its effectiveness in three different areas:

STANDARD 1 A Proud Past

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

A Brilliant Future STANDARD 1

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

6. Is the advanced specialty education program sponsored by an institution, which is

7. If a hospital is the sponsor, is the hospital accredited by an accreditation

8. If an educational institution is the sponsor, is the educational institution Accredited

The University of Illinois at Chicago is accredited by:

The Higher Learning Commission

STANDARD 1 A Proud Past

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

A Brilliant Future STANDARD 1

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

14. Is documentary evidence of agreements, approved by the sponsoring and relevant

15. Are the following items covered in such inter-institutional agreements:

STANDARD 1 A Proud Past

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

STANDARD 2 - PROGRAM DIRECTOR AND TEACHING STAFF

Dr. Gajendrareddy is a board certified periodontist.

A Brilliant Future STANDARD 2

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

19. Does the director devote sufficient time to the program:

a. Utilize a faculty that can offer a diverse educational experience in biomedical,

b. Promote cooperation between periodontics, general dentistry, related dental

c. Select students/residents qualified to undertake specialty training in

STANDARD 2 A Proud Past

Periodontics - Accreditation Self Study

d. Develop and implement the curriculum plan? YES

e. Evaluate and document student/resident and faculty performance? YES